Author: keichwa Date: 2014-10-07 18:05:59 +0200 (Tue, 07 Oct 2014) New Revision: 89812 Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/add-on-creator.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/add-on.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/audit-laf.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/auth-client.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/auth-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/autoinst.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/base.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/bootloader.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/ca-management.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/cio.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/cluster.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/control-center.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/control.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/country.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/crowbar.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/dhcp-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/dns-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/drbd.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/fcoe-client.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/firewall-services.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/firewall.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/firstboot.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/ftp-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/geo-cluster.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/gtk.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/http-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/inetd.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/installation.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/instserver.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/iplb.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-client.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-lio-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/isns.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/kdump.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/kerberos-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/kerberos.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/languages_db.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap-client.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/live-installer.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/lxc.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/mail.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/multipath.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/ncurses-pkg.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/ncurses.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/network.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/nfs.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/nfs_server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/nis.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/nis_server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/ntp-client.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/oneclickinstall.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/online-update-configuration.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/online-update.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/opensuse_mirror.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/packager.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/pam.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/pkg-bindings.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/printer.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/product-creator.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/proxy.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/qt-pkg.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/qt.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/rdp.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/rear.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/registration.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/reipl.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/relocation-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/s390.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-client.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-users.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/scanner.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/security.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/services-manager.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/slp-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/snapper.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/sound.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/squid.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/sshd.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/storage.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/sudo.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/support.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/sysconfig.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/tftp-server.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/timezone_db.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/tune.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/update.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/users.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/vm.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/wagon.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/wol.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/xpram.fa.po trunk/yast/fa/po/yast2-apparmor.fa.po Log: merged Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/add-on-creator.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/add-on-creator.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/add-on-creator.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:55+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-06-11 16:28+0430\n" "Last-Translator: مصطفی برمشوری- گ.گل <mostafa.barmshory@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: American English <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/add-on.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/add-on.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/add-on.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:33+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-08-04 09:02+0330\n" "Last-Translator: Mohammad Rezaei Seresht <mohammad@rezaeiseresht.ir>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -38,32 +38,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/add-on.rb:64 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use " -"xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." -msgstr "" -"نام فایل مقصد(خصیصه ی 'xmlfile') وجود ندارد. دستور زیر را استفاده کنید. " -"xmlfile=<فایل XML مقصد>" +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." +msgstr "نام فایل مقصد(خصیصه ی 'xmlfile') وجود ندارد. دستور زیر را استفاده کنید. xmlfile=<فایل XML مقصد>" #. dialog caption #. this is a heading #. Cleanup UI - Prepare it for progress callbacks #: src/clients/add-on.rb:105 src/clients/add-on_proposal.rb:76 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1871 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1877 msgid "Add-On Products" msgstr "" #. busy message (dialog) #. TRANSLATORS: dialog content - a very simple label #: src/clients/add-on.rb:107 src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:155 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1872 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1878 msgid "Initializing..." msgstr "در حال مقدار دهی اولیه..." #. help #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/add-on.rb:109 src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:157 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1873 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1879 msgid "<p>Initializing add-on products...</p>" msgstr "" @@ -89,10 +85,10 @@ #. placeholder for unknown path #. placeholder for unknown URL #: src/clients/add-on_proposal.rb:35 src/clients/add-on_proposal.rb:41 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:374 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:384 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:940 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:949 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:371 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:381 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:937 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:946 msgid "Unknown" msgstr "ناشناس" @@ -118,7 +114,7 @@ #. main screen heading #: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:153 #: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:212 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:912 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:909 msgid "Add-On Product Installation" msgstr "نصب محصولات مضاعف(Add-on)" @@ -129,8 +125,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:226 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the language extensions to be installed then click <b>OK</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select the language extensions to be installed then click <b>OK</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: popup question @@ -224,40 +219,40 @@ #. ... #. ] #: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:163 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:585 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1586 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1598 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:582 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1592 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1604 msgid "No product found in the repository." msgstr "" #. error report -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:319 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:316 msgid "No software repository found on medium." msgstr "" #. busy message -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:338 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:335 msgid "Initializing new source..." msgstr "" -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:379 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:376 msgid "URL: %1, Directory: %2" msgstr "" #. dialog caption -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:392 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:389 msgid "Software Repository Selection" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:394 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:391 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Software Repository Selection</b></big><br>\n" "Multiple repositories were found on the selected medium.\n" "Select the repository to use.</p>\n" msgstr "" -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:404 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:401 msgid "Repositories &Found" msgstr "" @@ -269,33 +264,33 @@ #. else #. { #. yes-no popup -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:416 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:743 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:413 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:740 msgid "Really abort add-on product installation?" msgstr "" #. popup message -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:427 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:424 msgid "Select a repository." msgstr "یک مخزن انتخاب کنید." #. message popup -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:632 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:629 msgid "Dependencies of the add-on product cannot be fulfilled." msgstr "" #. dialog caption -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:713 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:710 msgid "Product Selection" msgstr "انتخاب محصول" #. multi selection list -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:719 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:716 msgid "Available Products" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:725 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:722 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Product Selection</big></b><br/>\n" "Multiple products were found in the repository. Select the products\n" @@ -303,12 +298,12 @@ msgstr "" #. message popup -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:793 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:790 msgid "Dependencies of the selected add-on products cannot be fulfilled." msgstr "" #. Help for add-on products -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:915 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:912 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Add-On Product Installation</b></big><br/>\n" "Here see all add-on products that are selected for installation.\n" @@ -317,106 +312,104 @@ msgstr "" #. table cell, %1 is URL, %2 is directory name -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:944 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:941 msgid "%1, Directory: %2" msgstr "" #. table header -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:970 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:967 msgid "Product" msgstr "محصول" #. table header -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:972 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:969 msgid "Media" msgstr "" #. message report -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1127 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1124 msgid "Select a product to delete." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: busy message -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1135 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1132 msgid "Removing selected add-on..." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1253 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1259 msgid "Installed Add-on Products" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: table header item -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1260 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1266 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Unknown Product" msgid "Add-on Product" msgstr "محصول ناشناس" #. TRANSLATORS: table header item -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1262 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1268 msgid "URL" msgstr "آدرس" #. TRANSLATORS: push button -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1276 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1282 msgid "Run &Software Manager..." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help adp/1 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1280 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1286 msgid "<p>All add-on products installed on your system are displayed.</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help adp/2 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1282 -msgid "" -"<p>Click <b>Add</b> to add a new add-on product, or <b>Delete</b> to remove " -"an add-on which is in use.</p>" +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1288 +msgid "<p>Click <b>Add</b> to add a new add-on product, or <b>Delete</b> to remove an add-on which is in use.</p>" msgstr "" #. no items -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1335 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1341 msgid "<b>Vendor:</b> %1<br>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1336 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1342 msgid "Unknown vendor" msgstr "" -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1339 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1345 msgid "<b>Version:</b> %1<br>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1340 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1346 msgid "Unknown version" msgstr "نسخه نامشخص" -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1343 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1349 msgid "<b>Repository URL:</b> %1<br>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1349 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1355 msgid "Unknown repository URL" msgstr "" -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1356 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1362 msgid "<b>Repository Alias:</b> %1<br>" msgstr "" #. Removes the currently selected Add-On #. #. @return [Boolean] whether something has changed its state -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1636 -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1689 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1642 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1695 msgid "Unknown product" msgstr "" -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1639 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1645 msgid "Unknown URL" msgstr "" -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1695 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1701 msgid "" "Deleting the add-on product %1 may result in removing all the packages\n" "installed from this add-on.\n" @@ -425,7 +418,7 @@ msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: busy popup message -#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1712 +#: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1718 msgid "Removing product dependencies..." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/audit-laf.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/audit-laf.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/audit-laf.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -462,8 +462,7 @@ #. Read dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:35 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big></" -"b><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big></b><br>\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -494,21 +493,15 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:54 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Auditd Log File Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is " -"responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file <i>/var/" -"log/audit/audit.log</i> (default).\n" -"Events may come from the <i>apparmor</i> kernel module, from applications " -"which use <i>libaudit</i> (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file " -"watches).</p>" +"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file <i>/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> (default).\n" +"Events may come from the <i>apparmor</i> kernel module, from applications which use <i>libaudit</i> (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file watches).</p>" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 2/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:60 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Rules for auditctl</b> dialog offers more information about rules " -"and the possibility to add rules.\n" -"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>" +"<p>The <b>Rules for auditctl</b> dialog offers more information about rules and the possibility to add rules.\n" +"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 3/8 @@ -521,42 +514,33 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 4/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:68 msgid "" -"<p><b>Format</b>: set <i>RAW</i> to log all data (store in a format exactly " -"as the kernel\n" -"sends it) or <i>NOLOG</i> to discard all audit information instead of " -"writing it on disk (does not affect\n" +"<p><b>Format</b>: set <i>RAW</i> to log all data (store in a format exactly as the kernel\n" +"sends it) or <i>NOLOG</i> to discard all audit information instead of writing it on disk (does not affect\n" "data sent to the dispatcher).</p> " msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:74 msgid "" -"<p><b>Flush</b>: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to " -"<i>INCREMENTAL</i> the\n" -"<b>Frequency</b> parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an " -"explicit flush to disk.\n" -"<i>NONE</i> means: no special effort is made to flush data, <i>DATA</i>: " -"keep data portion synced,\n" +"<p><b>Flush</b>: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to <i>INCREMENTAL</i> the\n" +"<b>Frequency</b> parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an explicit flush to disk.\n" +"<i>NONE</i> means: no special effort is made to flush data, <i>DATA</i>: keep data portion synced,\n" "<i>SYNC</i>: keep data and meta-data fully synced.</p>" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:81 msgid "" -"<p>Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take " -"when this\n" +"<p>Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take when this\n" "value is reached via <b>Size and Action</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 7/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"<p>If the action is set to <i>ROTATE</i> the <b>Number of Log Files</b> " -"specifies the number\n" -"of files to keep. Set to <i>SYSLOG</i>, the audit daemon will write a " -"warning\n" -"to /var/log/messages. With <i>SUSPEND</i> the daemon stops writing records " -"to\n" +"<p>If the action is set to <i>ROTATE</i> the <b>Number of Log Files</b> specifies the number\n" +"of files to keep. Set to <i>SYSLOG</i>, the audit daemon will write a warning\n" +"to /var/log/messages. With <i>SUSPEND</i> the daemon stops writing records to\n" "disk. <i>IGNORE</i> means do nothing, <i>KEEP_LOGS</i> is similar\n" "to ROTATE, but log files are not overwritten.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -564,13 +548,10 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 8/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:93 msgid "" -"<p><b>Computer Name Format</b> describes how to write the computer name to " -"the\n" +"<p><b>Computer Name Format</b> describes how to write the computer name to the\n" "log file. If <i>USER</i> is set, the <b>User Defined Name</b> is\n" -"used. <i>NONE</i> means no computer name is inserted. <i>HOSTNAME</i> uses " -"the\n" -"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. <i>FQD</i> uses the fully " -"qualified\n" +"used. <i>NONE</i> means no computer name is inserted. <i>HOSTNAME</i> uses the\n" +"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. <i>FQD</i> uses the fully qualified\n" "domain name.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -578,28 +559,23 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:101 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Auditd Dispatcher Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page\n" +"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the manual page\n" "('man auditd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"<p><b>Dispatcher</b>: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon " -"and\n" +"<p><b>Dispatcher</b>: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon and\n" "gets all audit events on stdin.</p>" msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:111 msgid "" -"<p><b>Communication</b>: Controls the communication between the daemon and " -"the dispatcher\n" -"program. A <i>lossy</i> communication means that events going to the " -"dispatcher are discarded\n" -"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose <i>lossless</i> if you want " -"a blocking/lossless\n" +"<p><b>Communication</b>: Controls the communication between the daemon and the dispatcher\n" +"program. A <i>lossy</i> communication means that events going to the dispatcher are discarded\n" +"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose <i>lossless</i> if you want a blocking/lossless\n" "communication.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -607,8 +583,7 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<p>The dispatcher 'audispd' is an audit event multiplexor.\n" -"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd." -"conf').</p>" +"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 5/5 @@ -629,28 +604,23 @@ #. disk space dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"<p><b>Space Left</b> (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform " -"an <b>Action</b> because\n" +"<p><b>Space Left</b> (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an <b>Action</b> because\n" "the system is starting to run low on space.</p>" msgstr "" #. disk space dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:136 msgid "" -"<p>The value for <b>Admin Space Left</b> should be lower than above. The " -"system <b>is running\n" -"low</b> on disk space if the value is reached and the specified <b>Action</" -"b> will be performed.</p>" +"<p>The value for <b>Admin Space Left</b> should be lower than above. The system <b>is running\n" +"low</b> on disk space if the value is reached and the specified <b>Action</b> will be performed.</p>" msgstr "" #. disk space dialog hep 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:140 msgid "" "<p>If an action is set to <i>EMAIL</i>, a warning mail will be sent to the\n" -"account specified in <b>Action Mail Account</b>.<br> <i>SYSLOG</i> means " -"the\n" -"disk space warning will be written to /var/log/messages. <i>IGNORE</i> " -"means\n" +"account specified in <b>Action Mail Account</b>.<br> <i>SYSLOG</i> means the\n" +"disk space warning will be written to /var/log/messages. <i>IGNORE</i> means\n" "do nothing. <i>EXEC</i> runs the script specified in <b>Path to\n" "Script</b>. <i>SUSPEND</i> stops writing records to disk. <i>SINGLE</i>\n" "switches the system to single user mode. <i>HALT</i> shuts down the\n" @@ -660,10 +630,8 @@ #. disk space dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:150 msgid "" -"<p>You can also specify a <b>Disk Full Action</b> (disk has become full " -"already) and\n" -"a <b>Disk Error Action</b> (performed whenever an error is detected while " -"writing to disk).\n" +"<p>You can also specify a <b>Disk Full Action</b> (disk has become full already) and\n" +"a <b>Disk Error Action</b> (performed whenever an error is detected while writing to disk).\n" "Available actions are the same as above (except for <i>EMAIL</i>).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -671,8 +639,7 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "<p><b>Note:</b> All scripts specified for <i>EXEC</i> must be owned\n" -"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be " -"entered.</p>\n" +"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 1/6 @@ -681,39 +648,31 @@ "<p><b><big>Rules for auditctl</big></b><br>\n" "This dialog offers the possibility to enable or to disable the syscall\n" "auditing as well as to lock the audit configuration.\n" -"The selected flag from <b>Set Enabled Flag</b> will be added to the rules.</" -"p>" +"The selected flag from <b>Set Enabled Flag</b> will be added to the rules.</p>" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:167 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Note:</b><br>Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next " -"reboot.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Note:</b><br>Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next reboot.</p>" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:171 msgid "" "<p>Enabling auditing without additional rules will cause the\n" -" applications which use <i>libaudit</i>, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/" -"audit.log (default).</p> " +" applications which use <i>libaudit</i>, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default).</p> " msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:175 msgid "" -"<p>You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for " -"advanced users.<br>\n" +"<p>You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for advanced users.<br>\n" "For more information about all options, see 'man auditctl'.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:179 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Check Syntax</b> sends the rules via <i>auditctl</i> to the audit " -"subsystem and checks the syntax.<br><b>Restore</b> restores the settings " -"from /etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" +msgid "<p><b>Check Syntax</b> sends the rules via <i>auditctl</i> to the audit subsystem and checks the syntax.<br><b>Restore</b> restores the settings from /etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 6/6 @@ -754,11 +713,8 @@ #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:318 #, fuzzy -#| msgid "" -#| "<p>To access the X11 system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" -msgid "" -"<p>To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package <b>%1</b> " -"must be installed.</p>" +#| msgid "<p>To access the X11 system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgid "<p>To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package <b>%1</b> must be installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>برای دسترسی به سرویس X11، باید بسته ی, <b>%1</b>نصب شود</p>" #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:321 Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/auth-client.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/auth-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/auth-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -205,70 +205,48 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:22 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." +msgid "Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:27 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:80 -msgid "" -"Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data " -"Provider crash or restart before they give up" +msgid "Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data Provider crash or restart before they give up" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:31 -msgid "" -"SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be " -"configured or SSSD won't start." +msgid "SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be configured or SSSD won't start." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:32 -msgid "" -"This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be " -"queried." +msgid "This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be queried." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:36 -msgid "" -"Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing " -"user name and domain into these components" +msgid "Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:40 -msgid "" -"The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a " -"(name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." +msgid "The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:44 -msgid "" -"SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update " -"its internal DNS resolver." +msgid "SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update its internal DNS resolver." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:45 -msgid "" -"By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to " -"polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." +msgid "By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:49 -msgid "" -"Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache " -"files." +msgid "Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache files." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:53 -msgid "" -"This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a " -"domain name component." +msgid "This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a domain name component." msgstr "" #. Define Global Services Parameters #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:60 -msgid "" -"Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the " -"default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most " -"verbose mode." +msgid "Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most verbose mode." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:65 @@ -284,42 +262,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:85 -msgid "" -"This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be " -"opened at one time by this SSSD process." +msgid "This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be opened at one time by this SSSD process." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:90 -msgid "" -"This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process " -"can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." +msgid "This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:95 -msgid "" -"If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it " -"is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." +msgid "If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." msgstr "" #. NSS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:103 -msgid "" -"How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about " -"all users)?" +msgid "How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about all users)?" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:108 -msgid "" -"The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background " -"if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value " -"for the domain." +msgid "The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value for the domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:113 -msgid "" -"Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits " -"(that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) " -"before asking the back end again." +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits (that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) before asking the back end again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:118 @@ -331,20 +295,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:128 -msgid "" -"If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." +msgid "If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:132 -msgid "" -"Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value " -"or a template." +msgid "Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value or a template." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:136 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1103 -msgid "" -"Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified " -"explicitly by the domain's data provider." +msgid "Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified explicitly by the domain's data provider." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:140 @@ -360,50 +319,36 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:153 -msgid "" -"The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." +msgid "The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:157 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1107 -msgid "" -"The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." +msgid "The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:162 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:205 -msgid "" -"Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be " -"considered valid." +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be considered valid." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:167 -msgid "" -"Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be " -"valid." +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be valid." msgstr "" #. PAM configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:175 -msgid "" -"If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached " -"logins (in days since the last successful online login)." +msgid "If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached logins (in days since the last successful online login)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:180 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:185 -msgid "" -"The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts " -"has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." +msgid "The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:190 -msgid "" -"Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." +msgid "Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:195 -msgid "" -"For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to " -"immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to " -"ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." +msgid "For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." msgstr "" #. The kerberos domain section @@ -414,37 +359,27 @@ #. SUDO configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:213 -msgid "" -"Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes " -"that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." +msgid "Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." msgstr "" #. AUTOFS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:221 -msgid "" -"Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative " -"hits before asking the back end again." +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative hits before asking the back end again." msgstr "" #. SSH configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:229 -msgid "" -"Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts " -"file." +msgid "Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts file." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:234 -msgid "" -"How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its " -"host keys were requested." +msgid "How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its host keys were requested." msgstr "" #. DOMAIN SECTIONS #. These configuration options can be present in a domain configuration section, that is, in a section called “[domain/NAME]” #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:243 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:248 -msgid "" -"UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is " -"outside these limits, it is ignored." +msgid "UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is outside these limits, it is ignored." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:253 @@ -452,51 +387,35 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:258 -msgid "" -"If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor " -"will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." +msgid "If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:263 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the " -"backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:268 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:273 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:278 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before " -"asking the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:283 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:288 -msgid "" -"How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend " -"again." +msgid "How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:293 -msgid "" -"How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid " -"before asking the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:298 @@ -504,9 +423,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:303 -msgid "" -"Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before " -"being removed during a cleanup of the cache." +msgid "Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before being removed during a cleanup of the cache." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:308 @@ -514,9 +431,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:313 -msgid "" -"Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) " -"as the user's login name reported to NSS." +msgid "Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) as the user's login name reported to NSS." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:319 @@ -528,8 +443,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:331 -msgid "" -"The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." +msgid "The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:337 @@ -553,27 +467,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:366 -msgid "" -"Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string " -"containing user name and domain into these components." +msgid "Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:371 -msgid "" -"A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, " -"domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." +msgid "A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:377 -msgid "" -"Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when " -"performing DNS lookups." +msgid "Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when performing DNS lookups." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:382 -msgid "" -"Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS " -"resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." +msgid "Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:386 @@ -581,9 +487,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:387 -msgid "" -"If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of " -"the service discovery DNS query." +msgid "If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of the service discovery DNS query." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:391 @@ -595,15 +499,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:401 -msgid "" -"When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second " -"lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested " -"name was an alias." +msgid "When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested name was an alias." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:406 -msgid "" -"Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." +msgid "Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." msgstr "" #. Following options will be provided by SSSD's 'simple' access-control provider @@ -612,9 +512,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:417 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only " -"to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:422 @@ -622,9 +520,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:427 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This " -"applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:433 @@ -634,32 +530,23 @@ #. The local domain section #. This section contains settings for domain that stores users and groups in SSSD native database, that is, a domain that uses id_provider=local. #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:442 -msgid "" -"The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home " -"directory." +msgid "The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:447 -msgid "" -"Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:452 -msgid "" -"Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:457 -msgid "" -"Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created " -"home directory." +msgid "Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:462 -msgid "" -"The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in " -"the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by " -"sss_useradd(8)" +msgid "The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by sss_useradd(8)" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:467 @@ -672,15 +559,11 @@ #. The ldap domain section #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:480 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:485 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " -"should connect in the order of preference." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:491 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:497 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " -"should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:503 @@ -724,8 +607,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:553 -msgid "" -" The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:558 @@ -741,106 +623,67 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:573 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:778 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " -"parent object." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:578 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last " -"password change)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last password change)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:583 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password " -"age)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password age)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:588 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password " -"age)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password age)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:593 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning " -"period)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning period)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:598 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password " -"inactivity period)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password inactivity period)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:603 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this " -"parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its " -"shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:608 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " -"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in " -"kerberos." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in kerberos." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:613 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " -"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:618 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name " -"of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:623 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name " -"of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:628 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter " -"determines if access is allowed or not." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter determines if access is allowed or not." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:633 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if " -"access is allowed or not." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if access is allowed or not." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:638 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until " -"which date access is granted." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until which date access is granted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:643 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the " -"hours of a day in a week when access is granted." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the hours of a day in a week when access is granted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:648 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name " -"(UPN)." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name (UPN)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:652 @@ -848,10 +691,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:657 -msgid "" -"Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the " -"realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to " -"fail." +msgid "Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to fail." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:658 @@ -859,16 +699,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:663 -msgid "" -"Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of " -"enumerated records." +msgid "Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of enumerated records." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:668 -msgid "" -"Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups " -"with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save " -"space." +msgid "Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save space." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:673 @@ -880,17 +715,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:683 -msgid "" -"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will " -"use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry " -"to determine access privilege." +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:688 -msgid "" -"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the " -"presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access " -"privilege." +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:698 @@ -918,30 +747,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:728 -msgid "" -" The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " -"parent object." +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:734 -msgid "" -"If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. " -"RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will " -"follow." +msgid "If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will follow." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:740 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " -"feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with " -"complex or deep nested groups." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with complex or deep nested groups." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:746 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " -"feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when " -"dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:752 @@ -957,13 +775,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:768 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:773 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:783 @@ -971,9 +787,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:788 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their " -"aliases." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their aliases." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:793 @@ -981,52 +795,35 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:798 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:804 -msgid "" -"An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches " -"for this attribute type." +msgid "An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches for this attribute type." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:809 -msgid "" -" Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run " -"before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode " -"is entered)." +msgid " Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:814 -msgid "" -"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group " -"enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results " -"are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:819 -msgid "" -"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) " -"following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:824 -msgid "" -"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs " -"will abort if no response is received." +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs will abort if no response is received." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:829 -msgid "" -"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be " -"maintained." +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be maintained." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:834 -msgid "" -"Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. " -"Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." +msgid "Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:839 @@ -1034,33 +831,23 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:844 -msgid "" -"When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum " -"security level necessary to establish the connection." +msgid "When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum security level necessary to establish the connection." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:849 -msgid "" -"Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal " -"cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." +msgid "Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:855 -msgid "" -"Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if " -"any." +msgid "Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if any." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:860 -msgid "" -"Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate " -"Authorities that sssd will recognize." +msgid "Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate Authorities that sssd will recognize." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:865 -msgid "" -"Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority " -"certificates in separate individual files." +msgid "Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority certificates in separate individual files." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:869 @@ -1076,16 +863,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:883 -msgid "" -"Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the " -"channel." +msgid "Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the channel." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:888 -msgid "" -"Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the " -"ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying " -"on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." +msgid "Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:892 @@ -1101,9 +883,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:907 -msgid "" -"If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to " -"canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." +msgid "If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:912 @@ -1119,8 +899,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:927 -msgid "" -"Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." +msgid "Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:932 @@ -1132,28 +911,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:941 -msgid "" -"Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows " -"password changes when service discovery is enabled." +msgid "Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows password changes when service discovery is enabled." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:946 -msgid "" -"Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with " -"days since the Epoch after a password change operation." +msgid "Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with days since the Epoch after a password change operation." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:951 -msgid "" -"If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), " -"this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that " -"must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." +msgid "If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:956 -msgid "" -" With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can " -"be enabled." +msgid " With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can be enabled." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:962 @@ -1165,15 +935,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:972 -msgid "" -"Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that " -"use the RFC2307 schema." +msgid "Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that use the RFC2307 schema." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:995 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:999 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the " -"Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1004 @@ -1181,9 +947,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1009 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1014 -msgid "" -"If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative " -"servers can be defined here." +msgid "If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative servers can be defined here." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1019 @@ -1195,39 +959,27 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1029 -msgid "" -" Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change " -"password request is aborted." +msgid " Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change password request is aborted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1034 -msgid "" -"Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been " -"spoofed." +msgid "Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been spoofed." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1039 -msgid "" -"The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from " -"KDCs." +msgid "The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from KDCs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1044 -msgid "" -"Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to " -"request a TGT when the provider comes online again." +msgid "Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to request a TGT when the provider comes online again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1048 -msgid "" -"Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer " -"immediately followed by a time unit." +msgid "Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1052 -msgid "" -"Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately " -"followed by a time unit." +msgid "Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1056 @@ -1235,9 +987,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1061 -msgid "" -"Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-" -"authentication." +msgid "Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-authentication." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1065 @@ -1254,16 +1004,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1087 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1091 -msgid "" -"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to " -"which SSSD should connect in order of preference." +msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to which SSSD should connect in order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1095 -msgid "" -"Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the " -"fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this " -"host." +msgid "Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this host." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1099 @@ -1271,15 +1016,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1112 -msgid "" -" Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " -"Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid " Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1117 -msgid "" -"Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " -"Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid "Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1122 @@ -1295,9 +1036,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1135 -msgid "" -"Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to " -"winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." +msgid "Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." msgstr "" #. The Active Directory domain section @@ -1306,21 +1045,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1151 -msgid "" -"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to " -"which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." +msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1155 -msgid "" -"May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully " -"qualified name." +msgid "May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1160 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into " -"FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1165 @@ -1328,8 +1061,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1169 -msgid "" -"Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." +msgid "Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." msgstr "" #. end Export Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/auth-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/auth-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/auth-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -98,9 +98,7 @@ #. error popup #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:58 #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:228 -msgid "" -"The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings " -"later in the installed system." +msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." msgstr "" #. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); @@ -113,9 +111,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to " -"continue." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:112 @@ -149,7 +145,7 @@ #. all known interfaces for testing #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:185 msgid "Open Port in Firewall" -msgstr "" +msgstr "باز کردن درگاه در دیواره ی آتش(Open Port in Firewall)" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:188 #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:203 @@ -164,7 +160,7 @@ #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:194 msgid "Firewall is disabled" -msgstr "" +msgstr "دیواره ی آتش (Firewall) غیر فعال است." #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:200 msgid "Register at SLP Daemon: " @@ -204,9 +200,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:309 -msgid "" -"OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has " -"finished." +msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:344 @@ -227,10 +221,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:107 msgid "" -"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not " -"running.\n" -"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do " -"you \n" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" "want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" @@ -311,9 +303,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:199 -msgid "" -"Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want " -"to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" #. get helps page @@ -502,7 +492,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1174 #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:264 msgid "Bro&wse..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "&کاوش" #. file selection headline #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1231 @@ -521,9 +511,7 @@ #. Doing these checks during installation will #. most probably fail #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1277 -msgid "" -"Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider " -"server.\n" +msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1280 @@ -561,15 +549,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1383 -msgid "" -"Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." msgstr "" #. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1410 -msgid "" -"Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication " -"configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1413 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 @@ -596,8 +581,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1525 msgid "" "\n" -"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to " -"encrypted\n" +"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to encrypted\n" "LDAP Connections.)\n" msgstr "" @@ -628,10 +612,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:21 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Yes</b> if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" -"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be " -"started. Note:\n" -"After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</" -"p>\n" +"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" +"After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:26 @@ -644,18 +626,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:30 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured " -"communication\n" -"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate " -"configured.</p>" +"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:33 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL " -"protected\n" -"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate " -"configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:36 @@ -682,17 +660,13 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:49 msgid "" -"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> <b>bdb</b> and <b>mdb</b>. " -"<b>Hdb</b> is a\n" -"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout " -"and\n" +"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> <b>bdb</b> and <b>mdb</b>. <b>Hdb</b> is a\n" +"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" "supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to <b>bdb</b>. A\n" "<b>hdb</b>-Database needs a larger <b>idlcachesize</b> than a\n" "<b>bdb</b>-Database for a good search performance.\n" -"<b>mdb</b>-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) " -"library to store data.\n" -"It similar to the <b>hdb</b> backend but it is both more space-efficient and " -"more execution-efficient.</p>\n" +"<b>mdb</b>-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) library to store data.\n" +"It similar to the <b>hdb</b> backend but it is both more space-efficient and more execution-efficient.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:58 @@ -703,24 +677,18 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:61 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password</" -"b> \n" -"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and " -"other \n" -"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends " -"the \n" -"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example," -"dc=com</tt>\n" -"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective " -"Administrator DN\n" +"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends the \n" +"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" "of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:69 msgid "" "<p>If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" -"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root " -"password\n" +"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root password\n" "entered earlier in the installation process.</p> " msgstr "" @@ -754,8 +722,7 @@ "click <b>Change Password</b>. \n" "A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the \n" "<b>Password Encryption</b>. \n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already " -"been \n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been \n" "set in the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -769,35 +736,25 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN " -"automatically\n" +"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" "with <b>Append Base DN</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:104 msgid "" -"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change " -"Password</b>.\n" -"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password " -"Encryption</b>.\n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been " -"set in the configuration.</p>\n" +"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change Password</b>.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password Encryption</b>.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:109 msgid "" -"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can " -"adjust\n" -"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the " -"number of entries\n" -"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough " -"RAM) this number\n" -"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index " -"Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" -"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially " -"HDB-Databases require a\n" -"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the " -"entry cache as a rule of\n" +"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" "thumbs).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -813,14 +770,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:122 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP " -"server\n" -"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests " -"before storing them\n" -"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, " -"but may be\n" -"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify " -"extended operation \n" +"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" "to manage passwords.</p> " msgstr "" @@ -834,15 +787,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object " -"DN</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object DN</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:139 msgid "" -"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You " -"may\n" +"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You may\n" "be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" "Policy Object being read from the server.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -856,33 +806,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:146 -msgid "" -"<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index " -"defined.</p>" +msgid "<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:149 msgid "" "<p>Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" "types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" -"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different " -"types\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" "of indexes.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:155 msgid "" "<p><b>Presence</b>: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" -"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be " -"configured\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" "for attributes that occur rarely in the database.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:160 msgid "" "<p><b>Equality</b>: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" -"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> " -"index\n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> index\n" "should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -901,11 +846,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly " -"added\n" +"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" "indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" -"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the " -"indexing\n" +"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" "information for the database.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -921,8 +864,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:185 msgid "" -"<p>For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a " -"more\n" +"<p>For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a more\n" "detailed view of a rule or to change one, select the rule in the table and\n" "click <b>Edit</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -935,11 +877,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:193 msgid "" -"<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose " -"target\n" +"<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" "definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" -"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, " -"using\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" "the <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> buttons.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -949,8 +889,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:202 msgid "" -"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" " -"checkbox, if you want to \n" +"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" checkbox, if you want to \n" "be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -960,16 +899,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:206 msgid "" -"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator " -"(stored\n" -"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is " -"synced\n" -"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify " -"or\n" -"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the " -"indicator\n" -"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator " -"is\n" +"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" +"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify or\n" +"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" "only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" "a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" "performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.</p>\n" @@ -981,14 +915,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:217 msgid "" -"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write " -"operations\n" -"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in " -"the session log. \n" -"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" " -"replication. In \n" -"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master " -"server.</p>" +"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:223 @@ -997,8 +927,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:226 msgid "" -"<p>Select \"<b>This database is a Replication Consumer</b>\" if you want " -"the\n" +"<p>Select \"<b>This database is a Replication Consumer</b>\" if you want the\n" "database to be a replica of a database on another server.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1012,8 +941,7 @@ "server here. Select the protocol to use (<b>ldap</b> or <b>ldaps</b>) and\n" "enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" "use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" -"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-" -"standard\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" "ldap ports.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1046,10 +974,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:252 msgid "" -"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to " -"authenticate against the master.\n" -"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated " -"database on the master.</p>\n" +"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:255 @@ -1060,10 +986,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" "operations with an LDAP referral. \n" -"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can " -"configure a different update referral here.\n" -"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for " -"the\n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" "slave server is as slave server too. </p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1104,15 +1028,11 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:289 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server.</" -"p> " +msgid "<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:292 -msgid "" -"<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration " -"wizard.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration wizard.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:295 @@ -1123,15 +1043,12 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:299 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios " -"are available:</p>" +msgid "<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:302 msgid "" -"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server " -"with\n" +"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" "no preparations for replication.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1143,8 +1060,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:308 msgid "" -"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that " -"replicates all its data,\n" +"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" "including configuration, from a master server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1166,18 +1082,15 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:321 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the " -"server\n" +"<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the server\n" "to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" -"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</" -"p>\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:326 msgid "" "<p>If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" -"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so " -"that\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so that\n" "the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1188,10 +1101,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:332 msgid "" "<p>If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" -"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File</" -"b>,\n" -"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the " -"corresponding\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File</b>,\n" +"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the corresponding\n" "textfields.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1209,26 +1120,21 @@ #. Tree Item Dialog "schema" 1/ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:346 msgid "" -"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog " -"in which to choose\n" -"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not " -"support the removal of \n" +"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" "Schema Data</p>" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "loglevel" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:352 msgid "" -"<p>Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and " -"statistics\n" +"<p>Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and statistics\n" "to syslog.</p>" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:356 -msgid "" -"<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or " -"disallow:</p>" +msgid "<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:359 @@ -1237,17 +1143,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:360 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind " -"requests.\n" +"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" "Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:363 msgid "" -"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind " -"when \n" -"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not " -"present) </p>" +"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) </p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:366 @@ -1258,8 +1161,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:369 msgid "" -"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow " -"unauthenticated\n" +"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow unauthenticated\n" "(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" "access controls and other administrative limits.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1277,16 +1179,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:380 msgid "" -"<p><b>Disable Simple Bind authentication</b>: Completely disable Simple " -"Bind\n" +"<p><b>Disable Simple Bind authentication</b>: Completely disable Simple Bind\n" "authentication</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:383 msgid "" "<p><b>Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" -"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection " -"back\n" +"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" "to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1301,12 +1201,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:394 msgid "" "<p>This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" -"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The " -"\"Frontend\"\n" -"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and " -"overlays\n" -"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration " -"of\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" +"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" "the LDAP server itself.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1317,84 +1214,63 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:403 msgid "" -"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete " -"Database...</b>.\n" +"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete Database...</b>.\n" "You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:406 msgid "" -"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") " -"here. This is required to make\n" +"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") here. This is required to make\n" "the configuration database accessible remotely.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:409 msgid "" -"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select " -"the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" -"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as " -"needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" +"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:412 msgid "" -"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master " -"server. Please enter the master\n" -"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or " -"\"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or \"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" "for the master's configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\").</p>" msgstr "" #. ########## kerberos #. Help text: basic settings 1/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:419 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your " -"Kerberos server.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your Kerberos server.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help text: basic settings 2/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:423 -msgid "" -"<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is " -"to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: database_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:427 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: acl_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:431 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file " -"that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</" -"p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: admin_keytab #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:435 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to " -"authenticate to the database.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to authenticate to the database.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: default_principal_expiration #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:439 -msgid "" -"<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals " -"created in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals created in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help principal_flags 1/13 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:443 -msgid "" -"<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in " -"this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:446 @@ -1439,9 +1315,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 6/13 :Enable user-to-user authentication #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:466 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another " -"user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:469 @@ -1450,12 +1324,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 7/13 :Requires preauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:471 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to " -"preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this " -"flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will " -"only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket " -"set." +msgid "If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:474 @@ -1464,9 +1333,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 8/13 :Requires hwauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:476 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using " -"a hardware device before receiving any tickets." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a hardware device before receiving any tickets." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:479 @@ -1475,9 +1342,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 9/13 :Allow service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:481 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this " -"principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:484 @@ -1486,10 +1351,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 10/13 :Allow tgs request #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:486 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-" -"granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was " -"used to obtain the TGT." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was used to obtain the TGT." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:489 @@ -1498,10 +1360,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 11/13 :Allow tickets #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:491 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this " -"principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within " -"this realm." +msgid "Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within this realm." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:494 @@ -1519,49 +1378,33 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 13/13 :Password changing service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:499 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change " -"service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a " -"user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that " -"principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password " -"authentication." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password authentication." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : dict_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:503 -msgid "" -"<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are " -"not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy " -"assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" +msgid "<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kadmind_port #. advanced item help : kpasswd_port #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:507 src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:511 -msgid "" -"<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens " -"for this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : key_stash_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:515 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored " -"with kdb5_stash.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored with kdb5_stash.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_ports #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:519 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:523 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the " -"master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_type @@ -1571,69 +1414,47 @@ #. advanced item help : max_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:531 -msgid "" -"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"valid for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be valid for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : max_renew_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:535 -msgid "" -"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"renewed for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be renewed for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:539 -msgid "" -"<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt " -"combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:543 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : reject_bad_transit #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:547 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm " -"tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm " -"names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_conns_per_server #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:551 -msgid "" -"<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be " -"maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" +msgid "<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_service_password_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:555 -msgid "" -"<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed " -"passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" +msgid "<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_subtrees #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:559 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The " -"list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</" -"p><p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under " -"the subtree.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</p><p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the subtree.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_containerref #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:563 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a " -"realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a " -"realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_maxtktlife @@ -1643,9 +1464,7 @@ #. advanced item help : kdb_maxrenewlife #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:571 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. ################################################################################# @@ -1970,9 +1789,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 -msgid "" -"This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the " -"standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 @@ -1980,8 +1797,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 -msgid "" -"Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 @@ -2006,7 +1822,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:204 #: src/include/auth-server/wizards.rb:297 msgid "Initializing..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "در حال مقدار دهی اولیه..." #. #-#-#-#-# auth-server.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# #. **************************************** @@ -2149,7 +1965,7 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2193 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2212 #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2213 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2214 msgid "No" -msgstr "" +msgstr "خیر" #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1043 #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1044 @@ -2157,7 +1973,7 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2193 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2212 #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2213 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2214 msgid "Yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "بله" #. skip attribute that already have an index defined #: src/include/auth-server/tree_structure.rb:1188 @@ -2293,9 +2109,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:197 -msgid "" -"Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous " -"directory access)" +msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:201 @@ -2303,8 +2117,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:204 -msgid "" -"Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:210 @@ -2638,7 +2451,7 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:820 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:990 msgid "Select" -msgstr "" +msgstr "انتخاب" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:826 msgid "Define the Access Level" @@ -2691,7 +2504,7 @@ #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1021 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1315 msgid "Attributes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "خصوصیت ها" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1023 msgid "Edit" @@ -2815,8 +2628,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 -msgid "" -"Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 @@ -3041,9 +2853,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1830 -msgid "" -"Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take " -"some minutes)" +msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1831 @@ -3063,9 +2873,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1953 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to " -"finish.\n" +msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1954 @@ -3094,7 +2902,7 @@ #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2227 msgid "Not configured yet." -msgstr "" +msgstr "هنوز پیکربندی نشده." #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2472 msgid "CA Certificate file does not exist." @@ -3167,9 +2975,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2860 -msgid "" -"A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its " -"own fully qualified hostname." +msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3376 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3389 @@ -3200,9 +3006,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4027 -msgid "" -"The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-" -"letter code." +msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." msgstr "" #. parameter check failed @@ -3244,8 +3048,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4881 -msgid "" -"Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4882 Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/autoinst.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/autoinst.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/autoinst.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -119,8 +119,7 @@ #. if we get no argument or map of options we are not in command line #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:47 -msgid "" -"Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" +msgid "Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" msgstr "" #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:57 @@ -144,18 +143,15 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:170 msgid "" "<p>Using this dialog, copy the contents of the file and specify the final\n" -"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified " -"location.</p>" +"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified location.</p>" msgstr "" #. help 2/2 #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:177 msgid "" "<p>To protect copied files, set the owner and the permissions of the files.\n" -"Set the owner using the syntax <i>userid:groupid</i>. Permissions can be a " -"symbolic\n" -"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit " -"pattern for the\n" +"Set the owner using the syntax <i>userid:groupid</i>. Permissions can be a symbolic\n" +"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit pattern for the\n" "new permissions.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -228,10 +224,8 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:321 msgid "" "<p>For many applications and services, you might have prepared\n" -"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location " -"in the\n" -"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web " -"server\n" +"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location in the\n" +"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web server\n" "and have an httpd.conf configuration file prepared.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -274,21 +268,21 @@ msgid "Executing Post-Scripts" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:269 +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:268 msgid "Restarting all running services" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:289 +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:288 msgid "Activating systemd default target" msgstr "" #. Just in case, remove this file to avoid reconfiguring... -#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:302 +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:301 msgid "Finishing Configuration" msgstr "" #. NetworkInterfaces::Write( ".*" ); -#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:405 +#: src/clients/inst_autoconfigure.rb:404 msgid "Processing resource %1" msgstr "" @@ -600,8 +594,7 @@ #: src/clients/report_auto.rb:213 msgid "" -"<p>Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-" -"out)\n" +"<p>Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-out)\n" "installation messages.</p> \n" msgstr "" @@ -624,8 +617,7 @@ #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:88 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> " -"to add\n" +"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> to add\n" "more <b>add-on</b> selections and packages.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -638,8 +630,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:128 -msgid "" -"The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" +msgid "The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" msgstr "" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:164 @@ -655,12 +646,9 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Mount in /etc/fstab By:</b>\n" "\tNormally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" -"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system " -"to mount\n" -"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems " -"can be\n" -"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not " -"possible.\n" +"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system to mount\n" +"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems can be\n" +"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not possible.\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -668,8 +656,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:71 msgid "" "<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" -"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "\t when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "\t A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" "\t " @@ -843,8 +830,7 @@ #. user selected this partition to be part of volgroup #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:589 -msgid "" -"Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." +msgid "Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:597 @@ -1289,9 +1275,7 @@ #. @param list menu items #. @return [Symbol] #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:565 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current " -"system?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current system?" msgstr "" #. opening/parsing the xml file failed @@ -1308,9 +1292,7 @@ #. FIXME: sucks sucks sucks sucks sucks #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:740 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current " -"system?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current system?" msgstr "" #. EXIT @@ -1439,8 +1421,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:348 msgid "" "Kickstart file was imported.\n" -"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and " -"partitioning\n" +"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and partitioning\n" "were imported correctly." msgstr "" @@ -1567,16 +1548,14 @@ "The installation confirmation option is selected by default\n" "to avoid unwanted installation. It stops the system\n" "during installation and shows a summary of requested operations in the\n" -"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without " -"interruption.\n" +"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without interruption.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:155 msgid "" "<P>\n" -"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in " -"manual mode\n" +"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in manual mode\n" "after the first reboot (after package installation).\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1717,8 +1696,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:17 msgid "" -"<p>This tool uses <em>xmllint</em> to validate the profile against the DTD " -"and\n" +"<p>This tool uses <em>xmllint</em> to validate the profile against the DTD and\n" "it checks for missing data. Some missing data might be intentional and any\n" "reported errors can be ignored, for example, when creating classes.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1744,8 +1722,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>This tool creates a reference profile by reading\n" "information from this system. Select the resources to read from this system\n" -"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package " -"selections.</p>\n" +"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package selections.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:36 @@ -1754,8 +1731,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:37 msgid "" -"<p>The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target " -"system.\n" +"<p>The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target system.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1788,8 +1764,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:53 msgid "" "If no partitions are defined and the specified drive is also\n" -"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions " -"are\n" +"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions are\n" "created automatically:" msgstr "" @@ -1804,12 +1779,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:62 -msgid "" -"By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new " -"partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST " -"to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended " -"partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition " -"using sectors rather than size in MBytes." +msgid "By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition using sectors rather than size in MBytes." msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:65 @@ -1822,8 +1792,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "For LVM and RAID setup, consult the documentation and add the configuration\n" -"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID " -"partitions as\n" +"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID partitions as\n" "a preparation.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1920,8 +1889,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<h3>Postinstallation Scripts</h3>\n" -"<P>You can also add commands to execute on the system after the " -"installation\n" +"<P>You can also add commands to execute on the system after the installation\n" "is completed. These scripts are run outside the chroot environment.\n" "</P>" msgstr "" @@ -1934,8 +1902,7 @@ "<P>For your postinstallation script to run inside the chroot\n" "environment, choose the <i>chroot scripts</i> options. Those scripts are\n" "run before the system reboots for the first time. By default, the chroot \n" -"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the " -"installed \n" +"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed \n" "system, always use the mount point \"/mnt\" in your scripts.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1945,8 +1912,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>It is possible to run chroot scripts in a later stage after\n" -"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted" -"\".\n" +"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted\".\n" "This runs the scripts in the installed system. \n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1969,8 +1935,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Interpreter:</H3>\n" -"<P>Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use <i>Perl</i> " -"or \n" +"<P>Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use <i>Perl</i> or \n" "<i>Python</i> for preinstallation scripts.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1981,12 +1946,9 @@ "<H3>Network Access:</H3>\n" "<P>While executing postinstallation scripts, the network is disabled and\n" "requires initialization in the scripts to make the network accessible. An\n" -"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, " -"which\n" -"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an " -"installation\n" -"over a network, you can use the <b>Network</b> option for the postscript, " -"too.\n" +"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, which\n" +"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an installation\n" +"over a network, you can use the <b>Network</b> option for the postscript, too.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1994,10 +1956,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Feedback and Debug:</H3>\n" -"<P>All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up " -"box as feedback.\n" -"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that " -"might help\n" +"<P>All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box as feedback.\n" +"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that might help\n" "you to debug your script.</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2085,8 +2045,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:474 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the " -"installation for\n" +"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation for\n" "your needs and take control in different stages of the installation.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2115,9 +2074,7 @@ #. @return [Boolean] true on success #. autoyast has read the autoyast configuration file but something went wrong #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:909 src/modules/Profile.rb:722 -msgid "" -"The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The " -"error message is:\n" +msgid "The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The error message is:\n" msgstr "" #. backdoor for merging problems. @@ -2189,10 +2146,8 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:450 msgid "" -"<p>Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to " -"those available\n" -"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the " -"data\n" +"<p>Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to those available\n" +"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the data\n" "entered is collected and exported to the control file that can be used to\n" "install another system using AutoYaST.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2201,8 +2156,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:457 msgid "" "<p>In addition to the existing and familiar modules,\n" -"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, " -"including\n" +"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, including\n" "partitioning, general options, and software.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2391,9 +2345,7 @@ #. Install #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:360 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image." -"log" +msgid "Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:368 @@ -2401,9 +2353,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:378 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image." -"log" +msgid "Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" msgstr "" #. Popup::Message( _("in the next file dialog you have to choose the target directory to save the image") ); @@ -2416,8 +2366,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:418 msgid "" "You can do changes to the image now in %1/\n" -"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be " -"changed anymore." +"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed anymore." msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:432 @@ -2463,8 +2412,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:613 msgid "" -"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different " -"AutoYaST XML file.\n" +"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different AutoYaST XML file.\n" "If you press the ok-button, the iso will be created." msgstr "" @@ -2507,16 +2455,12 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:903 -msgid "" -"The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the " -"autoyast profile." +msgid "The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the autoyast profile." msgstr "" #. 1 cyl buffer per partition #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:494 -msgid "" -"The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard " -"disk. %1MB missing" +msgid "The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard disk. %1MB missing" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:922 Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/base.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/base.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/base.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-07 13:28+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-03-01 17:04+0330\n" "Last-Translator: مصطفی برمشوری <mostafa.barmshor@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: American English <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" @@ -86,9 +86,7 @@ #. translators: default error message for command line #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:333 msgid "Use 'yast2 %1 help' for a complete list of available commands." -msgstr "" -"برای مشاهده لیست کامل فرمان های در دسترس از عبارت 'yast2 %1 help' استفاده " -"کنید." +msgstr "برای مشاهده لیست کامل فرمان های در دسترس از عبارت 'yast2 %1 help' استفاده کنید." #. translators: error message in command line interface #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:371 @@ -128,17 +126,13 @@ #. %1 is the module name, %2 is the action name #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:546 msgid "Use '%1 %2 help' for a complete list of available options." -msgstr "" -"برای مشاهده ی لیست کامل خصیصه های در دسترس از عبارت '%1 %2 help' استفاده " -"کنید." +msgstr "برای مشاهده ی لیست کامل خصیصه های در دسترس از عبارت '%1 %2 help' استفاده کنید." #. translators: error message, how to get command line help for non-interactive mode #. %1 is the module name, %2 is the action name #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:556 msgid "Use 'yast2 %1 %2 help' for a complete list of available options." -msgstr "" -"برای مشاهده لیست کامل خصیصه های در دسترس از عبارت 'yast2 %1 %2 help' استفاده " -"کنید." +msgstr "برای مشاهده لیست کامل خصیصه های در دسترس از عبارت 'yast2 %1 %2 help' استفاده کنید." #. translators: command line interface header, %1 is identification of the module #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:574 @@ -237,26 +231,17 @@ #. translators: module command line help, %1 is the module name #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:880 msgid "Run 'yast2 %1 <command> help' for a list of available options." -msgstr "" -"برای مشاهده ی لیستی از خصیصه های در دسترس 'yast2 %1 <command>' را اجرا کنید" +msgstr "برای مشاهده ی لیستی از خصیصه های در دسترس 'yast2 %1 <command>' را اجرا کنید" #. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:944 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use " -"xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." -msgstr "" -"نام فایل مقصد(خصیصه ی 'xmlfile') وجود ندارد. دستور زیر را استفاده کنید. " -"xmlfile=<فایل XML مقصد>" +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." +msgstr "نام فایل مقصد(خصیصه ی 'xmlfile') وجود ندارد. دستور زیر را استفاده کنید. xmlfile=<فایل XML مقصد>" #. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:956 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is empty. Use xmlfile=<target_XML_file> " -"command line option." -msgstr "" -"نام فایل مقصد(خصیصه ی 'xmlfile') خالی است. دستور زیر را استفاده کنید. " -"xmlfile=<فایل XML مقصد>" +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is empty. Use xmlfile=<target_XML_file> command line option." +msgstr "نام فایل مقصد(خصیصه ی 'xmlfile') خالی است. دستور زیر را استفاده کنید. xmlfile=<فایل XML مقصد>" #. translators: fallback name for a module at command line #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:1096 @@ -958,11 +943,7 @@ #. NCurses Control Center help 2/10 #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:334 -msgid "" -"<p>Tree navigation is also done by arrow keys. To open or close a branch use " -"[SPACE]. For modules showing a tree (might look like a list) of " -"configuration items on the left side use [ENTER] to get corresponding dialog " -"on the right.</p>" +msgid "<p>Tree navigation is also done by arrow keys. To open or close a branch use [SPACE]. For modules showing a tree (might look like a list) of configuration items on the left side use [ENTER] to get corresponding dialog on the right.</p>" msgstr "" #. NCurses Control Center help 3/10 @@ -972,8 +953,7 @@ "letter). Use [ALT] and the letter to activate the button.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>دکمه ها دارای کلیدهای میانبر هستند(حروف با رنگ روشن).\n" -"دکمه ی [ALT] را به همراه حرف مشخص شده فشار دهید تا دکمه مورد نظر فعال شود.</" -"p>" +"دکمه ی [ALT] را به همراه حرف مشخص شده فشار دهید تا دکمه مورد نظر فعال شود.</p>" #. NCurses Control Center help 4/10 #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:345 @@ -1006,8 +986,7 @@ #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:363 msgid "" "<p>3) <i>Function Keys</i><br>\n" -"F keys provide a quick access to main functions. The function key bindings " -"for the current dialog are shown in the bottom line.</p>" +"F keys provide a quick access to main functions. The function key bindings for the current dialog are shown in the bottom line.</p>" msgstr "" #. NCurses Control Center help 8/10 @@ -1471,6 +1450,17 @@ msgid "Failed to install required packages." msgstr "عدم موفقیت در نصب بسته های مورد نیاز." +#. TRANSLATORS: Popup message +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:265 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Writing the system configuration" +msgid "Updating system configuration..." +msgstr "نوشتن قالب بندی سیستم" + +#: library/general/src/modules/Message.rb:269 +msgid "This may take a while." +msgstr "" + #. Get information about the OS release #. Throws exception Yast::OSReleaseFileMissingError if release file #. is missing. @@ -1797,14 +1787,12 @@ #: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:286 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Create a new GPG key</b></big><br>\n" -"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> is started, see <tt>gpg</tt> manual pager for more " -"information.\n" +"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> is started, see <tt>gpg</tt> manual pager for more information.\n" "Press Ctrl+C to cancel.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>ایجاد یک کلید GPG جدید</b></big><br>\n" -"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> آغاز شده است, <tt>gpg</tt> pager دستی را برای اطلاعات " -"بیشترببینید.\n" +"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> آغاز شده است, <tt>gpg</tt> pager دستی را برای اطلاعات بیشترببینید.\n" "برای انصراف Ctrl+C را فشار دهید.\n" "</p>" @@ -1840,8 +1828,7 @@ #, fuzzy #| msgid "Enter a log message to describe the changes that you did" msgid "Enter a log message that describes the changes you made." -msgstr "" -"برای شرح تغییراتی که شما داده اید یک ثبت پیام(log message) را وارد کنید" +msgstr "برای شرح تغییراتی که شما داده اید یک ثبت پیام(log message) را وارد کنید" #. help for the log widget, part 1, alt. 1 #: library/log/src/modules/LogView.rb:109 @@ -1851,8 +1838,7 @@ "the field below.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>ثبت رخداد نمایش داده شده</big></b><br>\n" -"برای انتخاب ثبت رخداد(log) برای نمایش <b>Log</b> را استفاده کنید. این در " -"فیلد زیر\n" +"برای انتخاب ثبت رخداد(log) برای نمایش <b>Log</b> را استفاده کنید. این در فیلد زیر\n" "نمایش خواهد یافت.</p>\n" #. help for the log widget, part 1, alt. 2 @@ -1872,8 +1858,7 @@ "and select the action to process.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"برای پردازش اعمال پیشرفته یا ذخیره ی ثبت رخداد در یک فایل, دکمه ی <b>%1</b> " -"را فشار دهید\n" +"برای پردازش اعمال پیشرفته یا ذخیره ی ثبت رخداد در یک فایل, دکمه ی <b>%1</b> را فشار دهید\n" "و عمل مورد نظر را برای پردازش انتخاب کنید..</p>" #. help for the log widget, part 2, alt. 2, %1 is a menu button label @@ -1895,8 +1880,7 @@ "to which to save the log.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"برای ذخیره ی ثبت رخداد (log) در یک فایل, <b>ذخیره ی ثبت رخداد</b> را کلیک " -"کنید و فایل \n" +"برای ذخیره ی ثبت رخداد (log) در یک فایل, <b>ذخیره ی ثبت رخداد</b> را کلیک کنید و فایل \n" "مورد نظر را برای ذخیره کردن ثبت رخداد(log) انتخاب کنید.</p>\n" #. menu button @@ -1990,23 +1974,20 @@ #. transaltors: selection box title #: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:418 msgid "&Network Interfaces with Open Port in Firewall" -msgstr "" -"&واسط های شبکه با باز کردن درگاه در دیواره ی آتش(Open Port in Firewall)" +msgstr "&واسط های شبکه با باز کردن درگاه در دیواره ی آتش(Open Port in Firewall)" #. Check the INT zone, it's not protected by default #. See bnc #382686 #: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:511 #, fuzzy #| msgid "" -#| "These network interfaces assigned to internal network cannot be " -#| "unselected:\n" +#| "These network interfaces assigned to internal network cannot be unselected:\n" #| "%1" msgid "" "These network interfaces assigned to internal network cannot be deselected:\n" "%1\n" msgstr "" -"این واسط های شبکه اختصاص داده شده به شبکه داخلی نمی توانند انتخاب نشده " -"باشند:\n" +"این واسط های شبکه اختصاص داده شده به شبکه داخلی نمی توانند انتخاب نشده باشند:\n" "%1" #. question popup @@ -2057,8 +2038,7 @@ #. translators: selection box title #: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:725 msgid "Network &Interfaces with Open Port in Firewall" -msgstr "" -"واسط های &شبکه با باز کردن درگاه در دیواره ی آتش(Open Port in Firewall)" +msgstr "واسط های &شبکه با باز کردن درگاه در دیواره ی آتش(Open Port in Firewall)" #. push button to select all network intefaces for firewall #: library/network/src/modules/CWMFirewallInterfaces.rb:737 @@ -2093,8 +2073,7 @@ "set <b>%1</b>.<br>" msgstr "" "<p><b><big>تنظیمات دیواره ی آتش (Firewall)</big></b><br>\n" -"برای باز کردن دیواره ی آتش به منظور اجازه ی دسترسی دادن به سرویس از رایانه " -"های راه دور(remote),\n" +"برای باز کردن دیواره ی آتش به منظور اجازه ی دسترسی دادن به سرویس از رایانه های راه دور(remote),\n" "قرار دهید <b>%1</b>.<br>" #. help text for firewall port openning widget 2/3, optional @@ -2151,15 +2130,15 @@ #. pppN must be tried before pN, modem before netcard #. Device type label #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:401 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1202 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1213 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:405 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1206 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1217 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:108 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:198 msgid "Modem" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:406 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:410 msgid "Network Card" msgstr "کارت شبکه" @@ -2167,21 +2146,21 @@ #. Device type label #. Device type label #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:411 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1147 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1185 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1191 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1206 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:415 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1151 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1189 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1195 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1210 msgid "ISDN" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:416 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1154 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:420 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1158 msgid "DSL" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:418 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:422 #: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:485 #: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:486 #: library/packages/src/modules/SignatureCheckDialogs.rb:746 @@ -2197,327 +2176,327 @@ #. are represented as its sub-interfaces. #. And also we frequently confuse "device" and "interface" #. :-( -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1123 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1127 msgid "Additional Address" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1128 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1132 msgid "ARCnet" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1128 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1132 msgid "ARCnet Network Card" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1131 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1135 msgid "ATM" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1132 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1136 msgid "Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1136 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1140 msgid "Bluetooth" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1137 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1141 msgid "Bluetooth Connection" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1140 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1144 msgid "Bond" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1140 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1144 msgid "Bond Network" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1143 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1147 msgid "CLAW" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1144 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1148 msgid "Common Link Access for Workstation (CLAW)" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1147 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1151 msgid "ISDN Card" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1150 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1154 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:223 msgid "CTC" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1151 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1155 msgid "Channel to Channel Interface (CTC)" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1154 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1158 msgid "DSL Connection" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1156 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1160 msgid "Dummy" msgstr "مصنوع" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1156 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1160 msgid "Dummy Network Device" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1159 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1163 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:227 msgid "ESCON" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1160 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1164 msgid "Enterprise System Connector (ESCON)" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1164 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1168 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:220 msgid "Ethernet" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1165 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1169 msgid "Ethernet Network Card" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1168 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1172 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:222 msgid "FDDI" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1168 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1172 msgid "FDDI Network Card" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1171 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1175 msgid "FICON" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1172 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1176 msgid "Fiberchannel System Connector (FICON)" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1176 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1180 msgid "HIPPI" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1177 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1181 msgid "HIgh Performance Parallel Interface (HIPPI)" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1181 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1185 msgid "Hipersockets" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1182 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1186 msgid "Hipersockets Interface (HSI)" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1185 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1191 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1206 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1189 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1195 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1210 msgid "ISDN Connection" msgstr "" #. Device type label #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1187 -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1189 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1191 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1193 msgid "IrDA" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1187 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1191 msgid "Infrared Network Device" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1189 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1193 msgid "Infrared Device" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1194 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1198 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:224 msgid "IUCV" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1195 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1199 msgid "Inter User Communication Vehicle (IUCV)" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1198 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1202 msgid "OSA LCS" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1198 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1202 msgid "OSA LCS Network Card" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1200 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1204 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:219 msgid "Loopback" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1200 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1204 msgid "Loopback Device" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1204 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1208 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:228 msgid "Myrinet" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1204 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1208 msgid "Myrinet Network Card" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1209 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1213 msgid "Parallel Line" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1210 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1214 msgid "Parallel Line Connection" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1216 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1220 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:226 msgid "QETH" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1217 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1221 msgid "OSA-Express or QDIO Device (QETH)" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1221 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1225 msgid "IPv6-in-IPv4" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1222 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1226 msgid "IPv6-in-IPv4 Encapsulation Device" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1226 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1230 #, fuzzy msgid "Serial Line" msgstr "سومری" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1227 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1231 msgid "Serial Line Connection" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1231 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1235 msgid "Token Ring" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1232 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1236 msgid "Token Ring Network Card" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1235 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1239 msgid "USB" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1235 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1239 msgid "USB Network Device" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1237 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1241 msgid "VMWare" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1237 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1241 msgid "VMWare Network Device" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1240 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1244 msgid "Wireless" msgstr "بی سیم" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1241 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1245 msgid "Wireless Network Card" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1244 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1248 msgid "XPNET" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1244 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1248 msgid "XP Network" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1246 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1250 msgid "VLAN" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1246 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1250 msgid "Virtual LAN" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1248 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1252 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:89 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:101 msgid "Bridge" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1248 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1252 msgid "Network Bridge" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1250 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1254 msgid "TUN" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1250 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1254 msgid "Network TUNnel" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1252 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1256 msgid "TAP" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1252 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1256 msgid "Network TAP" msgstr "" #. Device type label -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1254 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1258 #: library/system/src/include/hwinfo/classnames.rb:152 msgid "InfiniBand" msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1254 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkInterfaces.rb:1258 msgid "InfiniBand Device" msgstr "" @@ -2583,7 +2562,7 @@ msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: pop-up question when reading the service configuration -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:294 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:281 msgid "" "Your network interfaces are currently controlled by NetworkManager\n" "but the service to configure might not work well with it.\n" @@ -2594,14 +2573,14 @@ #. If there is network running, return true. #. Otherwise show error popup depending on Stage and return false #. @return true if network running -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:362 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:349 msgid "" "No running network detected.\n" "Restart installation and configure network in Linuxrc\n" "or continue without network." msgstr "" -#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:368 +#: library/network/src/modules/NetworkService.rb:355 msgid "" "No running network detected.\n" "Configure network with YaST or Network Manager plug-in\n" @@ -2774,70 +2753,55 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is enabled (disable)" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:582 -msgid "" -"Firewall is enabled (<a href=\"firewall--disable_firewall_in_proposal" -"\">disable</a>)" +msgid "Firewall is enabled (<a href=\"firewall--disable_firewall_in_proposal\">disable</a>)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is disabled (enable)" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:587 -msgid "" -"Firewall is disabled (<a href=\"firewall--enable_firewall_in_proposal" -"\">enable</a>)" +msgid "Firewall is disabled (<a href=\"firewall--enable_firewall_in_proposal\">enable</a>)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:621 -msgid "" -"SSH port is open (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">close</a>)" +msgid "SSH port is open (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">close</a>)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:626 -msgid "" -"SSH port is blocked (<a href=\"firewall--enable_ssh_in_proposal\">open</a>)" +msgid "SSH port is blocked (<a href=\"firewall--enable_ssh_in_proposal\">open</a>)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:646 msgid "" -"SSH port is open (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">close</a>), " -"but\n" +"SSH port is open (<a href=\"firewall--disable_ssh_in_proposal\">close</a>), but\n" "there are no network interfaces configured" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over SSH without SSH allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:661 -msgid "" -"You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port " -"on the firewall." +msgid "You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port on the firewall." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is enabled" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:703 -msgid "" -"Remote Administration (VNC) ports are open (<a href=\"firewall--" -"disable_vnc_in_proposal\">close</a>)" +msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are open (<a href=\"firewall--disable_vnc_in_proposal\">close</a>)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is disabled" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:708 -msgid "" -"Remote Administration (VNC) ports are blocked (<a href=\"firewall--" -"enable_vnc_in_proposal\">open</a>)" +msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are blocked (<a href=\"firewall--enable_vnc_in_proposal\">open</a>)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over VNC without VNC allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:718 -msgid "" -"You are installing a system using remote administration (VNC), but you have " -"not opened the VNC ports on the firewall." +msgid "You are installing a system using remote administration (VNC), but you have not opened the VNC ports on the firewall." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text @@ -2852,9 +2816,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation to iSCSI without iSCSI allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:746 -msgid "" -"You are installing a system using iSCSI Target, but you have not opened the " -"needed ports on the firewall." +msgid "You are installing a system using iSCSI Target, but you have not opened the needed ports on the firewall." msgstr "" #. Returns service definition. @@ -3026,18 +2988,15 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:667 msgid "" "Ignoring a package failure may result in a broken system.\n" -"The system should be later verified by running the Software Management " -"module." +"The system should be later verified by running the Software Management module." msgstr "" #. error report #: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:790 msgid "" "<p>The repository at the specified URL now provides a different media ID.\n" -"If the URL is correct, this indicates that the repository content has " -"changed. To \n" -"continue using this repository, start <b>Installation Repositories</b> " -"from \n" +"If the URL is correct, this indicates that the repository content has changed. To \n" +"continue using this repository, start <b>Installation Repositories</b> from \n" "the YaST control center and refresh the repository.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3496,8 +3455,7 @@ "<p><b><big>License Confirmation</big></b><br>\n" "The package in the headline of the dialog requires an explicit confirmation\n" "of acceptance of its license.\n" -"If you reject the license of the package, the package will not be " -"installed.\n" +"If you reject the license of the package, the package will not be installed.\n" "<br>\n" "To accept the license of the package, click <b>I Agree</b>.\n" "To reject the license of the package, click <b>I Disagree</b></p>." @@ -3507,10 +3465,8 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:331 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"\t\t This dialog allows you to define this system's tasks and what software " -"to install.\n" -"\t\t Available tasks and software for this system are shown by category in " -"the left\n" +"\t\t This dialog allows you to define this system's tasks and what software to install.\n" +"\t\t Available tasks and software for this system are shown by category in the left\n" "\t\t column. To view a description for an item, select it in the list.\n" "\t\t </p>" msgstr "" @@ -3535,8 +3491,7 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:351 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"\t\t The disk usage display in the lower right corner shows the remaining " -"disk space\n" +"\t\t The disk usage display in the lower right corner shows the remaining disk space\n" "\t\t after all requested changes will have been performed.\n" "\t\t Hard disk partitions that are full or nearly full can degrade\n" "\t\t system performance and in some cases even cause serious problems.\n" @@ -3591,7 +3546,7 @@ #. Table headings for CD statistics during installation #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:552 -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:554 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:545 msgid "Packages" msgstr "" @@ -3642,9 +3597,7 @@ msgstr "" #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:669 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Installation Report</B></BIG><BR>Here is a summary of installed " -"or removed packages.</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Installation Report</B></BIG><BR>Here is a summary of installed or removed packages.</P>" msgstr "" #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:677 @@ -3732,8 +3685,7 @@ msgid "" "No checksum for file %1 was found in the repository.\n" "This means that the file is part of the signed repository,\n" -"but the list of checksums in this repository does not mention this file. " -"Using the file\n" +"but the list of checksums in this repository does not mention this file. Using the file\n" "may put the integrity of your system at risk.\n" "\n" "Use it anyway?" @@ -3917,8 +3869,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>A warning dialog opens for every package that\n" "is not signed by a trusted (imported) key. If you do not trust the key,\n" -"the packages or repositories created by the owner of the key will not be " -"used.</p>" +"the packages or repositories created by the owner of the key will not be used.</p>" msgstr "" #. popup message - label, part 1, %1 stands for repository name, %2 for its URL @@ -3981,8 +3932,7 @@ "but the expected checksum is not known.\n" "\n" "This means that the origin and integrity of the file\n" -"cannot be verified. Using the file puts the integrity of your system at " -"risk.\n" +"cannot be verified. Using the file puts the integrity of your system at risk.\n" "\n" "Use it anyway?\n" msgstr "" @@ -3997,94 +3947,90 @@ #. Return the description for the current stage. #. @return [String] localized string description #. translators: default global progress bar label -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:153 -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:154 -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:328 -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:349 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:151 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:152 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:326 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:347 msgid "Installing..." msgstr "" #. Table headings for CD statistics during installation -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:550 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:541 #, fuzzy msgid "Media" msgstr "مقدونی" #. Table headings for CD statistics during installation - keep as short as possible! -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:552 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:543 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Warning" msgid "Remaining" msgstr "هشدار" #. Table headings for CD statistics during installation -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:556 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:547 msgid "Time" msgstr "" #. Construct widgets for the "details" page #. #. @return A term describing the widgets -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:572 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:563 msgid "Actions performed:" msgstr "" #. Help text while software packages are being installed (displayed only in rare cases) -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:656 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:647 #, fuzzy #| msgid "<p>No release notes have been installed.</p>" msgid "<p>Packages are being installed.</p>" msgstr "<p> هیچ یاداشت راهنمایی نصب نشده است</p>" -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:657 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Aborting Installation</B> Package installation can be aborted using " -"the <B>Abort</B> button. However, the system then can be in an inconsistent " -"or unusable state or it may not boot if the basic system component is not " -"installed.</P>" +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:648 +msgid "<P><B>Aborting Installation</B> Package installation can be aborted using the <B>Abort</B> button. However, the system then can be in an inconsistent or unusable state or it may not boot if the basic system component is not installed.</P>" msgstr "" #. Translators: Tab name, keep short, %s is product name, e.g. SLES -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:675 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:666 msgid "%s Release Notes" msgstr "" #. tab -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:687 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:678 msgid "Slide Sho&w" msgstr "" #. tab -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:689 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:680 msgid "&Details" msgstr "" #. Dialog heading - software packages are being upgraded -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:728 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:719 msgid "Performing Upgrade" msgstr "" #. Dialog heading - software packages are being installed -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:731 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:722 #, fuzzy #| msgid "&Abort Installation" msgid "Performing Installation" msgstr "&صرف نظر از نصب" #. Dialog heading while software packages are being installed -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:768 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:759 msgid "Package Installation" msgstr "" #. popup yes-no -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:844 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:835 msgid "" "Do you really want\n" "to quit the installation?" msgstr "" #. Mode::update (), Stage::cont () -#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:856 +#: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:847 msgid "Aborted" msgstr "" @@ -4094,7 +4040,7 @@ msgstr "" #. Fill the LogView with file content -#: library/system/src/clients/view_anymsg.rb:193 +#: library/system/src/clients/view_anymsg.rb:199 #, fuzzy #| msgid "System Probing" msgid "System Log (%1)" @@ -5578,8 +5524,7 @@ "\n" "A valid reverse IPv4 consists of four integers in the range 0-255\n" "separated by a dot then followed by the string '.in-addr.arpa.'.\n" -"For example, '1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.' for the IPv4 address " -"'192.168.32.1'.\n" +"For example, '1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.' for the IPv4 address '192.168.32.1'.\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, user can't use hostname %1 because it doesn't make Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/bootloader.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/bootloader.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/bootloader.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-30 10:10+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -124,25 +124,22 @@ msgstr "" #. warning text in the summary richtext -#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:108 -msgid "" -"No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be " -"bootable." +#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:116 +msgid "No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be bootable." msgstr "" #. error in the proposal -#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:118 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" +#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:126 +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" msgstr "" #. proposal part - bootloader label -#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:217 +#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:225 msgid "Booting" msgstr "" #. menubutton entry -#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:219 +#: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:227 msgid "&Booting" msgstr "" @@ -195,10 +192,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:24 msgid "" "<p><b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b><br>\n" -"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR " -"code will then\n" -"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active " -"even\n" +"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR code will then\n" +"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active even\n" "if the boot loader is installed in the MBR.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -220,8 +215,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:23 msgid "" "<p><b>Timeout in Seconds</b><br>\n" -"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is " -"loaded.</p>\n" +"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is loaded.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:33 @@ -236,104 +230,94 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:41 msgid "" -"<p><b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b> replace the master boot record of " -"your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" +"<p><b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b> replace the master boot record of your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" "boots the active partition).</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:44 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Boot Partition</b> is one of the recommended options, the " -"other is\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Boot Partition</b> is one of the recommended options, the other is\n" "<b>Boot from Root Partition</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:47 msgid "" -"<p><b>Use Trusted Grub</b> means install trusted grub and use it. Option " -"<i>Graphical Menu File</i> will be ignored.\n" +"<p><b>Use Trusted Grub</b> means install trusted grub and use it. Option <i>Graphical Menu File</i> will be ignored.\n" "It is recommended to install grub to MBR</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:50 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Master Boot Record</b> is not recommended if you have " -"another operating system\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Master Boot Record</b> is not recommended if you have another operating system\n" "installed on your computer</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:53 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Root Partition</b> is the recommended option whenever there " -"is a suitable\n" -"partition. Either select <b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot " -"Partition</b> and <b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b>\n" -"in <b>Boot Loader Options</b> to update the master boot record if that is " -"needed or configure your other boot manager\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Root Partition</b> is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" +"partition. Either select <b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b> and <b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b>\n" +"in <b>Boot Loader Options</b> to update the master boot record if that is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start this section.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:60 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"<p><b>Custom Boot Partition</b> lets you choose a partition to boot from.</p>" +"<p><b>Boot from Extended Partition</b> should be selected if your root partition is on \n" +"logical partition and the /boot partition is missing</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:63 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:62 +msgid "<p><b>Custom Boot Partition</b> lets you choose a partition to boot from.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:65 msgid "" "<p>MD array is build from 2 disks. <b>Enable Redundancy for MD Array</b>\n" "enable to write GRUB to MBR of both disks.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:66 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:68 msgid "" "<p><b>Use Serial Console</b> lets you define the parameters to use\n" -"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub</" -"code>) for details.</p>" +"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub</code>) for details.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:69 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:71 msgid "" "<p><b>Terminal Definition</b></p><br>\n" -"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a " -"serial console),\n" -"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</" -"code> to the\n" -"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which " -"you\n" +"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a serial console),\n" +"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</code> to the\n" +"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which you\n" "press any key will be selected as a GRUB terminal.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:76 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:78 msgid "" -"<p><b>Fallback Sections if default Fails</b> contains a list of section " -"numbers\n" +"<p><b>Fallback Sections if default Fails</b> contains a list of section numbers\n" "that will be used for booting in case the default section is unbootable.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:79 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:81 msgid "<p>Selecting <b>Hide Menu on Boot</b> will hide the boot menu.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:82 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Graphical Menu File</b> defines the file to use for the graphical boot " -"menu.</p>" +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:84 +msgid "<p><b>Graphical Menu File</b> defines the file to use for the graphical boot menu.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:85 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:87 msgid "<p><b>Enable Acoustic Signals</b> turn on/off acoustic signals.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:88 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:90 msgid "" "<p><b>Protect Boot Loader with Password</b><br>\n" -"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will " -"only accept the password if you repeat\n" +"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will only accept the password if you repeat\n" "it in <b>Retype Password</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 1/5 -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:95 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:97 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Disks Order</b></big><br>\n" "To specify the order of the disks according to the order in BIOS, use\n" @@ -342,73 +326,73 @@ "To remove a disk, push <b>Remove</b>.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:106 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:108 #, fuzzy msgid "Boot Loader Locations" msgstr "دستگاه:" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:107 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:109 msgid "Set &active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:110 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:112 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:29 msgid "&Timeout in Seconds" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:111 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:113 msgid "&Default Boot Section" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:112 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:114 msgid "Write &generic Boot Code to MBR" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:113 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:115 msgid "Use &Trusted Grub" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:114 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:116 msgid "Custom Boot Partition" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:115 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:117 msgid "Boot from Master Boot Record" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:116 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:118 msgid "Boot from Root Partition" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:117 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:119 msgid "Boot from Boot Partition" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:118 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:120 msgid "Boot from Extended Partition" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:119 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:121 msgid "Serial Connection &Parameters" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:120 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:122 msgid "Fallback Sections if Default fails" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:121 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:123 msgid "&Hide Menu on Boot" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:122 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:124 msgid "Graphical &Menu File" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:123 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:125 msgid "Pa&ssword for the Menu Interface" msgstr "" -#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:124 +#: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:126 msgid "Debugg&ing Flag" msgstr "" @@ -597,41 +581,28 @@ #. $Id: helps.ycp 58279 2009-08-04 16:01:51Z juhliarik $ #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:23 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:33 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define additional " -"parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define additional parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:26 #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:30 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Vga Mode</b> defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the " -"<i>console</i> to when booting.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Vga Mode</b> defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the <i>console</i> to when booting.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:29 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define failsafe " -"parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define failsafe parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:32 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Probe Foreign OS</b> by means of os-prober for multiboot with other " -"foreign distribution </p>" +msgid "<p><b>Probe Foreign OS</b> by means of os-prober for multiboot with other foreign distribution </p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:35 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Protective MBR flag</b> is expert only settings, that is needed only " -"on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not " -"touch if you are not sure.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Protective MBR flag</b> is expert only settings, that is needed only on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if you are not sure.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:38 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Distributor</b> specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create " -"boot entry name. </p>" +msgid "<p><b>Distributor</b> specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create boot entry name. </p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:44 @@ -1073,10 +1044,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:58 msgid "" "<P>From <B>Other</B>,\n" -"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the " -"current \n" -"configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or " -"reread\n" +"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current \n" +"configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or reread\n" "the configuration saved on your disk. %1</P>" msgstr "" @@ -1143,8 +1112,7 @@ "- In the <b>Boot Sector</b> of the <tt>/boot</tt> or <tt>/</tt> (root) \n" "partition. This is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" "partition. Either set <b>Activate Boot Loader Partition</b> and\n" -"<b>Replace MBR with Generic Code</b> in <b>Boot Loader Installation Details</" -"b>\n" +"<b>Replace MBR with Generic Code</b> in <b>Boot Loader Installation Details</b>\n" "to update the master boot record\n" "if it is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start &product;.</p>" @@ -1222,8 +1190,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:244 msgid "" "<p><b>Section Name</b><br>\n" -"Use <b>Section Name</b> to specify the boot loader section name. The " -"section\n" +"Use <b>Section Name</b> to specify the boot loader section name. The section\n" "name must be unique.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1267,8 +1234,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:278 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Menu Section</b> to add a section that \n" -"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the " -"disk. This is used for\n" +"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" "booting other operating systems.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1474,60 +1440,44 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:24 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Kernel Image</b> defines the kernel to boot. Either enter the name " -"directly or choose via <b>Browse</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Kernel Image</b> defines the kernel to boot. Either enter the name directly or choose via <b>Browse</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:27 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Root Device</b> sets the device to pass to the kernel as root device.</" -"p>" +msgid "<p><b>Root Device</b> sets the device to pass to the kernel as root device.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:36 msgid "" -"<p><b>Initial RAM Disk</b>, if not empty, defines the initial ramdisk to " -"use. Either enter the path and file name\n" +"<p><b>Initial RAM Disk</b>, if not empty, defines the initial ramdisk to use. Either enter the path and file name\n" "directly or choose by using <b>Browse</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:39 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Chainloader Section</b> if you want to define a section for " -"booting an OS other than Linux.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Chainloader Section</b> if you want to define a section for booting an OS other than Linux.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:42 -msgid "" -"<p>Setting <b>Use Password Protection</p> will require a password to select " -"this section.</p>" +msgid "<p>Setting <b>Use Password Protection</p> will require a password to select this section.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:45 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Other System</b> lets you choose among the non-Linux operating systems " -"found on your computer.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Other System</b> lets you choose among the non-Linux operating systems found on your computer.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:48 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Activate this Partition when selected for Boot</b> if your BIOS " -"needs this flag set in order to boot it</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Activate this Partition when selected for Boot</b> if your BIOS needs this flag set in order to boot it</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:51 msgid "" -"<p><b>Block Offset for Chainloading</b> lets you specify the list of blocks " -"to boot. In most cases you want\n" -"to specify <code>+1</code> here. For specifics on blocklist notation see the " -"grub documentation.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Block Offset for Chainloading</b> lets you specify the list of blocks to boot. In most cases you want\n" +"to specify <code>+1</code> here. For specifics on blocklist notation see the grub documentation.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:54 msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Xen Section</b> if you want to add a new Linux kernel or other " -"image \n" +"<p>Select <b>Xen Section</b> if you want to add a new Linux kernel or other image \n" "and start it in a Xen environment.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1536,9 +1486,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:60 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Additional Xen Hypervisor Parameters</b> lets you define additional " -"parameters to pass to the xen hypervisor.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Additional Xen Hypervisor Parameters</b> lets you define additional parameters to pass to the xen hypervisor.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:63 @@ -1550,21 +1498,16 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:65 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Menu Description File</b> specifies path on root device from which is " -"loaded menu file.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Menu Description File</b> specifies path on root device from which is loaded menu file.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:68 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Map Section to the First Disk from Device Map</b> Windows usually need " -"to be on the first disk.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Map Section to the First Disk from Device Map</b> Windows usually need to be on the first disk.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:71 msgid "" -"<p><b>Measures</b> includes measured files with PCR. Change table is " -"possible via buttons: <b>Add</b> , \n" +"<p><b>Measures</b> includes measured files with PCR. Change table is possible via buttons: <b>Add</b> , \n" "<b>Edit</b> and <b>Delete</b></p>" msgstr "" @@ -1595,8 +1538,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/section_helps.rb:88 msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Enable SELinux</b> to add the needed kernel boot parameters to " -"enable the SELinux security framework. \n" +"<p>Select <b>Enable SELinux</b> to add the needed kernel boot parameters to enable the SELinux security framework. \n" "Please note that this will also disable AppArmor.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1775,52 +1717,41 @@ #. error report #: src/include/bootloader/routines/wizards.rb:36 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." msgstr "" #. FATE#303643 Enable one-click changes in bootloader proposal #. #. #. FIXME identical code in BootGRUB module -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:657 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:188 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not install</a>)" +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:657 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:189 +msgid "Install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"disable_boot_mbr\">do not install</a>)" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:661 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:192 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">install</a>)" +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:661 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:193 +msgid "Do not install bootcode into MBR (<a href=\"enable_boot_mbr\">install</a>)" msgstr "" #. check for separated boot partition, use root otherwise #. check for separated boot partition, use root otherwise -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:673 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:205 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">do not " -"install</a>)" +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:673 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:206 +msgid "Install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_boot\">do not install</a>)" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:677 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:209 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot" -"\">install</a>)" +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:677 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:210 +msgid "Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_boot\">install</a>)" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:683 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:215 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">do not " -"install</a>)" +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:683 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:216 +msgid "Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"disable_boot_root\">do not install</a>)" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:687 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:219 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root" -"\">install</a>)" +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:687 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:220 +msgid "Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (<a href=\"enable_boot_root\">install</a>)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: title for list of location proposals -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:695 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:230 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:695 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:238 msgid "Change Location: %s" msgstr "" @@ -1829,8 +1760,8 @@ #. @return a list of summary lines #. Display bootloader summary #. @return a list of summary lines -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:708 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:240 -#: src/modules/BootGRUB2EFI.rb:91 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:708 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:248 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2EFI.rb:94 msgid "Boot Loader Type: %1" msgstr "" @@ -1840,7 +1771,7 @@ msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: extended is here for extended partition. Keep translation short. -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:724 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:251 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:724 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:259 msgid " (extended)" msgstr "" @@ -1850,12 +1781,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: MBR is acronym for Master Boot Record, if nothing locally specific #. is used in your language, then keep it as it is. -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:736 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:259 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:736 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:267 msgid " (MBR)" msgstr "" #. FIXME: should we translate all devices to names and add MBR suffixes? -#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:750 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:266 +#: src/modules/BootGRUB.rb:750 src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:274 msgid "Status Location: %1" msgstr "" @@ -1878,48 +1809,54 @@ msgid "Propose and &Merge with Existing GRUB Menus" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/BootGRUB2EFI.rb:99 +#. no location chosen, so warn user that it is problem unless he is sure +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:230 +msgid "Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you are doing please select above location." +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/BootGRUB2EFI.rb:102 #, fuzzy #| msgid "During Boot" msgid "Enable Secure Boot: %1" msgstr "در حال بارگذاری" #. Check that bootloader is known and supported -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:68 +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:70 msgid "Unknown bootloader: %1" msgstr "" #. grub2 is sooo cool... -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:99 +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:101 msgid "Unsupported combination of hardware platform %1 and bootloader %2" msgstr "" #. TODO add more devices -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:126 +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:128 msgid "Partition number > 3 is being used for booting with GPT partition table" msgstr "" +#. TRANSLATORS: description of technical problem. Do not translate technical terms unless native language have well known translation. +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:153 +msgid "Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." +msgstr "" + #. check if boot device is on raid0 -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:159 +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:181 msgid "The boot device is on raid type: %1. System will not boot." msgstr "" #. bnc#501043 added check for valid configuration -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:179 -msgid "" -"The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. " -"Master Boot Record" +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:201 +msgid "The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. Master Boot Record" msgstr "" #. s390 do not have bios boot order (bnc#874106) -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:234 -msgid "" -"YaST could not determine the exact boot order of disks needed for the device " -"map. Review and possibly adjust the boot order of disks in \"Boot Loader " -"Installation Details\"" +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:256 +msgid "YaST could not determine the exact boot order of disks needed for the device map. Review and possibly adjust the boot order of disks in \"Boot Loader Installation Details\"" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:251 +#. if partitioning worked before upgrade, it will keep working (bnc#886604) +#: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:276 msgid "Missing ext partition for booting. Cannot install boot code." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/ca-management.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/ca-management.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/ca-management.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -94,8 +94,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:100 -msgid "" -"P12 password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" +msgid "P12 password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:112 @@ -112,11 +111,9 @@ #: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:172 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and " -"certificate\n" +"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and certificate\n" "is used for communicating with the Apache server.\n" -"Here, change the settings of this CA and certificate or import a CA and " -"certificate from a file.\n" +"Here, change the settings of this CA and certificate or import a CA and certificate from a file.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -362,9 +359,7 @@ #. #. Proposal function dispatcher for CA Management #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:107 -msgid "" -"Cannot evaluate the name of the local machine. Change the values of Server " -"Name and E-Mail." +msgid "Cannot evaluate the name of the local machine. Change the values of Server Name and E-Mail." msgstr "" #. new handling of force reset because of (#238754) @@ -386,15 +381,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:296 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:338 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set a CA password to continue." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set a CA password to continue." msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:325 msgid "" "The password is too short to use for the certificates. \n" -"Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate " -"creation.\n" +"Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:351 @@ -449,10 +442,8 @@ #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:406 msgid "" -"The root password is too short for use as the password for the " -"certificates.\n" -" Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate " -"creation.\n" +"The root password is too short for use as the password for the certificates.\n" +" Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:413 @@ -464,9 +455,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:427 -msgid "" -"<p>Is the default hostname <b>linux</b> really unique? The certificate is " -"only valid if the hostname is correct.</p>" +msgid "<p>Is the default hostname <b>linux</b> really unique? The certificate is only valid if the hostname is correct.</p>" msgstr "" #. menu title @@ -504,8 +493,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:103 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"In this frame, select the desired installation method for <b>CAs</b> and " -"<b>certificates</b>\n" +"In this frame, select the desired installation method for <b>CAs</b> and <b>certificates</b>\n" "while completing the installation.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -513,8 +501,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:112 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"You also have the possibility of creating the default CA and certificate in " -"the installed system \n" +"You also have the possibility of creating the default CA and certificate in the installed system \n" "if you do not want to create or import it now.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -610,8 +597,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:388 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"YaST generates a <b>default CA and certificate</b> automatically. This CA " -"and certificate\n" +"YaST generates a <b>default CA and certificate</b> automatically. This CA and certificate\n" "is used for communicating with the <b>Apache server</b>.\n" "Here, change these <b>default settings</b>.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -637,51 +623,37 @@ #. help text 1/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:77 -msgid "" -"<p>A Server Certificate is used by services which provide SSL/TLS encrypted " -"network connections.</p>" +msgid "<p>A Server Certificate is used by services which provide SSL/TLS encrypted network connections.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:84 -msgid "" -"<p>The purpose of the <b>Common Server Certificate</b> is, to provide a " -"certificate for several services running on this host. " +msgid "<p>The purpose of the <b>Common Server Certificate</b> is, to provide a certificate for several services running on this host. " msgstr "" #. help text 3/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:92 -msgid "" -"Some YaST modules provide the capability to use this certificate during " -"configuration of such a service.</p>" +msgid "Some YaST modules provide the capability to use this certificate during configuration of such a service.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:100 -msgid "" -"<p>With the <b>Import/Replace</b> button you can add a new server " -"certificate or replace the current one.</p>" +msgid "<p>With the <b>Import/Replace</b> button you can add a new server certificate or replace the current one.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 5/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:108 -msgid "" -"<p>You can remove the Certificates by clicking the <b>Remove</b> button. But " -"make sure, that it is not used anymore by other services.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can remove the Certificates by clicking the <b>Remove</b> button. But make sure, that it is not used anymore by other services.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 6/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:116 -msgid "" -"<p>Certificates can be written to a file using <b>Export to File</b> in " -"section <b>Certificate</b> in the <b>CA Management</b> module.</p>" +msgid "<p>Certificates can be written to a file using <b>Export to File</b> in section <b>Certificate</b> in the <b>CA Management</b> module.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 7/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:124 -msgid "" -"<p>Certificates to import from disk must have been written in <b>PKCS12 " -"format with CA chain</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Certificates to import from disk must have been written in <b>PKCS12 format with CA chain</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 8/8 @@ -741,9 +713,7 @@ #. help text 2/2 #: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:70 -msgid "" -"<p>Special information about the current CA is provided by <b>Certificates</" -"b>, <b>CRL</b>, and <b>Advanced</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Special information about the current CA is provided by <b>Certificates</b>, <b>CRL</b>, and <b>Advanced</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. getDescriptionCA - description of a CA @@ -862,9 +832,7 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:51 -msgid "" -"<p>When creating a new subCA or certificate, the system suggests some " -"default values.</p>" +msgid "<p>When creating a new subCA or certificate, the system suggests some default values.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 @@ -876,16 +844,12 @@ #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:62 #: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:153 -msgid "" -"<p>However, the modified settings will be used for <b>new</B> entries only.</" -"p>" +msgid "<p>However, the modified settings will be used for <b>new</B> entries only.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/4 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:69 -msgid "" -"<p>You can edit the default settings for <b>subCAs</b>, <b>client " -"certificates</b>, and <b>server certificates</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can edit the default settings for <b>subCAs</b>, <b>client certificates</b>, and <b>server certificates</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:79 @@ -906,9 +870,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all default settings before they are " -"saved.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all default settings before they are saved.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1022,10 +984,7 @@ #. help text 1/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:46 -msgid "" -"<p>First, see a list view with all available certificates from this CA. The " -"columns are the DN of the certificates including the e-mail address and the " -"state of the certificate (such as valid or revoked).</p>" +msgid "<p>First, see a list view with all available certificates from this CA. The columns are the DN of the certificates including the e-mail address and the state of the certificate (such as valid or revoked).</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/6 @@ -1035,16 +994,12 @@ #. help text 3/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:57 -msgid "" -"<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:64 -msgid "" -"<p>Furthermore, you can <b>Revoke</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p>Furthermore, you can <b>Revoke</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 5/6 @@ -1054,9 +1009,7 @@ #. help text 6/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:78 -msgid "" -"<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. popup window header @@ -1365,8 +1318,7 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:142 -msgid "" -"<p>When creating a new CRL, the system suggests some default values.</p>" +msgid "<p>When creating a new CRL, the system suggests some default values.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 @@ -1403,11 +1355,7 @@ #. Translators: long help text - security information #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:111 -msgid "" -"Warning!<br>Activating the automatic creation and export of a CRL will write " -"the CA password to a configuration file on disk. The password will be stored " -"there in plain text as it is needed to create a CRL. The file will only be " -"readable for the root user." +msgid "Warning!<br>Activating the automatic creation and export of a CRL will write the CA password to a configuration file on disk. The password will be stored there in plain text as it is needed to create a CRL. The file will only be readable for the root user." msgstr "" #. Editing CRL defaults of a selected CA @@ -1423,19 +1371,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:384 -msgid "" -"<p>To set up a repeated recreation of the CRL, select <b>Repeated recreation " -"and export</b>. In this case, set the interval for the recreation in " -"<b>Periodic interval</b>. If you set the interval to 24 hours, you can " -"additionally select the hour for the export. Make sure you read and " -"understand the <b>Security Information</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To set up a repeated recreation of the CRL, select <b>Repeated recreation and export</b>. In this case, set the interval for the recreation in <b>Periodic interval</b>. If you set the interval to 24 hours, you can additionally select the hour for the export. Make sure you read and understand the <b>Security Information</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:387 -msgid "" -"<p>You can activate an export of the CRL to a local file or to an LDAP " -"server or both. Set up the respective parameters in <b>Export to local file</" -"b> and <b>Export to LDAP</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can activate an export of the CRL to a local file or to an LDAP server or both. Set up the respective parameters in <b>Export to local file</b> and <b>Export to LDAP</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:401 @@ -1610,9 +1550,7 @@ #. help text 5/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:117 -msgid "" -"<p><b>CA Name</b> is the name of a CA certificate. Use only the characters, " -"\"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", and \"_\".</p>" +msgid "<p><b>CA Name</b> is the name of a CA certificate. Use only the characters, \"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", and \"_\".</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:123 @@ -1620,28 +1558,21 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:129 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the user for whom to create the " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the user for whom to create the certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Common Name</b> is the fully qualified domain name of the server.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the fully qualified domain name of the server.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 6/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:145 -msgid "" -"<p><b>E-Mail Addresses</b> are valid e-mail addresses of the user or server " -"administrator.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>E-Mail Addresses</b> are valid e-mail addresses of the user or server administrator.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 7/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:152 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Organization</b>, <b>Organizational Unit</b>, <b>Locality</b>, and " -"<b>State</b> are often optional.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Organization</b>, <b>Organizational Unit</b>, <b>Locality</b>, and <b>State</b> are often optional.</p>" msgstr "" #. To translators: pushbutton label @@ -1673,24 +1604,17 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:469 -msgid "" -"<p>The private key of the CA needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length " -"of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</" -"p>" +msgid "<p>The private key of the CA needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:476 -msgid "" -"<p>Each CA has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use " -"certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgid "<p>Each CA has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:484 -msgid "" -"<p>The CA is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the " -"time frame in days.</p>" +msgid "<p>The CA is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the time frame in days.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/4 @@ -1699,47 +1623,32 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:492 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:521 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:543 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Advanced Options</b> are very special options. If you change these " -"options, SUSE cannot guarantee that the generated certificate will work " -"correctly.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Advanced Options</b> are very special options. If you change these options, SUSE cannot guarantee that the generated certificate will work correctly.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:498 -msgid "" -"<p>The private key of the certificate needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum " -"length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next " -"field.</p>" +msgid "<p>The private key of the certificate needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:505 -msgid "" -"<p>Each certificate has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that " -"use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgid "<p>Each certificate has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:513 -msgid "" -"<p>The certificate is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). " -"Enter the time frame in days.</p>" +msgid "<p>The certificate is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the time frame in days.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:528 -msgid "" -"<p>The private key of the request needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum " -"length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next " -"field.</p>" +msgid "<p>The private key of the request needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:535 -msgid "" -"<p>Each request has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use " -"certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgid "<p>Each request has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:561 @@ -1775,9 +1684,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:700 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the CA that will be " -"created.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the CA that will be created.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1787,9 +1694,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:710 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the certificate that " -"will be created.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the certificate that will be created.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1799,9 +1704,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:721 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be " -"created.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be created.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1914,11 +1817,7 @@ #. #. Creating a new CA/Certificate #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:55 -msgid "" -"<P>This frame shows further attributes and OpenSSL X509v3 extensions that " -"can be set. If you are not familiar with these extensions, refer to the " -"file /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (package openssl-doc).</" -"P>" +msgid "<P>This frame shows further attributes and OpenSSL X509v3 extensions that can be set. If you are not familiar with these extensions, refer to the file /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (package openssl-doc).</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:61 @@ -1984,9 +1883,7 @@ #. help text 1/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:47 -msgid "" -"<p>First, see a list view with all available requests of this CA. The " -"columns are the DN of the request including the e-mail address.</p>" +msgid "<p>First, see a list view with all available requests of this CA. The columns are the DN of the request including the e-mail address.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/6 @@ -1996,29 +1893,22 @@ #. help text 3/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:58 -msgid "" -"<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete " -"request.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete request.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:65 -msgid "" -"<p>You can also <b>Sign</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a request.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can also <b>Sign</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a request.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 5/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:72 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Import</b>, read a new request. With <b>Add</b>, generate a new " -"request.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Import</b>, read a new request. With <b>Add</b>, generate a new request.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 6/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:79 -msgid "" -"<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected request." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected request.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:326 @@ -2108,14 +1998,12 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:708 -msgid "" -"<p>The request has special request extensions, which you can accept.</p>" +msgid "<p>The request has special request extensions, which you can accept.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:715 -msgid "" -"<p>If you reject these extensions, the default values are taken instead.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you reject these extensions, the default values are taken instead.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:731 @@ -2128,9 +2016,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:777 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be " -"signed.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be signed.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -2184,14 +2070,12 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:149 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Create Root CA</b> generates a new root certificate authority.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Create Root CA</b> generates a new root certificate authority.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:156 -msgid "" -"<p>For more information about CA Management, please read the manual.</p>" +msgid "<p>For more information about CA Management, please read the manual.</p>" msgstr "" #. To translators: pushbutton label @@ -2401,15 +2285,12 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1216 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Importing Common Server Certificate (PKCS12 + CA Chain Format)\n" -" from Disk:</big></b> Select one file name and press <b>Next</b> to continue." -"</p>\n" +" from Disk:</big></b> Select one file name and press <b>Next</b> to continue.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1222 -msgid "" -"Import a server certificate and corresponding CA and copy them to a place " -"where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." +msgid "Import a server certificate and corresponding CA and copy them to a place where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." msgstr "" #. help text 3/3 @@ -2447,8 +2328,7 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1369 msgid "" "The hostname of this server (command: hostname --long) have to match \n" -"either the common name of the certificate (CN) or on of the values in " -"subject alternative names." +"either the common name of the certificate (CN) or on of the values in subject alternative names." msgstr "" #. popup window header @@ -2517,8 +2397,7 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1658 msgid "" "Key Password is required. \n" -"It must be the password for the encrypted key or a new one in case of a not " -"encrypted key." +"It must be the password for the encrypted key or a new one in case of a not encrypted key." msgstr "" #. Error popup Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/cio.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/cio.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/cio.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -44,11 +44,11 @@ #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:142 msgid "no" -msgstr "" +msgstr "خیر" #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:142 msgid "yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "بلی" #. filter can be empty if dialog is not yet created #: src/lib/iochannel/channels_dialog.rb:160 Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/cluster.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/cluster.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/cluster.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -174,15 +174,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:737 -msgid "" -"For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/" -"authkey." +msgid "For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/authkey." msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:742 -msgid "" -"To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other " -"nodes manually." +msgid "To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other nodes manually." msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:847 src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:917 @@ -318,8 +314,7 @@ #. SaveCsync2(); #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1380 msgid "" -"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between " -"cluster nodes.\n" +"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between cluster nodes.\n" "YaST can help to configure some basic aspects of conntrackd.\n" "You need to start it with the ocf:heartbeat:conntrackd." msgstr "" @@ -343,116 +338,47 @@ #. All helps are here #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:35 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Bind Network Address</big></b><br>This specifies the address " -"which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in " -"zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set " -"bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0.<br>This may also be an IPV6 address, in which " -"case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be " -"specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface " -"within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the " -"nodeid field must be specified.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>This is the multicast address used " -"by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but " -"the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address " -"to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address." -"<br>This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 " -"networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must " -"be specified.</p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Port</big></b><br>This specifies the UDP port number. It is " -"possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais " -"services configured for different UDP ports.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Member Address</big></b><br>This list specifies all the nodes in " -"the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using udpu <br></" -"p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Node ID</big></b><br>This configuration option is optional " -"when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value " -"specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. " -"If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from " -"the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring " -"identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should " -"not be used.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>rrp_mode</big></b><br>This specifies the mode of redundant ring, " -"which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers " -"slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network " -"environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly " -"double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become " -"cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network " -"interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one " -"interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple " -"interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen." -"<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Expected votes</big></b><br>Expect vote number for voting " -"quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is " -"present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section.<br></" -"p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Auto Generate Node ID</big></b><br>Nodeid is required when using " -"IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Bind Network Address</big></b><br>This specifies the address which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0.<br>This may also be an IPV6 address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>This is the multicast address used by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address.<br>This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.</p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Port</big></b><br>This specifies the UDP port number. It is possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais services configured for different UDP ports.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Member Address</big></b><br>This list specifies all the nodes in the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using udpu <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Node ID</big></b><br>This configuration option is optional when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should not be used.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>rrp_mode</big></b><br>This specifies the mode of redundant ring, which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Expected votes</big></b><br>Expect vote number for voting quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Auto Generate Node ID</big></b><br>Nodeid is required when using IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:45 msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b><big>Threads</big></b><br>This directive controls how many threads are " -"used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the " -"protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this " -"directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to " -"encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates " -"that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for " -"non-SMP systems. The default is 0. <br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Enable Security Auth</big></b><br>This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 " -"authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further " -"specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 " -"encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this " -"option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces " -"total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles " -"in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100mbit networks " -"with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9mb/sec is possible " -"with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3ghz cpus. A " -"throughput of 10mb/sec is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option " -"is disabled on 3ghz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame " -"transmissions: A throughput of 20mb/sec is possible when this option is " -"enabled on 3ghz cpus. A throughput of 60mb/sec is possible when this " -"option is disabled on 3ghz cpus. The default is on. <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Threads</big></b><br>This directive controls how many threads are used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for non-SMP systems. The default is 0. <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Enable Security Auth</big></b><br>This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100mbit networks with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9mb/sec is possible with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3ghz cpus. A throughput of 10mb/sec is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on 3ghz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput of 20mb/sec is possible when this option is enabled on 3ghz cpus. A throughput of 60mb/sec is possible when this option is disabled on 3ghz cpus. The default i s on. <br></p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:50 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Booting</big></b><br>Starting corosync service during boot " -"or not</p>\n" -"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Firewall Settings</big></b><br>Enable the port when " -"Firewall is enabled</p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Booting</big></b><br>Starting corosync service during boot or not</p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Firewall Settings</big></b><br>Enable the port when Firewall is enabled</p>\n" "\t\t\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync Host</big></b><br>The hostnames used here must be the " -"local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the " -"same string as printed out by the hostname command.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync File</big></b><br>The full absolute filename to be " -"synced.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big></b><br>Authentication is performed " -"using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is " -"generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup " -"should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.</" -"p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync Host</big></b><br>The hostnames used here must be the local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the same string as printed out by the hostname command.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync File</big></b><br>The full absolute filename to be synced.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big></b><br>Authentication is performed using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Dedicated Interface</big></b><br>A dedicated network " -"interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for " -"using. You may have to have it pre-configured. </p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>IP</big></b><br>The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated " -"network interface. This is detected automatically.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>The multicast address to be " -"used for syncing.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Group Number</big></b><br>A numeric ID indicate the group for " -"syncing.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Dedicated Interface</big></b><br>A dedicated network interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for using. You may have to have it pre-configured. </p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>IP</big></b><br>The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated network interface. This is detected automatically.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>The multicast address to be used for syncing.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Group Number</big></b><br>A numeric ID indicate the group for syncing.</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/control-center.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/control-center.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/control-center.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 08:16+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-03-02 15:16+0330\n" "Last-Translator: مصطفی برمشوری <mostafa.barmshor@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Farsi (Persian) <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/control.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/control.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/control.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/country.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/country.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/country.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/crowbar.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/crowbar.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/crowbar.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:37+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/dhcp-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/dhcp-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/dhcp-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:38+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-18 12:43+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: table header item #. Table header item - IP of the host #: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:455 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1651 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1650 msgid "IP" msgstr "" @@ -537,75 +537,74 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: popup error, DHCP Server needs to run on one or more interfaces, #. currently no one is selected -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:609 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:608 msgid "At least one network interface must be selected." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: popup error, DHCP Server requires selected interface to have #. at least minimal configuration -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:617 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:616 msgid "" -"The selected network interface is not configured (no assigned IP address \n" -"and netmask). Using it in the DHCP server configuration may not work.\n" -"Really use this interface?\n" +"One or more selected network interfaces is not configured (no assigned IP address \n" +"and netmask)." msgstr "" #. configuration will be saved in ldap? #. check box -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:633 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:632 #: src/include/dhcp-server/widgets.rb:1079 msgid "&LDAP Support" msgstr "" #. FATE #227, comments #5 and #17 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:640 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:639 msgid "DHCP Server &Name (optional)" msgstr "" #. Textentry with name of the domain -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:653 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:652 msgid "&Domain Name" msgstr "" #. Textentry with IP address of primary name server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:655 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:654 msgid "&Primary Name Server IP" msgstr "" #. Textentry with IP address of secondary name server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:658 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:657 msgid "&Secondary Name Server IP" msgstr "" #. Textentry with IP address of default router -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:661 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:660 msgid "Default &Gateway (Router) " msgstr "" #. Textentry with IP address of time server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:666 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:665 msgid "NTP &Time Server" msgstr "" #. Textentry with IP address of print server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:668 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:667 msgid "&Print Server" msgstr "" #. Textentry with IP address of WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:670 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:669 msgid "&WINS Server" msgstr "" #. Textentry with default lease time of IP address from dhcp server -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:675 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:674 msgid "Default &Lease Time" msgstr "" #. Units for defaultleasetime #. Combobox - type of units for lease time -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:684 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1140 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:683 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1139 msgid "&Units" msgstr "" @@ -613,48 +612,48 @@ #. error popup #. error popup #. error popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1018 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1030 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1042 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1054 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1017 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1029 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1041 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1053 msgid "The specified value is not a valid hostname or IP address." msgstr "" #. frame -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1068 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1067 msgid "Subnet Information" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: informative text entry (filled up, disabled) -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1074 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1073 msgid "Current &Network" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: informative text entry (filled up, disabled) -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1079 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1078 msgid "Current Net&mask" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: informative text entry (filled up, disabled) -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1084 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1083 msgid "Netmask Bi&ts" msgstr "" #. text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1091 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1090 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:81 msgid "Min&imum IP Address" msgstr "" #. text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1096 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1095 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:83 msgid "Ma&ximum IP Address" msgstr "" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1104 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1103 msgid "IP Address Range" msgstr "" @@ -662,7 +661,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1110 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1109 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:93 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:356 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:917 @@ -673,7 +672,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry #. TRANSLATORS: text entry -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1115 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1114 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-dialogs.rb:95 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:358 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:919 @@ -681,53 +680,53 @@ msgstr "" #. checkbox -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1119 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1118 #: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1094 msgid "Allow Dynamic &BOOTP" msgstr "" #. frame label -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1125 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1124 msgid "Lease Time" msgstr "" #. Textentry label - lease time for IPs in the range -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1131 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1130 msgid "&Default" msgstr "" #. TextEntryLabel - max. time for leasing of IPs from the range -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1149 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1148 msgid "&Maximum" msgstr "" #. Combobox - type of units for max lease time -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1159 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1158 msgid "Uni&ts" msgstr "" #. zone is not maintained by the DNS server #. zone is maintained and it is a 'master' -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1361 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1370 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1360 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1369 msgid "Create New DNS Zone from Scratch" msgstr "" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1372 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1371 msgid "Edit Current DNS Zone" msgstr "" #. zone is maintained but it is not a 'master' -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1378 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1377 msgid "Get Current Zone Information" msgstr "" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1386 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1385 msgid "&Synchronize DNS Server..." msgstr "" #. Show DNS Zone Information -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1415 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1414 msgid "" "DNS zone %1 is not a master zone.\n" "Therefore, you cannot change it here.\n" @@ -735,8 +734,8 @@ #. A popup error text #. A popup error text -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1548 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1556 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1547 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1555 msgid "Enter values for both ends of the IP address range." msgstr "" @@ -744,135 +743,135 @@ #. %1 is the tested IP which should match network %2 and netmask %3 #. TRANSLATORS: popup error message #. %1 is the tested IP which should match network %2 and netmask %3 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1595 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1618 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1594 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1617 msgid "" "The dynamic DHCP address range must be in the same network as the DHCP server.\n" "IP %1 does not match the network %2/%3." msgstr "" #. Label of the registered hosts table -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1643 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1642 msgid "Registered Host" msgstr "" #. Table header item - Name of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1649 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1648 msgid "Name" msgstr "نام" #. MAC address of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1653 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1652 msgid "Hardware Address" msgstr "" #. Network type of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1655 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1654 msgid "Type" msgstr "نوع" #. Frame label - configuration of particular host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1662 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1661 msgid "List Setup" msgstr "" #. Textentry label - name of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1670 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1669 msgid "&Name" msgstr "" #. Textentry label - IP address of the host #. TRANSLATORS: text entry -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1675 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1674 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-management.rb:229 msgid "&IP Address" msgstr "آ&درس IP" #. Textentry label - hardware (mac) address of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1683 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1682 msgid "&Hardware Address" msgstr "" #. Radiobutton label - network type of the host -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1690 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1689 msgid "&Ethernet" msgstr "" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1692 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1691 msgid "&Token Ring" msgstr "" #. Pushbutton label - change host in list -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1707 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1706 msgid "C&hange in List" msgstr "" #. Pushbutton label - delete host from list -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1710 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1709 msgid "Dele&te from List" msgstr "" #. now, fill the dialog #. combo box entry, networking technology name -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1811 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1810 #: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1039 msgid "Ethernet" msgstr "" #. combo box entry, networking technology name -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1812 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1811 #: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:1041 msgid "Token Ring" msgstr "" #. error popup #. error popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1886 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1885 #: src/include/dhcp-server/options.rb:935 msgid "The hardware address is invalid.\n" msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1932 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1931 msgid "The hardware address must be unique." msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1942 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1941 msgid "The hostname cannot be empty." msgstr "" #. error popup, %1 is host name -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1952 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1951 msgid "A host named %1 already exists." msgstr "" #. error popup #. FIXME: text? -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1970 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2034 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1969 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2033 msgid "Enter a host IP." msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1985 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1984 msgid "The hardware address must be defined." msgstr "" #. error popup #. yes-no popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2006 -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2021 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2005 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2020 msgid "Select a host first." msgstr "" #. checking new MAC -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2048 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2047 msgid "The input value must be defined." msgstr "" #. yes-no popup -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2087 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2086 msgid "" "If you enter the expert settings, you cannot return \n" "to this dialog. You may be able to display this dialog \n" @@ -885,15 +884,15 @@ msgstr "" #. remove leading '-' -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2134 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2133 msgid "\"-%1\" is not a valid DHCP server commandline option" msgstr "" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2145 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2144 msgid "DHCP server commandline option \"-%1\" requires an argument" msgstr "" -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2156 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2155 msgid "" "You have specified an alternate configuration file for the DHCP server.\n" "\n" @@ -905,7 +904,7 @@ msgstr "" #. dialog caption, %1 is step number -#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2237 +#: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:2236 msgid "DHCP Server Wizard (%1 of 4)" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/dns-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/dns-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/dns-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/drbd.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/drbd.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/drbd.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -222,30 +222,19 @@ #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:69 msgid "" -"<p>Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a " -"resource</p>\n" +"<p>Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a resource</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:75 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) " -"of one of the nodes</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which " -"is used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach " -"the device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to " -"the node's partner device.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being " -"described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and " -"you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk " -"parameter,following its minor number.\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) of one of the nodes</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which is used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach the device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to the node's partner device.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk parameter,following its minor number.\n" "\t\tLike: '/dev/drbd_r0 minor 0'</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve " -"the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.</" -"p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the " -"backing device is used to store the meta-data.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the backing device is used to store the meta-data.</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" @@ -253,47 +242,25 @@ msgid "" "\n" "\t\t<p><b>Protocol</b></p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached " -"local disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached " -"local disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both " -"local and remote disk.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both local and remote disk.</p>\n" "\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t \n" "\t\t<p><b>wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node " -"was a degraded cluster</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node was a degraded cluster</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports io-" -"error to the upper layers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports io-error to the upper layers</p>\n" "\t\t<p><b>sndbuf-size</b>: The size of the TCP socket send buffer</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by " -"DRBD</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by DRBD</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected " -"response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is " -"considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must " -"be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, " -"the unit 0.1 seconds.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-" -"alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time " -"period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default " -"unit is 100ms</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive " -"packet</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, the unit 0.1 seconds.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default unit is 100ms</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two " -"write barriers</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write " -"request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The " -"default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top " -"of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by " -"background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is " -"KB/sec.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= " -"active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, " -"Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two write barriers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is KB/sec.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" @@ -302,20 +269,16 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:115 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>\"Disable IP Verification\"</b> to disable one of drbdadm's " -"sanity check</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>\"Disable IP Verification\"</b> to disable one of drbdadm's sanity check</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:118 msgid "" -"<p><b>Dialog Refresh:</b> The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it " -"waited so\n" +"<p><b>Dialog Refresh:</b> The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it waited so\n" " far. You might want to disable this if you have the console\n" " of your server connected to a serial terminal server with\n" " limited logging capacity.\n" -" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' " -"seconds,\n" +" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' seconds,\n" " set it to 0 to disable redrawing completely. </p>" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/fcoe-client.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/fcoe-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/fcoe-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -41,12 +41,12 @@ #. setting of config value is 'yes' #: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:48 msgid "yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "بلی" #. setting of config value is 'no' #: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:50 msgid "no" -msgstr "" +msgstr "خیر" #. text of an error popup #: src/include/fcoe-client/complex.rb:102 @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:230 #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:241 msgid "Yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "بله" #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:110 #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:118 @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:230 #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:241 msgid "No" -msgstr "" +msgstr "خیر" #. combo box label: require DCB (yes/no) #: src/include/fcoe-client/dialogs.rb:117 @@ -397,25 +397,17 @@ #. Services dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:71 -msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Starting of services</big><br></b><br>Enable or disable the start " -"of the services <b>fcoe</b> and <b>lldpad</b> at boot time.</p>" +msgid "<p><b><big>Starting of services</big><br></b><br>Enable or disable the start of the services <b>fcoe</b> and <b>lldpad</b> at boot time.</p>" msgstr "" #. Services dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:76 -msgid "" -"<p>Starting the service <b>fcoe</b> means starting the <i>Fibre Channel over " -"Ethernet</i> service daemon <i>fcoemon</i> which controls the FCoE " -"interfaces and establishes a connection with the daemon <i>lldpad</i>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Starting the service <b>fcoe</b> means starting the <i>Fibre Channel over Ethernet</i> service daemon <i>fcoemon</i> which controls the FCoE interfaces and establishes a connection with the daemon <i>lldpad</i>.</p>" msgstr "" #. Services dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:82 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>lldpad</b> service provides the <i>Link Layer Discovery Protocol</" -"i> agent daemon <i>lldpad</i>, which informs <i>fcoemon</i> about DCB (Data " -"Center Bridging) features and configuration of the interfaces.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>lldpad</b> service provides the <i>Link Layer Discovery Protocol</i> agent daemon <i>lldpad</i>, which informs <i>fcoemon</i> about DCB (Data Center Bridging) features and configuration of the interfaces.</p>" msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 1/5 @@ -425,37 +417,22 @@ #. Interfaces dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:92 -msgid "" -"<p>The interfaces dialog shows all detected netcards including the status of " -"VLAN and FCoE configuration.<br>FCoE is possible if a VLAN interface is " -"configured for FCoE on the switch.<br>For every netcard (network interface), " -"this is shown in column <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i>.</p>" +msgid "<p>The interfaces dialog shows all detected netcards including the status of VLAN and FCoE configuration.<br>FCoE is possible if a VLAN interface is configured for FCoE on the switch.<br>For every netcard (network interface), this is shown in column <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i>.</p>" msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:99 -msgid "" -"<p>It's possible to retry the check for FCoE services by using <b>Retry " -"Detection</b>(might be required for interfaces needing some time to get up)." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>It's possible to retry the check for FCoE services by using <b>Retry Detection</b>(might be required for interfaces needing some time to get up).</p>" msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:103 -msgid "" -"<p>The values for <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i> in detail:<br><b>not available</" -"b>: Fibre Channel over Ethernet is not possible (must be enabled on the " -"switch first).<br><b>not configured</b>: FCoE is possible but not yet " -"activated.<br>Press <b>Create FCoE VLAN Interface</b> to activate.<br>If the " -"FCoE VLAN interface has already been created, the name is shown in the " -"column, e.g. eth3.200.</p>" +msgid "<p>The values for <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i> in detail:<br><b>not available</b>: Fibre Channel over Ethernet is not possible (must be enabled on the switch first).<br><b>not configured</b>: FCoE is possible but not yet activated.<br>Press <b>Create FCoE VLAN Interface</b> to activate.<br>If the FCoE VLAN interface has already been created, the name is shown in the column, e.g. eth3.200.</p>" msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:113 -msgid "" -"<p>To change the configuration of a FCoE VLAN interface, click on <b>Change " -"Settings</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To change the configuration of a FCoE VLAN interface, click on <b>Change Settings</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. Configuration dialog help 1/3 @@ -465,19 +442,14 @@ #. Configuration dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:121 -msgid "" -"<p>Configure the general settings for the FCoE system service. The settings " -"are written to '/etc/fcoe/config'.</p>" +msgid "<p>Configure the general settings for the FCoE system service. The settings are written to '/etc/fcoe/config'.</p>" msgstr "" #. Configuration dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:125 msgid "" "<p>The values are:<br>\n" -"<b>Debug</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>This is used to enable or disable " -"debugging messages from the fcoe service script and <i>fcoemon</i>." -"<br><b>Use syslog</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Messages are sent to the " -"system log if set to <i>yes</i> (data are logged to /var/log/messages).</p>" +"<b>Debug</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>This is used to enable or disable debugging messages from the fcoe service script and <i>fcoemon</i>.<br><b>Use syslog</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Messages are sent to the system log if set to <i>yes</i> (data are logged to /var/log/messages).</p>" msgstr "" #. edit dialog help 1/3 @@ -487,20 +459,12 @@ #. Edit dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:137 -msgid "" -"<p>The daemon <i>fcoemon</i> reads these configuration files on " -"initialization.<br>There is a file for every interface and the values " -"indicate whether FCoE instances should be created and if DCB is required.</p>" +msgid "<p>The daemon <i>fcoemon</i> reads these configuration files on initialization.<br>There is a file for every interface and the values indicate whether FCoE instances should be created and if DCB is required.</p>" msgstr "" #. Edit dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:143 -msgid "" -"<p>The values are:<br><b>FCoE Enable</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Enable " -"or disable the creation of FCoE instances.<br><b>DCB Required</b>: <i>yes</" -"i> or <i>no</i><br>The default is <i>yes</i>, DCB is usually required." -"<br><b>AUTO VLAN</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>If set to <i>yes</i> " -"'fcoemon' will create the VLAN interfaces automatically.</p>" +msgid "<p>The values are:<br><b>FCoE Enable</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Enable or disable the creation of FCoE instances.<br><b>DCB Required</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>The default is <i>yes</i>, DCB is usually required.<br><b>AUTO VLAN</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>If set to <i>yes</i> 'fcoemon' will create the VLAN interfaces automatically.</p>" msgstr "" #. Header of tab in tab widget @@ -552,11 +516,8 @@ #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:413 #, fuzzy -#| msgid "" -#| "<p>To access the X11 system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" -msgid "" -"<p>To continue the FCoE configuration, the <b>%1</b> package must be " -"installed.</p>" +#| msgid "<p>To access the X11 system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgid "<p>To continue the FCoE configuration, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>برای دسترسی به سرویس X11، باید بسته ی, <b>%1</b>نصب شود</p>" #: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:416 Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/firewall-services.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/firewall-services.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/firewall-services.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:32+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:54+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/firewall.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/firewall.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/firewall.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/firstboot.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/firstboot.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/firstboot.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/ftp-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/ftp-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/ftp-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:38+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/geo-cluster.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/geo-cluster.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/geo-cluster.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ #. Initialization dialog contents #: src/include/geo-cluster/wizards.rb:142 msgid "Initializing..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "در حال مقدار دهی اولیه..." #. Not necessary to use remove_list_quote? #: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:224 @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ #: src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:290 src/modules/GeoCluster.rb:358 #: src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:154 src/modules/GeoCluster2.pm:232 msgid "Finished" -msgstr "" +msgstr "پایان" #. #-#-#-#-# geo-cluster.rxgettext.pot (PACKAGE VERSION) #-#-#-#-# #. GeoCluster write dialog caption Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/gtk.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/gtk.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/gtk.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-03-02 15:27+0330\n" "Last-Translator: مصطفی برمشوری <mostafa.barmshor@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Farsi (Persian) <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/http-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/http-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/http-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:38+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/inetd.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/inetd.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/inetd.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/installation.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/installation.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/installation.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-09-03 16:45+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-02-15 23:53+0330\n" "Last-Translator: \n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -38,30 +38,19 @@ #, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "<p>Use <b>Clone</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" -#| "AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user " -#| "interaction. AutoYaST\n" -#| "needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If " -#| "this option is\n" -#| "selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst." -#| "xml</tt>.</p>" +#| "AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" +#| "needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" +#| "selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Clone System Settings</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST " -"profile.\n" -"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user " -"interaction. AutoYaST\n" -"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this " -"option is\n" -"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst." -"xml</tt>.</p>" +"<p>Use <b>Clone System Settings</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>اکر می خواهید اطلاعات عمومی AutoYaST را ایجاد کنید از<b> نسخه سازی</" -"b>استفاده کنید.\n" -"AutoYaST روندی است که در ان سیستم SUSE Linux به طور کامل و بدون محاوره با " -"کاربر نصب می شود. AutoYaST\n" -"به اطلاعات عمومی برای داشتن دانش این که سیستمی که نصب می شود چگونه باشد ،" -"احتیاج دارد. اگر این گزینه \n" -"انتخاب شده باشد، اطلاعات عمومی سیستم در مسیر <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt> " -"ذخیره خواهد شد.</p>" +"<p>اکر می خواهید اطلاعات عمومی AutoYaST را ایجاد کنید از<b> نسخه سازی</b>استفاده کنید.\n" +"AutoYaST روندی است که در ان سیستم SUSE Linux به طور کامل و بدون محاوره با کاربر نصب می شود. AutoYaST\n" +"به اطلاعات عمومی برای داشتن دانش این که سیستمی که نصب می شود چگونه باشد ،احتیاج دارد. اگر این گزینه \n" +"انتخاب شده باشد، اطلاعات عمومی سیستم در مسیر <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt> ذخیره خواهد شد.</p>" #. this is a heading #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:68 @@ -80,9 +69,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:98 -msgid "" -"The AutoYaST profile will be written under /root/autoinst.xml (<a href=" -"\"%1\">do not write it</a>)." +msgid "The AutoYaST profile will be written under /root/autoinst.xml (<a href=\"%1\">do not write it</a>)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview @@ -128,9 +115,7 @@ msgstr "نصب کردن از فایل" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:119 -msgid "" -"Here you can choose to use Novell pre-defined images to speed up RPM " -"installation." +msgid "Here you can choose to use Novell pre-defined images to speed up RPM installation." msgstr "" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:133 @@ -144,9 +129,7 @@ msgstr "از فایل نصب &نکن" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:153 -msgid "" -"Custom images deployment - this needs a URL to be configured as installation " -"source" +msgid "Custom images deployment - this needs a URL to be configured as installation source" msgstr "" #. Image name, Image location @@ -155,15 +138,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:163 -msgid "" -"You have to configure the software selection first before you can create an " -"image here" +msgid "You have to configure the software selection first before you can create an image here" msgstr "" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:174 -msgid "" -"Create an image file (AutoYaST will fetch it from the given location during " -"installation)" +msgid "Create an image file (AutoYaST will fetch it from the given location during installation)" msgstr "" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:181 @@ -189,34 +168,26 @@ #, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "<p><b>Installation from Images</b> is used to speed the installation up.\n" -#| "Images contain compressed snapshots of an installed system matching your " -#| "selection\n" -#| "of patterns. The rest of packages which are not in images will be " -#| "installed from\n" +#| "Images contain compressed snapshots of an installed system matching your selection\n" +#| "of patterns. The rest of packages which are not in images will be installed from\n" #| "packages the standard way.</p>\n" msgid "" "<p><b>Installation from Images</b> is used to speed the installation up.\n" "Images contain compressed snapshots of an installed system matching your\n" -"selection of patterns. The rest of the packages which are not contained in " -"the\n" +"selection of patterns. The rest of the packages which are not contained in the\n" "images will be installed from packages the standard way.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><b>نصب کردن از فایل</b>برای ایجاد تسریع در روند نصب استفاده می شود.\n" -"فایل نصب شاما یک تصویر فشرده از بسته های ایست که باید به روی سیستم شما نصب " -"شود.\n" -"البته ممکن است گروهی از بسته های که شما تعیین کرده اید در این فایل نباشد در " -"این صورت\n" +"فایل نصب شاما یک تصویر فشرده از بسته های ایست که باید به روی سیستم شما نصب شود.\n" +"البته ممکن است گروهی از بسته های که شما تعیین کرده اید در این فایل نباشد در این صورت\n" "روند نصب انها را به روش استاندار نصب خواهد کرد.<p>\n" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:233 msgid "" "<p><b>Creating own Images</b> is used if you\n" -"want to skip the complete step of RPM installation. Instead AutoYaST will " -"dump an\n" -"image on the harddisk which is a lot faster and can be pre-configured " -"already.\n" -"Everything else than RPM installation is done like during a normal auto-" -"installation.</p>" +"want to skip the complete step of RPM installation. Instead AutoYaST will dump an\n" +"image on the harddisk which is a lot faster and can be pre-configured already.\n" +"Everything else than RPM installation is done like during a normal auto-installation.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:336 src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:347 @@ -226,10 +197,8 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:76 msgid "" -"<p>Note that when installing from images, the time stamps of all packages " -"originating from the images will\n" -"not match the installation date but rather the date the image was created.</" -"p>" +"<p>Note that when installing from images, the time stamps of all packages originating from the images will\n" +"not match the installation date but rather the date the image was created.</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: help text @@ -293,7 +262,7 @@ msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل غیر فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">فعال</a>)" #. progress step title -#: src/clients/desktop_finish.rb:73 +#: src/clients/desktop_finish.rb:70 msgid "Initializing default window manager..." msgstr "در حال مقدار دهی اولیه مدیریت پنجره ها..." @@ -330,6 +299,7 @@ msgstr "به روز رسانی برای %1 %2" #: src/clients/inst_addon_update_sources.rb:173 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:301 msgid "Unknown Product" msgstr "محصول ناشناس" @@ -356,8 +326,7 @@ "You may skip this step and run an online update later.\n" msgstr "" "با انتخاب تعیین کنید که به روز رسانی بر خط هم اکنون اجرا شود.\n" -"شما مکنن است از این مرحله صرف نظر کنید و در زمانی دیگر اقدام به روز رسانی بر " -"خط کنید.\n" +"شما مکنن است از این مرحله صرف نظر کنید و در زمانی دیگر اقدام به روز رسانی بر خط کنید.\n" #. ---------------------------------------------------------------------- #. Build dialog @@ -389,7 +358,7 @@ #. this type of contents will be shown only for initial installation dialog #. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption #: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:137 -#: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:312 +#: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:318 msgid "License Agreement" msgstr "تفاهم نامه" @@ -407,8 +376,7 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"<b>زبان </b>مورد نظر خود و <b> لایه صفحه کلید</b>را که در طول مراحل نصب می " -"خواهید مورد\n" +"<b>زبان </b>مورد نظر خود و <b> لایه صفحه کلید</b>را که در طول مراحل نصب می خواهید مورد\n" "استفاده قرار دهید را انتخاب کنید\n" "</p>\n" @@ -419,20 +387,17 @@ #| msgid "" #| "<p>\n" #| "License has to be accepted before continuing the installation.\n" -#| "Use <b>License Translations...</b> to show the license in all available " -#| "translations.\n" +#| "Use <b>License Translations...</b> to show the license in all available translations.\n" #| "</p>" msgid "" "<p>\n" "The license must be accepted before the installation continues.\n" -"Use <b>License Translations...</b> to show the license in all available " -"translations.\n" +"Use <b>License Translations...</b> to show the license in all available translations.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" "توافق نامه باید قبل از ادامه روند نصب انتخاب شود.\n" -"از<b>ترحمه ی توافق نامه ..</b> برای نمایش توافق نامه در زبان های موجود " -"استفاده کنید.\n" +"از<b>ترحمه ی توافق نامه ..</b> برای نمایش توافق نامه در زبان های موجود استفاده کنید.\n" "</p>" #. help text, continued @@ -472,7 +437,21 @@ "در هر مرحله از نصب انتخاب کنید.\n" "</p>\n" -#: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:336 +#. In case of going back, Release Notes button may be shown, retranslate it (bnc#886660) +#. Assure that relnotes have been downloaded first +#. exit codes (see "man curl"): +#. 7 = Failed to connect to host. +#. 28 = Operation timeout. +#. push button +#: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:230 +#: src/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:139 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:299 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Release Notes" +msgid "Re&lease Notes..." +msgstr "یادداشت راهنما" + +#: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:342 msgid "You must accept the license to install this product" msgstr "" @@ -553,8 +532,7 @@ "our SUSE Welcome Dialog.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>اگ شما KDE را به عنوان رابط گرافیکی پیش فرض انتخاب کنید انگاه شما قادر \n" -"خواهید بود تنظیمات KDE را برای سخت افزار خود تعیین کنید. همچنین قادر به " -"مشاهده ی \n" +"خواهید بود تنظیمات KDE را برای سخت افزار خود تعیین کنید. همچنین قادر به مشاهده ی \n" "پنجره خوش امد گویی SUSE باشید.</p>\n" # راهنمای در مورد نسخه سازی. توجه کنید که رونویسی و نسخه برداری با هم تفاوت دارند. @@ -562,21 +540,14 @@ #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:214 msgid "" "<p>Use <b>Clone</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" -"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user " -"interaction. AutoYaST\n" -"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this " -"option is\n" -"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst." -"xml</tt>.</p>" +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>اکر می خواهید اطلاعات عمومی AutoYaST را ایجاد کنید از<b> نسخه سازی</" -"b>استفاده کنید.\n" -"AutoYaST روندی است که در ان سیستم SUSE Linux به طور کامل و بدون محاوره با " -"کاربر نصب می شود. AutoYaST\n" -"به اطلاعات عمومی برای داشتن دانش این که سیستمی که نصب می شود چگونه باشد ،" -"احتیاج دارد. اگر این گزینه \n" -"انتخاب شده باشد، اطلاعات عمومی سیستم در مسیر <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt> " -"ذخیره خواهد شد.</p>" +"<p>اکر می خواهید اطلاعات عمومی AutoYaST را ایجاد کنید از<b> نسخه سازی</b>استفاده کنید.\n" +"AutoYaST روندی است که در ان سیستم SUSE Linux به طور کامل و بدون محاوره با کاربر نصب می شود. AutoYaST\n" +"به اطلاعات عمومی برای داشتن دانش این که سیستمی که نصب می شود چگونه باشد ،احتیاج دارد. اگر این گزینه \n" +"انتخاب شده باشد، اطلاعات عمومی سیستم در مسیر <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt> ذخیره خواهد شد.</p>" #. Dialog busy message #. TRANSLATORS: busy message @@ -589,10 +560,8 @@ #. Load Add-On products configured in the fist stage #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:308 #, fuzzy -#| msgid "" -#| "<p>To access the X11 system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" -msgid "" -"<p>To clone the current system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +#| msgid "<p>To access the X11 system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgid "<p>To clone the current system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "<p>برای دسترسی به سرویس X11، باید بسته ی, <b>%1</b>نصب شود</p>" #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:311 @@ -640,12 +609,10 @@ #, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "Debugging has been turned on.\n" -#| "YaST will open a package manager for you to check the current status of " -#| "packages." +#| "YaST will open a package manager for you to check the current status of packages." msgid "" "Debugging has been turned on.\n" -"YaST will open a software manager for you to check the current status of " -"packages." +"YaST will open a software manager for you to check the current status of packages." msgstr "" "رفع خطا فعال شده است.\n" "YaST مدیریت بسته ها را برای بررسی حالت بسته ها برای شما باز می کند." @@ -682,9 +649,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:93 -msgid "" -"Select the disk, which the image will be deployed to. All data on the disk " -"will be lost and the disk will be partitioned as defined in the image." +msgid "Select the disk, which the image will be deployed to. All data on the disk will be lost and the disk will be partitioned as defined in the image." msgstr "" #: src/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:100 @@ -715,11 +680,11 @@ msgid "Configure &FCoE Interfaces" msgstr "قالب بندی دیسک &ZFCP" -#: src/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:112 +#: src/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:111 msgid "Configure &iSCSI Disks" msgstr "قالب بندی دیسک &iSCSI" -#: src/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:113 +#: src/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:112 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Saving network configuration..." msgid "Change Net&work Configuration" @@ -742,15 +707,22 @@ msgid "<p>Installation is just about to start!</p>" msgstr "<p>روند نصب در حالآغاز شدن است!</p>" -#. download release notes now -#. push button -#: src/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:135 -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:317 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Release Notes" -msgid "Re&lease Notes..." -msgstr "یادداشت راهنما" +#. Set the UI content to show some progress. +#. TODO FIXME: use a better title (reused existing texts because of text freeze) +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption +#. bug #302384 +#: src/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:147 +#: src/clients/inst_initialization.rb:56 +#: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:151 +msgid "Initializing" +msgstr "مقداردهی اولیه" +#. TRANSLATORS: dialog progress message +#: src/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:147 +#: src/clients/inst_initialization.rb:44 +msgid "Initializing the installation..." +msgstr "مقدار دهی اولیه نصب..." + #. popup message, list of repositores is appended to the text #: src/clients/inst_extrasources.rb:150 msgid "Package updates have been found in these additional repositories:" @@ -769,64 +741,64 @@ #. Adjust a SlideShow dialog if not configured #. kilobytes #. just make it longer than inst_finish, TODO: better value later -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:85 src/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:139 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:88 src/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:139 #: src/clients/inst_prepareprogress.rb:157 msgid "Finishing Basic Installation" msgstr "در خال خاتمه نصب مقدماتی" #. Might be left from the previous stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:111 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:114 msgid "Creating list of finish scripts to call..." msgstr "ایجاد لیست دست نویس های پایانی برای فراخانی..." #. progress stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:127 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:213 msgid "Copy files to installed system" msgstr "نسخه سازی از داده ها در سیستم نصب شده" #. progress stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:142 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:220 msgid "Save configuration" msgstr "ذخیره سازی قالب بندی" #. progress stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:168 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:227 msgid "Save installation settings" msgstr "ذخیره سازی تنظیمات نصب" #. progress stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:187 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:236 msgid "Install boot manager" msgstr "نصب برنامه راه انداز" #. progress stage -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:199 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:243 msgid "Prepare system for initial boot" msgstr "آماده سازی سیستم برای راه اندازی مقدماتی" #. merge steps from add-on products #. bnc #438678 -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:304 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:348 msgid "Checking stage: %1..." msgstr "مرحله ی بررسی:%1 ..." #. a fallback busy message -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:393 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:437 msgid "Calling step %1..." msgstr "فراخانی قدم%1..." #. use as ' * %1' -> ' * One of the finish steps...' in the SlideShow log -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:413 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:457 msgid " * %1" msgstr " * %1" #. Anything else -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:450 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:494 msgid "Finished" msgstr "به پایان رسید" #. get the latest errors -#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:581 +#: src/clients/inst_finish.rb:625 msgid "Installation Error" msgstr "خطا در نصب" @@ -847,11 +819,6 @@ msgid "Installation is being initialized." msgstr "لطفا در مدت زمانی که روند نصب در حال مقدار دهی های اولیه است صبر کنید." -#. TRANSLATORS: dialog progress message -#: src/clients/inst_initialization.rb:44 -msgid "Initializing the installation..." -msgstr "مقدار دهی اولیه نصب..." - #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help #. help for the dialog - busy message #: src/clients/inst_initialization.rb:48 @@ -864,13 +831,6 @@ msgid "Preparing the initial system configuration..." msgstr "در حال آماده سازی قالب بندی اولیه ی سیستم..." -#. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption -#. bug #302384 -#: src/clients/inst_initialization.rb:56 -#: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:151 -msgid "Initializing" -msgstr "مقداردهی اولیه" - #. dialog caption #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:83 #, fuzzy @@ -925,25 +885,20 @@ #, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "<p>\n" -#| "To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, " -#| "select\n" +#| "To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, select\n" #| "<b>Include Add-On Products from Separate Media</b>.</p>" msgid "" "<p>\n" -"To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, " -"select\n" +"To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, select\n" "<b>Include Add-on Products from Separate Media</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"برای نضب محصولات و بسته های اضافه از دستگاه های دیگر همراه با &محصولات، " -"گزینه ی\n" +"برای نضب محصولات و بسته های اضافه از دستگاه های دیگر همراه با &محصولات، گزینه ی\n" "<b> استفاده از محصولات اضافه از دیگر دستگاه ها</b></p>" #. help text: additional help for installation #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:211 -msgid "" -"<p>If you need specific hardware drivers for installation, see <i>http://" -"drivers.suse.com</i> site.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you need specific hardware drivers for installation, see <i>http://drivers.suse.com</i> site.</p>" msgstr "" #. Error message @@ -1000,13 +955,10 @@ #: src/clients/inst_network_check.rb:145 msgid "" "<p>A configured network is needed for using remote repositories\n" -"or add-on products. If you do not use remote repositories, skip the " -"configuration.</p>\n" +"or add-on products. If you do not use remote repositories, skip the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p> برای استفاده از مخازن دور یا محصولات اضافه نیاز به داشتن شبکه قالب بندی " -"شده است.\n" -"اگر شما از مخازن دور استفاده نمی کنید می توانید از این مرحله عبور کنید.</" -"p>\n" +"<p> برای استفاده از مخازن دور یا محصولات اضافه نیاز به داشتن شبکه قالب بندی شده است.\n" +"اگر شما از مخازن دور استفاده نمی کنید می توانید از این مرحله عبور کنید.</p>\n" #. error popup #: src/clients/inst_network_check.rb:187 @@ -1018,22 +970,17 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 1 #: src/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:57 msgid "" -"<p>At Linux <b>choice</b> is a top priority. <i>openSUSE</i> offers a " -"number \n" -"of different desktop environments. Below you see a list of the 2 major " -"ones \n" +"<p>At Linux <b>choice</b> is a top priority. <i>openSUSE</i> offers a number \n" +"of different desktop environments. Below you see a list of the 2 major ones \n" "<b>GNOME</b> and <b>KDE</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 3 #: src/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:63 msgid "" -"<p>You may select alternative desktop environments (or one of minimal " -"installation patterns)\n" -"that could fit your needs better using the <b>Other</b> option . Later in " -"the software \n" -"selection or after installation, you can change your selection or add " -"additional desktop \n" +"<p>You may select alternative desktop environments (or one of minimal installation patterns)\n" +"that could fit your needs better using the <b>Other</b> option . Later in the software \n" +"selection or after installation, you can change your selection or add additional desktop \n" "environments. This screen allows you to set the default.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1178,8 +1125,7 @@ #. May contain newlines, but don't make it very much longer than the original. #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1069 #, fuzzy -#| msgid "" -#| "Click any headline to make changes or use the \"Change...\" menu below." +#| msgid "Click any headline to make changes or use the \"Change...\" menu below." msgid "Click a headline to make changes or use the \"Change...\" menu below." msgstr "" "برای ایجاد تغییرات به روی هر عنوان که می خواهید کلید کنید یا \n" @@ -1187,8 +1133,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1073 #, fuzzy -#| msgid "" -#| "Click any headline to make changes or use the \"Change...\" menu below." +#| msgid "Click any headline to make changes or use the \"Change...\" menu below." msgid "Click a headline to make changes." msgstr "" "برای ایجاد تغییرات به روی هر عنوان که می خواهید کلید کنید یا \n" @@ -1213,8 +1158,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1217 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select <b>Install</b> to perform a new installation with the values " -"displayed.\n" +"Select <b>Install</b> to perform a new installation with the values displayed.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1466,20 +1410,15 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help #: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:144 #, fuzzy -#| msgid "" -#| "Please wait while computer hardware and installed systems are being " -#| "probed..." +#| msgid "Please wait while computer hardware and installed systems are being probed..." msgid "YaST is probing computer hardware and installed systems now." -msgstr "" -"لطفا در مدت زمانی که رایانه شما در حال کاوش برای سخت افزار و سیستم های نصب " -"شده است صبر کنید..." +msgstr "لطفا در مدت زمانی که رایانه شما در حال کاوش برای سخت افزار و سیستم های نصب شده است صبر کنید..." #. additonal error when HW was not found #: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:241 msgid "" "\n" -"Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for " -"installation." +"Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for installation." msgstr "" #. pop-up error report @@ -1507,7 +1446,7 @@ msgstr "" #. popup message -#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:304 +#: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:318 msgid "" "Failed to initialize the software repositories.\n" "Aborting the installation." @@ -1570,8 +1509,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:245 msgid "" "<p>Here you see all software repositories found\n" -"on the system you are upgrading. Enable the ones you want to include in the " -"upgrade process.</p>" +"on the system you are upgrading. Enable the ones you want to include in the upgrade process.</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: help text 2/3 @@ -1785,53 +1723,53 @@ msgstr "در حال ذخیره سازی قالب بندی proxy..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:134 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:136 msgid "Saving time zone..." msgstr "در حال ذخیره سازی مکان پیش فرض زمانی.." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:143 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:145 msgid "Saving language..." msgstr "در حال ذخیره سازی زبان ها..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:148 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:150 msgid "Saving console configuration..." msgstr "در حال ذخیره سازی قالب بندی پوسته متنی..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:167 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:169 msgid "Saving keyboard configuration..." msgstr "در حال ذخیره سازی قالب بندی صفحه کلید.." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:172 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:174 msgid "Saving product information..." msgstr "در حال ذخیره سازی اطلاعات محصولات..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:177 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:179 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Saving automatical installation settings..." msgid "Saving automatic installation settings..." msgstr "در حال ذخیره سازی تنظیمات نصب به صورت خودکار..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:183 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:185 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Writing proxy settings..." msgid "Saving security settings..." msgstr "در حال نوشتن تنظیمات proxy...." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:192 +#: src/clients/save_config_finish.rb:208 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Saving automatical installation settings..." msgid "Saving boot scripts settings..." msgstr "در حال ذخیره سازی تنظیمات نصب به صورت خودکار..." #. progress step title -#: src/clients/save_hw_status_finish.rb:70 +#: src/clients/save_hw_status_finish.rb:67 msgid "Saving hardware configuration..." msgstr "در حال ذخیره سازی قالب بندی سخت افزار..." @@ -1984,11 +1922,9 @@ #. Text for confirmation popup before the installation really starts 1/3 #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:202 #, fuzzy -#| msgid "" -#| "<p>All information required for the base installation is now complete.</p>" +#| msgid "<p>All information required for the base installation is now complete.</p>" msgid "<p>Information required for the base installation is now complete.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p> تمام اطلاعاتی که برای روند نصب پایه مورد نیاز است کامل شده است.</p>" +msgstr "<p> تمام اطلاعاتی که برای روند نصب پایه مورد نیاز است کامل شده است.</p>" #. Text for confirmation popup before the installation really starts 2/3 #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:214 @@ -2014,9 +1950,7 @@ #. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 3/3 #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:236 src/include/installation/misc.rb:254 msgid "<p>Go back and check the settings if you are unsure.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>در صورتی که اطمینان ندارید به عقب برگردید و تنظیمات خود را دوباره برسی " -"کنید.</p>" +msgstr "<p>در صورتی که اطمینان ندارید به عقب برگردید و تنظیمات خود را دوباره برسی کنید.</p>" #. Heading for confirmation popup before the update really starts #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:242 @@ -2026,11 +1960,9 @@ #. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 1/3 #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:246 #, fuzzy -#| msgid "" -#| "<p>All information required to perform an update is now complete.</p>" +#| msgid "<p>All information required to perform an update is now complete.</p>" msgid "<p>Information required to perform an update is now complete.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>تمام اطلاعاتی که برای اجرای به روز رسانی مورد نیاز است کامل شده.</p>" +msgstr "<p>تمام اطلاعاتی که برای اجرای به روز رسانی مورد نیاز است کامل شده.</p>" #. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 2/3 #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:248 @@ -2040,8 +1972,7 @@ "according to the settings in the previous dialogs.</p>" msgstr "" "\n" -"<p>اگر شما این روند را ادامه دهید منجر به بازنویس شدن اطلاعات به روی اطلاعات " -"قبلی خود خواهید شد\n" +"<p>اگر شما این روند را ادامه دهید منجر به بازنویس شدن اطلاعات به روی اطلاعات قبلی خود خواهید شد\n" "این عمل بر اساس تنظیمات قبلی شما اتفاق خواهد افتاد.</p>" #. Label for the button that confirms startint the installation @@ -2077,9 +2008,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:78 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Blacklist devices</b> if you want to create blacklist channels to " -"such devices which will reduce kernel memory footprint.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Blacklist devices</b> if you want to create blacklist channels to such devices which will reduce kernel memory footprint.</p>" msgstr "" #. progress step title @@ -2096,6 +2025,15 @@ msgid "Shrinking PREP partition..." msgstr "در حال جستجو برای فایلبندی لینوکس ..." +#. Text to display +#. +#. @return String +#: src/lib/installation/remote_finish_client.rb:68 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Initializing the installation..." +msgid "Enabling remote administration..." +msgstr "مقدار دهی اولیه نصب..." + #. checking whether images are supported #. BNC #409927 #. Checking files for signatures @@ -2240,11 +2178,8 @@ #~ msgid "Hardware Information of the Selected Network Card" #~ msgstr "اطلاعات سخت افزاری کارت شبکه انتخاب شده" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Here you can configure your network cards to be used immediately.</p>" -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p> در اینجا شما می توانید کارت شبکه خود را قالب بندی کنید تا بلافاصله " -#~ "از ان استفاده شود.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Here you can configure your network cards to be used immediately.</p>" +#~ msgstr "<p> در اینجا شما می توانید کارت شبکه خود را قالب بندی کنید تا بلافاصله از ان استفاده شود.</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>If you do not need a network connection now,\n" @@ -2513,25 +2448,21 @@ #, fuzzy #~| msgid "" #~| "<p>\n" -#~| "Select <b>New Installation</b> if there is no existing Linux system on " -#~| "your\n" +#~| "Select <b>New Installation</b> if there is no existing Linux system on your\n" #~| "machine or if you want to replace an existing Linux system completely,\n" #~| "abandoning all its configuration data.\n" #~| "</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "Select <b>New Installation</b> if there is no existing Linux system on " -#~ "your\n" +#~ "Select <b>New Installation</b> if there is no existing Linux system on your\n" #~ "machine or if you want to replace an existing Linux system completely,\n" #~ "discarding all its configuration data.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "اگر به روی سیستم شما هیچ سیستم لینوکسی وجود ندارد،\n" -#~ "یا اینکه می خواهید سیستم حدید را به طور کامل با سیستم موحود جای گذاری " -#~ "کنید\n" -#~ "تا از تمام تنظیمات ان خلاصی یابید گزینه ی<b> نصب سیستم جدید<b> را انتخاب " -#~ "کنید.\n" +#~ "یا اینکه می خواهید سیستم حدید را به طور کامل با سیستم موحود جای گذاری کنید\n" +#~ "تا از تمام تنظیمات ان خلاصی یابید گزینه ی<b> نصب سیستم جدید<b> را انتخاب کنید.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgid "" @@ -2542,16 +2473,13 @@ #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "برای به روز رسانی سیستم لینوکس موجود به روی سیستم شما گزینه ی<b>به روز " -#~ "رسامی سیستم موجود</b>\n" -#~ "را نتخاب کنید. آین گزینه باعث می شود تا جایی که ممکن است تنظیمات موجود در " -#~ "سیستم شما حفظ شود.\n" +#~ "برای به روز رسانی سیستم لینوکس موجود به روی سیستم شما گزینه ی<b>به روز رسامی سیستم موجود</b>\n" +#~ "را نتخاب کنید. آین گزینه باعث می شود تا جایی که ممکن است تنظیمات موجود در سیستم شما حفظ شود.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgid "" #~ "<p>\n" -#~ "Select <b>Use Automatic Configuration</b> to let the installation " -#~ "program\n" +#~ "Select <b>Use Automatic Configuration</b> to let the installation program\n" #~ "configure your network and hardware automatically. Otherwise you will\n" #~ "be offered a configuration proposal with the possibility to tune all the\n" #~ "settings manually. Inexperienced users are advised to use automatic\n" @@ -2559,12 +2487,9 @@ #~ msgstr "" #~ "<p>\n" #~ "برای اینکه به روند نصب اجازه دهید که به صورت خودکار تنظیمات شبکه \n" -#~ "و دیگر سخت افزار ها را انجام دهد گزینه ی<b>استفاده از تنظیمات خودکار</b> " -#~ "را انتخاب کنید.\n" -#~ "در غیر این صورت تنظیمات پیش فرض و توانایی تغییر انها به شما داده می " -#~ "شودتا \n" -#~ "با استفاده از تغییرات را دستی اعمال کنید. به کاربران کم تجربه توصیه می " -#~ "شود که \n" +#~ "و دیگر سخت افزار ها را انجام دهد گزینه ی<b>استفاده از تنظیمات خودکار</b> را انتخاب کنید.\n" +#~ "در غیر این صورت تنظیمات پیش فرض و توانایی تغییر انها به شما داده می شودتا \n" +#~ "با استفاده از تغییرات را دستی اعمال کنید. به کاربران کم تجربه توصیه می شود که \n" #~ "از تنضیمات خود کار استفاده کنند.</p>\n" #~ msgid "<p>Update mode does not support automatic configuration.</p>" @@ -2572,8 +2497,7 @@ #, fuzzy #~| msgid "" -#~| "<p>The features <b>Update</b> and <b>Repair Installed System</b> are " -#~| "only\n" +#~| "<p>The features <b>Update</b> and <b>Repair Installed System</b> are only\n" #~| "available if an existing Linux system has been detected.\n" #~| "</p>\n" #~ msgid "" @@ -2581,8 +2505,7 @@ #~ "available if an existing Linux system has been detected.\n" #~ "</p>\n" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p> امکانات <b> به روز رسانی</b> و <b> باسازی سیستم</b> تنها در حالتی " -#~ "که \n" +#~ "<p> امکانات <b> به روز رسانی</b> و <b> باسازی سیستم</b> تنها در حالتی که \n" #~ "سیستم فایل های لینوکس پیدا شود فعال خواهد بود.\n" #~ "</p>\n" @@ -2614,8 +2537,7 @@ #~ "اطلاعات بیشتر در حدود انتهای فایل %1 قابل دسترسی است.\n" #~ "\n" #~ "این یک گزارش دهی با ارزش از خطا در %2 است.\n" -#~ "لطفا،فایل وضعیت برنامه ی YaST را که در پوشه ی %3 ذخیره شده است را نیز به " -#~ "ان ملحق کنید." +#~ "لطفا،فایل وضعیت برنامه ی YaST را که در پوشه ی %3 ذخیره شده است را نیز به ان ملحق کنید." #, fuzzy #~| msgid "http://en.opensuse.org/Bugs/YaST" @@ -2634,8 +2556,7 @@ #~ "Please, attach all YaST logs stored in the '%2' directory.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "این یک گزارش دهی با ارزش از خطا در %1 است.\n" -#~ "لطفا،فایل وضعیت برنامه ی YaST را که در پوشه ی %2 ذخیره شده است را نیز به " -#~ "ان ملحق کنید." +#~ "لطفا،فایل وضعیت برنامه ی YaST را که در پوشه ی %2 ذخیره شده است را نیز به ان ملحق کنید." #~ msgid "Checking for %1 binary..." #~ msgstr "در حال بررسی برای فایل دودویی %1..." @@ -2702,12 +2623,9 @@ #, fuzzy #~| msgid "Connecting to the inst-sys failed, debugger cannot continue." #~ msgid "Connecting to the inst-sys failed. Debugger cannot continue." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "اتصال به سیستم inst-sys نافرجام بود، برنامه رفع اشکال نمی تواند به کارش " -#~ "ادامه دهد." +#~ msgstr "اتصال به سیستم inst-sys نافرجام بود، برنامه رفع اشکال نمی تواند به کارش ادامه دهد." -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>To access the X11 system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>To access the X11 system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>برای دسترسی به سرویس X11، باید بسته ی, <b>%1</b>نصب شود</p>" #~ msgid "<p>Do you want to install it now?</p>" @@ -2739,29 +2657,21 @@ #~ msgstr "در حال مدار دهی اولیه قلم..." #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p><b>Installation from Images</b> is used to speed the installation " -#~ "up. \n" -#~ "Images contain compressed snapshots of installed system matching your " -#~ "selection \n" -#~ "of patterns. The rest of packages which are not in images will be " -#~ "installed from \n" +#~ "<p><b>Installation from Images</b> is used to speed the installation up. \n" +#~ "Images contain compressed snapshots of installed system matching your selection \n" +#~ "of patterns. The rest of packages which are not in images will be installed from \n" #~ "packages the standard way.</p>" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p><b>نصب با استفاده از فایل</b> برای ایجاد تسریع در سیستم استفاده می " -#~ "شود. \n" +#~ "<p><b>نصب با استفاده از فایل</b> برای ایجاد تسریع در سیستم استفاده می شود. \n" #~ "فایل ها شامل اطلاعات فشرده ای با قالب مشخص متناسب با انتخاب شما است. \n" -#~ "مابقی بسته های که در این فایل ها موجود نیست به روش استاندار به روی " -#~ "سیستم \n" +#~ "مابقی بسته های که در این فایل ها موجود نیست به روش استاندار به روی سیستم \n" #~ "شما نصب خواهند شد.</p>" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Installation is currently writing the automatic configuration. Please " -#~ "wait...</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Installation is currently writing the automatic configuration. Please wait...</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>روند نصب در حال نوشتن قالب بندی خودکار است.لطفا صبر کنید...</p>" #~ msgid "Please wait while the installation is probing the network cards..." -#~ msgstr "" -#~ "لطفا در مدت زمانی که روند سیستم در حال کاوش کارت شبکه است صبر کنید..." +#~ msgstr "لطفا در مدت زمانی که روند سیستم در حال کاوش کارت شبکه است صبر کنید..." #~ msgid "Reading Repositories Used on the System" #~ msgstr "خواندن مخازنی که در سیستم استفاده شده است" @@ -2779,14 +2689,11 @@ #~ msgstr "باز &سازی سیستم های نصب شده" #~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Select <b>Repair Installed System</b> if you have a damaged Linux " -#~ "system on\n" +#~ "<p>Select <b>Repair Installed System</b> if you have a damaged Linux system on\n" #~ "your hard disk. This option can try to fix problems automatically.\n" #~ "</p>" #~ msgstr "" -#~ "<p> اگر به روی سیستم شما یک سیستم لینوکس وجود دارد که صدمه دیده است گزینه " -#~ "ی <b> باز سازی سیستم نصب شده</b> را انتخاب کنید. این گزینه شما را قادر می " -#~ "سازد که مشکلات سیستم خود را به \n" +#~ "<p> اگر به روی سیستم شما یک سیستم لینوکس وجود دارد که صدمه دیده است گزینه ی <b> باز سازی سیستم نصب شده</b> را انتخاب کنید. این گزینه شما را قادر می سازد که مشکلات سیستم خود را به \n" #~ "خود کار به روز رسانی کنید.\n" #~ "</p>" @@ -2794,10 +2701,8 @@ #~ "The selected language cannot be used in text mode. English is used for\n" #~ "installation, but the selected language will be used for the new system." #~ msgstr "" -#~ "زبانی را که انخاب کرده اید در حالت متنی نمی تواند مورد استفاده قرار گیرد. " -#~ "گر چه برای روند نصب\n" -#~ "از زبان انگلیسی استفاده خواهد شد اما، زبانی را که انتخاب کرده اید در " -#~ "سیستم جدید مورد استفاده قرار \n" +#~ "زبانی را که انخاب کرده اید در حالت متنی نمی تواند مورد استفاده قرار گیرد. گر چه برای روند نصب\n" +#~ "از زبان انگلیسی استفاده خواهد شد اما، زبانی را که انتخاب کرده اید در سیستم جدید مورد استفاده قرار \n" #~ "خواهد گرفت." #~ msgid "English" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/instserver.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/instserver.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/instserver.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:36+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/iplb.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/iplb.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/iplb.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -94,11 +94,11 @@ #. ids of widget of global dialog #: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:61 msgid "yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "بلی" #: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:61 msgid "no" -msgstr "" +msgstr "خیر" #: src/include/iplb/global_conf.rb:68 src/include/iplb/vserver_conf.rb:226 msgid "&Global Configuration" @@ -177,151 +177,88 @@ "</p><p>Default: 10 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>check timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the " -"timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. " -"negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-" -"virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 5 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>failure count</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by " -"a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 " -"will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A " -"successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 1\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>negotiate timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" "</p><p>Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout " -"is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 30 seconds\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|" -"sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" -"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers " -"are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" +"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>log file</big> = \"</b><i>/path/to/logfile</i><b>\"</b>|" -"syslog_facility\n" -"</p><p>An alternative logfile might be specified with this directive. If the " -"logfile does not have a leading '/', it is assumed to be a <b><a href=\"/" -"man/3/syslog\">syslog</a></b>(3) facility name.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>log file</big> = \"</b><i>/path/to/logfile</i><b>\"</b>|syslog_facility\n" +"</p><p>An alternative logfile might be specified with this directive. If the logfile does not have a leading '/', it is assumed to be a <b><a href=\"/man/3/syslog\">syslog</a></b>(3) facility name.\n" "</p><p>Default: log directly to the file <i>/var/log/ldirectord.log</i>.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert</big> = \"</b><i>emailaddress</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection " -"status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option " -"requires perl\n" -"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using " -"any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on " -"methods.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert freq</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real " -"server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero " -"seconds will\n" -"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is " -"dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval " -"configuration\n" +"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" "option.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 0\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting</" -"b>|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" -"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be " -"sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" -"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If " -"<b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise " -"options are ORed\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting</b>|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" +"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" +"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If <b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" "with each other.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: all\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>callback</big> = \"</b><i>/path/to/callback</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>If this directive is defined, <b>ldirectord</b> automatically calls " -"the executable <i>/path/to/callback</i> after the configuration file has " -"changed on\n" -"disk. This is useful to update the configuration file through <b>scp</b> on " -"the other heartbeated host. The first argument to the callback is the name " -"of the\n" +"</p><p>If this directive is defined, <b>ldirectord</b> automatically calls the executable <i>/path/to/callback</i> after the configuration file has changed on\n" +"disk. This is useful to update the configuration file through <b>scp</b> on the other heartbeated host. The first argument to the callback is the name of the\n" "configuration.\n" -"</p><p>This directive might also be used to restart <b>ldirectord</b> " -"automatically after the configuration file changed on disk. However, if " -"<b>autoreload</b> is\n" +"</p><p>This directive might also be used to restart <b>ldirectord</b> automatically after the configuration file changed on disk. However, if <b>autoreload</b> is\n" "set to yes, the configuration is reloaded anyway.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>execute</big> = \"</b><i>configuration</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>Use this directive to start an instance of ldirectord for the named " -"<i>configuration</i>.\n" +"</p><p>Use this directive to start an instance of ldirectord for the named <i>configuration</i>.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>auto reload</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>Defines if <ldirectord> should continuously check the " -"configuration file for modification. If this is set to 'yes' and the " -"configuration file changed\n" -"on disk and its modification time (mtime) is newer than the previous " -"version, the configuration is automatically reloaded.\n" +"</p><p>Defines if <ldirectord> should continuously check the configuration file for modification. If this is set to 'yes' and the configuration file changed\n" +"on disk and its modification time (mtime) is newer than the previous version, the configuration is automatically reloaded.\n" "</p><p>Default: no\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>quiescent</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to " -"be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> " -"table.\n" -"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will " -"be accepted.\n" -"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent " -"connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be " -"routed to the\n" -"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more " -"information on persistant connections.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" "</p><p>This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" "</p><p>echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" -"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel " -"doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the " -"kernel is too\n" -"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS</" -"small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" -"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from " -"the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS</small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>yes</i>\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>fork</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord will spawn a child proccess for every " -"virtual server, and run checks against the real servers from them. This will " -"increase\n" -"response times to changes in real server status in configurations with many " -"virtual servers. This may also use less memory then running many seperate " -"instances\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord will spawn a child proccess for every virtual server, and run checks against the real servers from them. This will increase\n" +"response times to changes in real server status in configurations with many virtual servers. This may also use less memory then running many seperate instances\n" "of ldirectord. Child processes will be automaticly restarted if they die.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>no</i>\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>supervised</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord does not go into background mode. All " -"log-messages are redirected to stdout instead of a logfile. This is useful " -"to run\n" -"<b>ldirectord</b> supervised from daemontools. See <a href=\"http://" -"untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/\">http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/</" -"a> or <a href=\"http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html\">http://cr.yp.to/" -"daemontools.html</a> for details.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord does not go into background mode. All log-messages are redirected to stdout instead of a logfile. This is useful to run\n" +"<b>ldirectord</b> supervised from daemontools. See <a href=\"http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/\">http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/</a> or <a href=\"http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html\">http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html</a> for details.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>no</i>\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -329,87 +266,42 @@ #: src/include/iplb/helps.rb:127 msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b><big>virtual server</big> =</b> <i>(ip_address|hostname:portnumber|" -"servicename)|firewall-mark</i>\n" -"</p><p>Defines a virtual service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or " -"servicename) or firewall-mark. A firewall-mark is an integer greater than " -"zero. The\n" -"configuration of marking packets is controled using the <tt>\"-m\"</tt> " -"option to <b>ipchains</b>(8). All real services and flags for a virtual " -"service\n" +"<p><b><big>virtual server</big> =</b> <i>(ip_address|hostname:portnumber|servicename)|firewall-mark</i>\n" +"</p><p>Defines a virtual service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename) or firewall-mark. A firewall-mark is an integer greater than zero. The\n" +"configuration of marking packets is controled using the <tt>\"-m\"</tt> option to <b>ipchains</b>(8). All real services and flags for a virtual service\n" "must follow this line immediately and be indented.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>real servers</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[->" -"ip_address|hostname][:portnumber|servicename</i>]\n" -"<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b> [<i>weight</i>] [<b>\"</b><i>request</" -"i><b>\", \"</b><i>receive</i><b>\"</b>]\n" -"</p><p>Defines a real service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or " -"servicename). If the port is omitted then a 0 will be used, this is intended " -"primarily for\n" -"fwmark services where the port for real servers is ignored. Optionally a " -"range of <small>IP</small> addresses (or two hostnames) may be given, in " -"which case\n" -"each <small>IP</small> address in the range will be treated as a real server " -"using the given port. The second argument defines the forwarding method, " -"must be\n" -"<b>gate</b>, <b>ipip</b> or <b>masq</b>. The thrid argument is optional and " -"defines the weight for that real server. If omitted then a weight of 1 will " -"be\n" -"used. The last two arguments are also optional. They define a request-" -"receive pair to be used to check if a server is alive. They override the " -"request-receive\n" -"pair in the virtual server section. These two strings must be quoted. If the " -"request string starts with http://... the IP-address and port of the real\n" -"server is overridden, otherwise the IP-address and port of the real server " -"is used.\n" -"</p><p>For <small>TCP</small> and <small>UDP</small> (non fwmark) virtual " -"services, unless the forwarding method is masq and the <small>IP</small> " -"address of a\n" -"real server is non-local (not present on a interface on the host running " -"ldirectord) then the port of the real server will be set to that of its " -"virtual\n" -"service. That is, port-mapping is only available to if the real server is " -"another machine and the forwarding method is masq. This is due to the way " -"that the\n" +"</p><p><b><big>real servers</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[->ip_address|hostname][:portnumber|servicename</i>]\n" +"<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b> [<i>weight</i>] [<b>\"</b><i>request</i><b>\", \"</b><i>receive</i><b>\"</b>]\n" +"</p><p>Defines a real service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename). If the port is omitted then a 0 will be used, this is intended primarily for\n" +"fwmark services where the port for real servers is ignored. Optionally a range of <small>IP</small> addresses (or two hostnames) may be given, in which case\n" +"each <small>IP</small> address in the range will be treated as a real server using the given port. The second argument defines the forwarding method, must be\n" +"<b>gate</b>, <b>ipip</b> or <b>masq</b>. The thrid argument is optional and defines the weight for that real server. If omitted then a weight of 1 will be\n" +"used. The last two arguments are also optional. They define a request-receive pair to be used to check if a server is alive. They override the request-receive\n" +"pair in the virtual server section. These two strings must be quoted. If the request string starts with http://... the IP-address and port of the real\n" +"server is overridden, otherwise the IP-address and port of the real server is used.\n" +"</p><p>For <small>TCP</small> and <small>UDP</small> (non fwmark) virtual services, unless the forwarding method is masq and the <small>IP</small> address of a\n" +"real server is non-local (not present on a interface on the host running ldirectord) then the port of the real server will be set to that of its virtual\n" +"service. That is, port-mapping is only available to if the real server is another machine and the forwarding method is masq. This is due to the way that the\n" "underlying <small>LVS</small> code in the kernel functions.\n" -"</p><p>More than one of these entries may be inside a virtual section. The " -"checktimeout, negotiatetimeout, failurecount, fallback, emailalert, " -"emailalertfreq and\n" -"quiescent options listed above may also appear inside a virtual section, in " -"which case the global setting is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>More than one of these entries may be inside a virtual section. The checktimeout, negotiatetimeout, failurecount, fallback, emailalert, emailalertfreq and\n" +"quiescent options listed above may also appear inside a virtual section, in which case the global setting is overridden.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>check type</big> = connect</b>|<b>external</b>|<b>negotiate</" -"b>|<b>off</b>|<b>on</b>|<b>ping</b>|<b>checktimeout</b><i>N</i>\n" -"</p><p>Type of check to perform. Negotiate sends a request and matches a " -"receive string. Connect only attemts to make a <small>TCP/IP</small> " -"connection, thus the\n" -"request and receive strings may be omitted. If checktype is a number then " -"negotiate and connect is combined so that after each N connect attempts one " -"negotiate\n" -"attempt is performed. This is useful to check often if a service answers and " -"in much longer intervalls a negotiating check is done. Ping means that\n" -"<small>ICMP</small> ping will be used to test the availability of real " -"servers. Ping is also used as the connect check for <small>UDP</small> " -"services. Off\n" -"means no checking will take place and no real or fallback servers will be " -"activated. On means no checking will take place and real servers will always " -"be\n" +"</p><p><b><big>check type</big> = connect</b>|<b>external</b>|<b>negotiate</b>|<b>off</b>|<b>on</b>|<b>ping</b>|<b>checktimeout</b><i>N</i>\n" +"</p><p>Type of check to perform. Negotiate sends a request and matches a receive string. Connect only attemts to make a <small>TCP/IP</small> connection, thus the\n" +"request and receive strings may be omitted. If checktype is a number then negotiate and connect is combined so that after each N connect attempts one negotiate\n" +"attempt is performed. This is useful to check often if a service answers and in much longer intervalls a negotiating check is done. Ping means that\n" +"<small>ICMP</small> ping will be used to test the availability of real servers. Ping is also used as the connect check for <small>UDP</small> services. Off\n" +"means no checking will take place and no real or fallback servers will be activated. On means no checking will take place and real servers will always be\n" "activated. Default is <i>negotiate</i>.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>service</big> = dns</b>|<b>ftp</b>|<b>http</b>|<b>https</b>|" -"<b>imap</b>|<b>imaps</b>|<b>ldap</b>|<b>mysql</b>|<b>nntp</b>|<b>none</b>|" -"<b>oracle</b>|<b>pgsql</b>|<b>pop</b>|<b>pops</b>|<b>radius</b>|" -"<b>simpletcp</b>|<b>sip</b>|<b>smtp</b>\n" -"</p><p>The type of service to monitor when using checktype=negotiate. None " -"denotes a service that will not be monitored.\n" -"</p><p>simpletcp sends the <b>request</b> string to the server and tests it " -"against the <b>receive</b> regexp. The other types of checks connect to the " -"server\n" -"using the specified protocol. Please see the <b>request</b> and <b>receive</" -"b> sections for protocol specific information.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>service</big> = dns</b>|<b>ftp</b>|<b>http</b>|<b>https</b>|<b>imap</b>|<b>imaps</b>|<b>ldap</b>|<b>mysql</b>|<b>nntp</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>oracle</b>|<b>pgsql</b>|<b>pop</b>|<b>pops</b>|<b>radius</b>|<b>simpletcp</b>|<b>sip</b>|<b>smtp</b>\n" +"</p><p>The type of service to monitor when using checktype=negotiate. None denotes a service that will not be monitored.\n" +"</p><p>simpletcp sends the <b>request</b> string to the server and tests it against the <b>receive</b> regexp. The other types of checks connect to the server\n" +"using the specified protocol. Please see the <b>request</b> and <b>receive</b> sections for protocol specific information.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" "</p><dl compact=\"compact\">\n" "<dt>* Virtual server port is 21: ftp\n" @@ -432,9 +324,7 @@ "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><b><big>check command</big> = \"</b><i>path to script</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"<p>This setting is used if checktype is external and is the command to be " -"run to check the status of a real server. It should exit with status 0 if " -"everything\n" +"<p>This setting is used if checktype is external and is the command to be run to check the status of a real server. It should exit with status 0 if everything\n" "is ok, or non-zero otherwise.\n" "</p><p>Four parameters are passed to the script:\n" "</p></dt><dt>* virtual server ip/firewall mark\n" @@ -445,105 +335,68 @@ "\n" "\n" "<p><b><big>check port</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Number of port to monitor. Sometimes check port differs from service " -"port.\n" +"</p><p>Number of port to monitor. Sometimes check port differs from service port.\n" "</p><p>Default: port specified for each real server\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>request</big> = \"</b><i>uri to requested object</i><b>\"</" -"b>\n" -"</p><p>This object will be requested each checkinterval seconds on each real " -"server. The string must be inside quotes. Note that this string may be " -"overridden by\n" +"</p><p><b><big>request</big> = \"</b><i>uri to requested object</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>This object will be requested each checkinterval seconds on each real server. The string must be inside quotes. Note that this string may be overridden by\n" "an optional per real-server based request-string.\n" -"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should the name of an A record, " -"or the address of a <small>PTR</small> record to look up.\n" -"</p><p>For a MySQL, Oracle or PostgeSQL check, this should be an <small>SQL</" -"small> query. The data returned is not checked, only that the answer is one " -"or more\n" +"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should the name of an A record, or the address of a <small>PTR</small> record to look up.\n" +"</p><p>For a MySQL, Oracle or PostgeSQL check, this should be an <small>SQL</small> query. The data returned is not checked, only that the answer is one or more\n" "rows. This is a required setting.\n" -"</p><p>For a simpletcp check, this string is sent verbatim except any " -"occurances of \n" +"</p><p>For a simpletcp check, this string is sent verbatim except any occurances of \n" " are replaced with a new line character.\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>receive</big> = \"</b><i>regexp to compare</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>If the requested result contains this <i>regexp to compare</i>, the " -"real server is declared alive. The regexp must be inside quotes. Keep in " -"mind that\n" -"regexps are not plain strings and that you need to escape the special " -"characters if they should as literals. Note that this regexp may be " -"overridden by an\n" +"</p><p>If the requested result contains this <i>regexp to compare</i>, the real server is declared alive. The regexp must be inside quotes. Keep in mind that\n" +"regexps are not plain strings and that you need to escape the special characters if they should as literals. Note that this regexp may be overridden by an\n" "optional per real-server based receive regexp.\n" -"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should be any one the A record's " -"addresses or any one of the <small>PTR</small> record's names.\n" +"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should be any one the A record's addresses or any one of the <small>PTR</small> record's names.\n" "</p><p>For a MySQL check, the receive setting is not used.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>http method</big> = <small>GET</small></b> | <b><small>HEAD</" -"small></b>\n" -"</p><p>Sets the <small>HTTP</small> method which should be used to fetch the " -"<small>URI</small> specified in the request-string. <small>GET</small> is " -"the\n" -"method used by default if the parameter is not set. If <small>HEAD</small> " -"is used, the receive-string should be unset.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>http method</big> = <small>GET</small></b> | <b><small>HEAD</small></b>\n" +"</p><p>Sets the <small>HTTP</small> method which should be used to fetch the <small>URI</small> specified in the request-string. <small>GET</small> is the\n" +"method used by default if the parameter is not set. If <small>HEAD</small> is used, the receive-string should be unset.\n" "</p><p>Default: <small>GET</small>\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>virtual host</big> = \"</b><i>hostname</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>Used when using a negotiate check with <small>HTTP</small> or " -"<small>HTTPS</small> . Sets the host header used in the <small>HTTP</small> " -"request. In the\n" -"case of <small>HTTPS</small> this generally needs to match the common name " -"of the <small>SSL</small> certificate. If not set then the host header will " -"be\n" -"derived from the request url for the real server if present. As a last " -"resort the <small>IP</small> address of the real server will be used.\n" +"</p><p>Used when using a negotiate check with <small>HTTP</small> or <small>HTTPS</small> . Sets the host header used in the <small>HTTP</small> request. In the\n" +"case of <small>HTTPS</small> this generally needs to match the common name of the <small>SSL</small> certificate. If not set then the host header will be\n" +"derived from the request url for the real server if present. As a last resort the <small>IP</small> address of the real server will be used.\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>login</big> = \"</b><i>username</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>For <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , <small>LDAP</small> , " -"MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> and PostgreSQL, the username used to log " -"in.\n" +"</p><p>For <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> and PostgreSQL, the username used to log in.\n" "</p><p>For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Name.\n" -"</p><p>For <small>SIP</small> , the username is used as both the to and from " -"address for an <small>OPTIONS</small> query.\n" +"</p><p>For <small>SIP</small> , the username is used as both the to and from address for an <small>OPTIONS</small> query.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" "</p></dt><dt>* <small>FTP:</small> Anonymous\n" -"</dt><dt>* MySQL Oracle, and PostgreSQL: Must be specified in the " -"configuration\n" -"</dt><dt>* <small>SIP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, hostname is " -"derived as per the passwd option below.\n" -"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string, which denotes that case authentication " -"will not be attempted.\n" +"</dt><dt>* MySQL Oracle, and PostgreSQL: Must be specified in the configuration\n" +"</dt><dt>* <small>SIP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, hostname is derived as per the passwd option below.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string, which denotes that case authentication will not be attempted.\n" "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><b><big>password</big> = \"</b><i>password</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"<p>Password to use to login to <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , " -"<small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> , PostgreSQL and\n" +"<p>Password to use to login to <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> , PostgreSQL and\n" "<small>SIP</small> servers.\n" "</p><p>For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Password.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" -"</p></dt><dt>* <small>FTP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, where " -"hostname is the environment variable <small>HOSTNAME</small> evaluated at " -"run time, or sourced\n" +"</p></dt><dt>* <small>FTP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, where hostname is the environment variable <small>HOSTNAME</small> evaluated at run time, or sourced\n" "from uname if unset.\n" -"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string. In the case of <small>LDAP</small> , " -"MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL this means that authentication will not be " -"performed.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string. In the case of <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL this means that authentication will not be performed.\n" "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><b><big>database name</big> = \"</b><i>databasename</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"<p>Database to use for MySQL, Oracle and PostgreSQL servers, this is the " -"database that the query (set by <b>receive</b> above) will be performed " -"against. This\n" +"<p>Database to use for MySQL, Oracle and PostgreSQL servers, this is the database that the query (set by <b>receive</b> above) will be performed against. This\n" "is a required setting.\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>radius secret</big> = \"</b><i>radiussecret</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>Secret to use for Radius servers, this is the secret used to perform " -"an Access-Request with the username (set by <b>login</b> above) and passwd " -"(set by\n" +"</p><p>Secret to use for Radius servers, this is the secret used to perform an Access-Request with the username (set by <b>login</b> above) and passwd (set by\n" "<b>passwd</b> above).\n" "</p><p>Default: empty string\n" "\n" @@ -557,120 +410,73 @@ "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>scheduler</big> =</b> <i>scheduler_name</i>\n" -"</p><p>Scheduler to be used by <small>LVS</small> for loadbalancing. For an " -"information on the available sehedulers please see the <b><a href=\"ipvsadm" -"\">ipvsadm</a></b>(8) man page.\n" +"</p><p>Scheduler to be used by <small>LVS</small> for loadbalancing. For an information on the available sehedulers please see the <b><a href=\"ipvsadm\">ipvsadm</a></b>(8) man page.\n" "</p><p>Default: \"wrr\"\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>protocol</big> = tcp</b>|<b>udp</b>|<b>fwm</b>\n" -"</p><p>Protocol to be used. If the virtual is specified as an <small>IP</" -"small> address and port then it must be one of tcp or udp. If a firewall " -"mark then the\n" +"</p><p>Protocol to be used. If the virtual is specified as an <small>IP</small> address and port then it must be one of tcp or udp. If a firewall mark then the\n" "protocol must be fwm.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" -"</p></dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the " -"port is not 53: tcp\n" -"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the port is " -"53: udp\n" +"</p></dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the port is not 53: tcp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the port is 53: udp\n" "</dt><dt>* Virtual is a firewall mark: fwm\n" "</dt></dl>\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>check timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the " -"timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. " -"negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-" -"virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 5 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>negotiate timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" "</p><p>Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout " -"is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 30 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>failure count</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by " -"a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 " -"will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A " -"successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 1\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert</big> = \"</b><i>emailaddress</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection " -"status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option " -"requires perl\n" -"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using " -"any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on " -"methods.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert freq</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real " -"server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero " -"seconds will\n" -"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is " -"dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval " -"configuration\n" +"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" "option.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 0\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting</" -"b>|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" -"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be " -"sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" -"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If " -"<b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise " -"options are ORed\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting</b>|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" +"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" +"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If <b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" "with each other.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: all\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|" -"sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" -"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers " -"are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" +"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>quiescent</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to " -"be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> " -"table.\n" -"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will " -"be accepted.\n" -"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent " -"connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be " -"routed to the\n" -"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more " -"information on persistant connections.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" "</p><p>This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" "</p><p>echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" -"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel " -"doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the " -"kernel is too\n" -"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS</" -"small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" -"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from " -"the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS</small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>yes</i>\n" "\n" "\n" @@ -824,7 +630,7 @@ #. Initialization dialog contents #: src/include/iplb/wizards.rb:142 msgid "Initializing..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "در حال مقدار دهی اولیه..." #. Read all iplb settings #. @return true on success @@ -851,7 +657,7 @@ #: src/modules/Iplb.rb:225 src/modules/Iplb.rb:330 msgid "Finished" -msgstr "" +msgstr "پایان" #. Write all iplb settings #. @return true on success Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-client.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -303,8 +303,7 @@ #. table of connected targets #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:90 msgid "" -"List of current sessions. To add a new target, select it and press <b>Add</" -"b>.\n" +"List of current sessions. To add a new target, select it and press <b>Add</b>.\n" "To remove it, press <b>Log Out</b>.\n" "To change the start-up status, press <b>Toggle</b>.\n" msgstr "" @@ -316,46 +315,34 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:97 src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:115 -msgid "" -"<p>When accessing an iSCSI device <b>READ</b>/<b>WRITE</b>, make sure that " -"this access is exclusive. Otherwise there is a potential risk of data " -"corruption.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>When accessing an iSCSI device <b>READ</b>/<b>WRITE</b>, make sure that this access is exclusive. Otherwise there is a potential risk of data corruption.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:100 msgid "" -"<p><b>InitiatorName</b> is a value from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi</" -"tt>. \n" -"In case you have iBFT, this value will be added from there and you are only " -"able to change it in the BIOS setup.</p>" +"<p><b>InitiatorName</b> is a value from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi</tt>. \n" +"In case you have iBFT, this value will be added from there and you are only able to change it in the BIOS setup.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:103 msgid "" -"If you want to use <b>iSNS</b> (Internet Storage Name Service) for " -"discovering targets instead of the default SendTargets method,\n" -"fill in the IP address of the iSNS server and port. The default port should " -"be 3205.\n" +"If you want to use <b>iSNS</b> (Internet Storage Name Service) for discovering targets instead of the default SendTargets method,\n" +"fill in the IP address of the iSNS server and port. The default port should be 3205.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:108 msgid "" "Enter the <b>IP Address</b> of the discovered server.\n" -"Only change <b>Port</b> if needed. For authentication, use <b>Username</b> " -"and <b>Password</b>. If you do not need authentication,\n" +"Only change <b>Port</b> if needed. For authentication, use <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b>. If you do not need authentication,\n" "select <b>No Authentication</b>.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:122 -msgid "" -"List of nodes offered by the iSCSI target. Select one item and click " -"<b>Connect</b>. " +msgid "List of nodes offered by the iSCSI target. Select one item and click <b>Connect</b>. " msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:129 -msgid "" -"Select the type of authentication and enter the <b>Username</b> and " -"<b>Password</b>." +msgid "Select the type of authentication and enter the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b>." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:132 @@ -366,19 +353,15 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>manual</b> is for iSCSI targets which are not to be connected by\n" "default, the user needs to connect them manually</p>\n" -"<p><b>onboot</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected during boot, i.e. " -"when\n" +"<p><b>onboot</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected during boot, i.e. when\n" "root is on iSCSI. As such it will be evaluated by the initrd.</p>\n" -"<p><b>automatic</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected when the iSCSI " -"service\n" +"<p><b>automatic</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected when the iSCSI service\n" "starts up.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. list of discovered targets #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:142 -msgid "" -"List of discovered targets. Start a new <b>Discovery</b> or <b>Connect</b> " -"to any target." +msgid "List of discovered targets. Start a new <b>Discovery</b> or <b>Connect</b> to any target." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:145 @@ -444,12 +427,12 @@ msgstr "" #. brackets needed around IPv6 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:626 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:625 msgid "Insert the IP address." msgstr "" #. validate port number -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:632 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:631 msgid "Insert the port." msgstr "" @@ -457,38 +440,36 @@ #. ******************* target table ************************* #. initialize dialog for all targets from portal (connected/disconnected) #. enable/disable connect button according target is or not already connected -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:734 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:839 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:867 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:733 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:838 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:866 msgid "True" msgstr "" -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:734 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:839 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:733 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:838 msgid "False" msgstr "" #. check if not already connected #. check if not already connected -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:772 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:892 -msgid "" -"The target with this TargetName is already connected. Make sure that " -"multipathing is enabled to prevent data corruption." +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:771 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:891 +msgid "The target with this TargetName is already connected. Make sure that multipathing is enabled to prevent data corruption." msgstr "" -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:775 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:895 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:774 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:894 msgid "Continue" msgstr "" -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:776 -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:896 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:775 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:895 msgid "Cancel" msgstr "" #. check if is not already connected -#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:886 +#: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:885 msgid "The target is already connected." msgstr "" @@ -505,9 +486,7 @@ #. don't check interactively for packages (bnc#367300) #. skip it during second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:96 -msgid "" -"<p>To configure the iSCSI initiator, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>To configure the iSCSI initiator, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:99 @@ -584,7 +563,7 @@ msgstr "" #. } -#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:679 +#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:694 msgid "" "InitiatorName from iBFT and from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi</tt>\n" "differ. The old initiator name will be replaced by the value of iBFT and a \n" @@ -593,6 +572,6 @@ msgstr "" #. do discovery first -#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:1132 +#: src/modules/IscsiClientLib.rb:1147 msgid "Configuration summary..." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-lio-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-lio-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-lio-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/iscsi-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-27 15:58+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/isns.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/isns.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/isns.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -281,82 +281,82 @@ msgstr "در حال مقدار دهی اولیه..." #. test if required package ("open-isns") is installed -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:106 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:172 msgid "<p>To configure the isns service, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:109 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:175 msgid "<p>Install it now?</p>" msgstr "" #. IsnsServer read dialog caption -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:486 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:569 msgid "Initializing isns daemon configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 1/3 -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:502 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:585 msgid "Read the database" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 2/3 -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:504 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:587 msgid "Read the previous settings" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 3/3 -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:506 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:589 msgid "Detect the devices" msgstr "" #. Progress step 1/3 -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:510 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:593 msgid "Reading the database..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 2/3 -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:512 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:595 msgid "Reading the previous settings..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 3/3 -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:514 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:597 msgid "Detecting the devices..." msgstr "" #. Progress finished #. Progress finished -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:516 src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:594 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:599 src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:677 #, fuzzy msgid "Finished" msgstr "فنلاندی" #. IsnsServer write dialog caption -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:568 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:651 msgid "Saving isns Configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 1/2 -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:584 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:667 msgid "Write the settings" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 2/2 -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:586 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:669 msgid "Run SuSEconfig" msgstr "" #. Progress step 1/2 -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:590 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:673 msgid "Writing the settings..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 2/2 -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:592 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:675 msgid "Running SuSEconfig..." msgstr "" #. write configuration (/etc/isns.conf) -#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:606 +#: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:689 msgid "Cannot write settings." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/kdump.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/kdump.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/kdump.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -48,23 +48,17 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:116 -msgid "" -"The naming scheme is:/boot/vmlinu[zx]-<kernel_string>[.gz] Please enter only " -"\"kernel_string\"." +msgid "The naming scheme is:/boot/vmlinu[zx]-<kernel_string>[.gz] Please enter only \"kernel_string\"." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:127 -msgid "" -"The kdump commandline is the command line that needs to be passed off to the " -"kdump kernel." +msgid "The kdump commandline is the command line that needs to be passed off to the kdump kernel." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:138 -msgid "" -"Set this variable if you only want to _append_ values to the default command " -"line string." +msgid "Set this variable if you only want to _append_ values to the default command line string." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -94,9 +88,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:189 -msgid "" -"SMTP password for sending notification messages. Path of file which includes " -"password (plain text file)." +msgid "SMTP password for sending notification messages. Path of file which includes password (plain text file)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -141,9 +133,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:254 -msgid "" -"Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, " -"nfs, cifs" +msgid "Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, nfs, cifs" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -183,9 +173,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:302 -msgid "" -"The naming scheme is: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-<kernel_string>[.gz] kernel means " -"only \"kernel_string\"." +msgid "The naming scheme is: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-<kernel_string>[.gz] kernel means only \"kernel_string\"." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -195,9 +183,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:316 -msgid "" -"Option means runlevel to boot the kdump kernel. Only values such as 1,2,3,5 " -"or s are allowed" +msgid "Option means runlevel to boot the kdump kernel. Only values such as 1,2,3,5 or s are allowed" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -325,11 +311,11 @@ #: src/clients/kdump.rb:651 src/clients/kdump.rb:1258 msgid "Enabled" -msgstr "" +msgstr "فعال" #: src/clients/kdump.rb:652 src/clients/kdump.rb:1259 msgid "Disabled" -msgstr "" +msgstr "غیر فعال" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text #: src/clients/kdump.rb:661 @@ -422,8 +408,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:809 -msgid "" -"Option can include only \"none\", \"ELF\", \"compressed\" or \"lzo\" value." +msgid "Option can include only \"none\", \"ELF\", \"compressed\" or \"lzo\" value." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message @@ -738,8 +723,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:36 msgid "" "<p><b>Enable/Disable Kdump</b><br>\n" -" Enable or disable kdump. The boot option crashkernel parameter is added/" -"removed. \n" +" Enable or disable kdump. The boot option crashkernel parameter is added/removed. \n" " To apply changes, a reboot is necessary.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -755,12 +739,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:46 msgid "" "<p><b>Firmware-Assisted Dump</b><br>\n" -" Dumps are not generated before the partition is reinitialized but take " -"place when the partition is restarting. When performing a firmware-" -"assisted dump, system memory is frozen and the partition rebooted, which " -"allows a new instance of the operating system to dump data from the " -"previous kernel crash. This feature is suitable only when the system has " -"more than 1.5 GB of memory.</p>" +" Dumps are not generated before the partition is reinitialized but take place when the partition is restarting. When performing a firmware-assisted dump, system memory is frozen and the partition rebooted, which allows a new instance of the operating system to dump data from the previous kernel crash. This feature is suitable only when the system has more than 1.5 GB of memory.</p>" msgstr "" #. Kdump Memor&y [MB] - IntField 1/1 @@ -778,10 +757,8 @@ "<p><b>Dump Format</b><br>\n" " <i>No Dump</i> - Only save the kernel log.<br>\n" " <i>ELF Format</i> - Create dump file in the ELF format.<br>\n" -" <i>Compressed Format</i> - Compress dump data by each page with gzip." -"<br>\n" -" <i>LZO Compressed Format</i> - Slightly bigger files but much faster." -"<br>\n" +" <i>Compressed Format</i> - Compress dump data by each page with gzip.<br>\n" +" <i>LZO Compressed Format</i> - Slightly bigger files but much faster.<br>\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -789,8 +766,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:72 msgid "" "<p><b>Saving Target for Kdump Image</b><br>\n" -" The target for saving kdump images. Select type of target for saving " -"dumps.<br></p>" +" The target for saving kdump images. Select type of target for saving dumps.<br></p>" msgstr "" #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 2/6 @@ -798,8 +774,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Local Filestem</b> - Save kdump image in the local filesystem.\n" " <i>Directory for Saving Dumps</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" -" Selecting directory for saving kdump images via dialog by pressing " -"<i>Browse</i>\n" +" Selecting directory for saving kdump images via dialog by pressing <i>Browse</i>\n" " <br></p>" msgstr "" @@ -811,8 +786,7 @@ " <i>Port</i> - The port number for connection.\n" " <i>Directory on Server</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" " <i>Enable Anonymous FTP</i> enables anonymous connection to server.\n" -" <i>User Name</i> for ftp connection. <i>Password</i> for ftp connection." -"<br></p>" +" <i>User Name</i> for ftp connection. <i>Password</i> for ftp connection.<br></p>" msgstr "" #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 4/6 @@ -881,8 +855,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Enable Delete Old Dump Images</b> - \n" " Enable Delete Old Dump Images. If the number of dump files in \n" -" <i>Number of Old Dumps</i> exceeds this number, older dumps are removed." -"<br></p>" +" <i>Number of Old Dumps</i> exceeds this number, older dumps are removed.<br></p>" msgstr "" #. Enable Copy Ke&rnel into the Dump Directory - CheckBox 1/1 @@ -897,48 +870,39 @@ #. SMTP Server #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:151 -msgid "" -"<p><b>SMTP Server</b> used for sending a notification email after a dump.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>SMTP Server</b> used for sending a notification email after a dump.</p>" msgstr "" #. SMTP User Name #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:155 msgid "" "<p><b>User Name</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is\n" -" set. This is optional. If you do not specifiy a username and password, " -"plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" +" set. This is optional. If you do not specifiy a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. SMTP Password #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:159 msgid "" -"<p><b>Password</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is set. " -"This\n" -" is optional. If you do not specify a username and password, plain SMTP " -"will be used.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Password</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is set. This\n" +" is optional. If you do not specify a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Notification To (email addresses) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:163 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Notification To</b> Specify the email address to which a notification " -"email will be sent when a dump has been saved.</p>\n" +msgid "<p><b>Notification To</b> Specify the email address to which a notification email will be sent when a dump has been saved.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Notification CC (email addresses) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:167 msgid "" -"<p><b>Notification CC</b> Specify a list of space-separated email addresses " -"to\n" -" which a notification email will be sent via cc if a dump has been saved.</" -"p>\n" +"<p><b>Notification CC</b> Specify a list of space-separated email addresses to\n" +" which a notification email will be sent via cc if a dump has been saved.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Number of Old Dumps (number) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"<p><b>Number of Old Dumps</b> specifies how many old dumps are kept. If the " -"number of dump files \n" +"<p><b>Number of Old Dumps</b> specifies how many old dumps are kept. If the number of dump files \n" "exceeds this number, older dumps are removed.</p>" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/kerberos-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/kerberos-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/kerberos-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/kerberos.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/kerberos.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/kerberos.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/languages_db.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/languages_db.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/languages_db.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:32+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap-client.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/ldap.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -231,46 +231,46 @@ msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:437 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:439 msgid "" "The value '%1' already exists.\n" "Please select another one." msgstr "" #. description of configuration object -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:465 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:467 msgid "Configuration of user management tools" msgstr "" #. description of configuration object -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:469 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:471 msgid "Configuration of group management tools" msgstr "" #. label -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:474 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:476 msgid "Object Class of New Module" msgstr "" #. textentry label, do not translate "cn" -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:502 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:504 msgid "&Name of New Module (\"cn\" Value)" msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:528 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:530 msgid "" "The entered value already exists.\n" "Select another one.\n" msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:534 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:536 msgid "Enter the module name." msgstr "" #. help text 1/3 -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:553 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:555 msgid "" "<p>Here, set the values of attributes belonging\n" "to an object using the current template. Such values are used as defaults when\n" @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ #. entry of the current template.</p> #. ") + #. help text 3/3 do not translate "homedirectory" -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:565 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:567 msgid "" "<p>You can use special syntax to create attribute\n" "values from existing ones. The expression <i>%attr_name</i> will be replaced\n" @@ -292,12 +292,12 @@ msgstr "" #. combobox label -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:588 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:590 msgid "Attribute &Name" msgstr "" #. textentry label -#: src/LdapPopup.rb:594 +#: src/LdapPopup.rb:596 msgid "Attribute &Value" msgstr "" @@ -379,4 +379,4 @@ #. table header 2/2 #: src/ldap_browser.rb:693 msgid "Value" -msgstr "" +msgstr "مقدار" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/live-installer.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/live-installer.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/live-installer.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/lxc.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/lxc.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/lxc.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/mail.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/mail.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/mail.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/multipath.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/multipath.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/multipath.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:40+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/ncurses-pkg.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/ncurses-pkg.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/ncurses-pkg.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/ncurses.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/ncurses.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/ncurses.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-03-02 21:48+0330\n" "Last-Translator: مصطفی برمشوری <mostafa.barmshor@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Farsi (Persian) <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/network.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/network.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/network.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-18 11:54+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -94,133 +94,129 @@ msgstr "خطا در نصب" #. progress step title -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_finish.rb:67 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_finish.rb:63 msgid "Writing Firewall Configuration..." msgstr "" -#. Summary is visible only if installing over VNC -#. and if firewall is enabled - otherwise port could not be blocked -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:102 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Installation from images is enabled (<a href=\"%1\">disable</a>)" -msgid "VNC ports will be open (<a href=\"%s\">close</a>)" -msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">غیرفعال</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:104 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Installation from images is disabled (<a href=\"%1\">enable</a>)" -msgid "VNC ports will be blocked (<a href=\"%s\">open</a>)" -msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل غیر فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">فعال</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:110 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Installation from images is enabled (<a href=\"%1\">disable</a>)" -msgid "Firewall will be enabled (<a href=\"%s\">disable</a>)" -msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">غیرفعال</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:114 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Installation from images is disabled (<a href=\"%1\">enable</a>)" -msgid "Firewall will be disabled (<a href=\"%s\">enable</a>)" -msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل غیر فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">فعال</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:119 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Installation from images is enabled (<a href=\"%1\">disable</a>)" -msgid "SSH port will be open (<a href=\"%s\">block</a>)" -msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">غیرفعال</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:123 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Installation from images is disabled (<a href=\"%1\">enable</a>)" -msgid "SSH port will be blocked (<a href=\"%s\">open</a>)" -msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل غیر فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">فعال</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:128 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Installation from images is enabled (<a href=\"%1\">disable</a>)" -msgid "SSH service will be enabled (<a href=\"%s\">disable</a>)" -msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">غیرفعال</a>)" - -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:132 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Installation from images is disabled (<a href=\"%1\">enable</a>)" -msgid "SSH service will be disabled (<a href=\"%s\">enable</a>)" -msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل غیر فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">فعال</a>)" - #. Proposal title -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:218 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:133 msgid "Firewall and SSH" msgstr "" #. Menu entry label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:220 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:135 msgid "&Firewall and SSH" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:231 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:146 msgid "Basic Firewall and SSH Configuration" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: check-box label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:237 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:152 msgid "Open &VNC Ports" msgstr "" #. frame label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:245 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:160 msgid "Firewall and SSH service" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: check-box label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:256 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:171 msgid "Enable Firewall" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: check-box label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:264 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:179 msgid "Open SSH Port" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: check-box label -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:272 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:187 msgid "Enable SSH Service" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:284 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:199 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Firewall and SSH</big></b><br>\n" -"Firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network " -"attacks.\n" -"SSH is a service that allows logging into this computer remotely via " -"dedicated\n" +"Firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network attacks.\n" +"SSH is a service that allows logging into this computer remotely via dedicated\n" "SSH client</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:290 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:205 msgid "" -"<p>Here you can choose whether the firewall will be enabled or disabled " -"after\n" +"<p>Here you can choose whether the firewall will be enabled or disabled after\n" "the installation. It is recommended to keep it enabled.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:293 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:208 msgid "" -"<p>With enabled firewall, you can decide whether to open firewall port for " -"SSH\n" -"service and allow remote SSH logins. Independently you can also enable SSH " -"service (i.e. it\n" +"<p>With enabled firewall, you can decide whether to open firewall port for SSH\n" +"service and allow remote SSH logins. Independently you can also enable SSH service (i.e. it\n" "will be started on computer boot).</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: help text -#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:300 +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:215 msgid "" "<p>You can also open VNC ports in firewall. It will not enable\n" "the remote administration service on a running system but it is\n" "started by the installer automatically if needed.</p>" msgstr "" +#. anything but enabling the firewall closes this dialog +#. (VNC and SSH checkboxes do nothing) +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:292 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Installation from images is enabled (<a href=\"%1\">disable</a>)" +msgid "Firewall will be enabled (<a href=\"%s\">disable</a>)" +msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">غیرفعال</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:296 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Installation from images is disabled (<a href=\"%1\">enable</a>)" +msgid "Firewall will be disabled (<a href=\"%s\">enable</a>)" +msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل غیر فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">فعال</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:301 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Installation from images is enabled (<a href=\"%1\">disable</a>)" +msgid "SSH service will be enabled (<a href=\"%s\">disable</a>)" +msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">غیرفعال</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:305 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Installation from images is disabled (<a href=\"%1\">enable</a>)" +msgid "SSH service will be disabled (<a href=\"%s\">enable</a>)" +msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل غیر فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">فعال</a>)" + +#. Display vnc port only if installing over VNC +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:317 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Installation from images is enabled (<a href=\"%1\">disable</a>)" +msgid "VNC ports will be open (<a href=\"%s\">close</a>)" +msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">غیرفعال</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:319 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Installation from images is disabled (<a href=\"%1\">enable</a>)" +msgid "VNC ports will be blocked (<a href=\"%s\">open</a>)" +msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل غیر فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">فعال</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:324 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Installation from images is enabled (<a href=\"%1\">disable</a>)" +msgid "SSH port will be open (<a href=\"%s\">block</a>)" +msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">غیرفعال</a>)" + +#: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:328 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Installation from images is disabled (<a href=\"%1\">enable</a>)" +msgid "SSH port will be blocked (<a href=\"%s\">open</a>)" +msgstr "نصب با استفاده از فایل غیر فعال است (<a href=\"%1\">فعال</a>)" + #. Commandline help title #. configuration of hosts #. Hosts dialog caption @@ -357,8 +353,7 @@ #. Fallback for situation that mustn't exist #: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:892 -msgid "" -"No URL for the release notes defined. Internet test cannot be performed." +msgid "No URL for the release notes defined. Internet test cannot be performed." msgstr "" #. popup informing user about the failure to retrieve release notes @@ -368,10 +363,8 @@ "Download of latest release notes failed due to server-side error. \n" "This does not necessarily imply a faulty network configuration.\n" "\n" -"Click 'Continue' to proceed to the next installation step. To skip any " -"steps\n" -"requiring an internet connection or to get back to your network " -"configuration,\n" +"Click 'Continue' to proceed to the next installation step. To skip any steps\n" +"requiring an internet connection or to get back to your network configuration,\n" "click 'Cancel'.\n" msgstr "" @@ -485,9 +478,18 @@ msgid "Interfaces for Bridging" msgstr "" -#. Lan::PrepareForAutoinst(); -#. Lan::Autoinstall(); -#: src/clients/lan_auto.rb:173 +#. copy the keys/values that are not existing in the XML +#. so we merge the inst-sys settings with the XML while XML +#. has higher priority +#. +#. bnc#796580 The problem with this is that due to compatibility with +#. older profiles, a missing element may have a different meaning than +#. "use what the filesystem/kernel currently uses". +#. In particular, a missing write_hostname [1] means +#. "use the product default from DVD1/control.xml". +#. Other elements may have similar problems, +#. to be fixed post-PTF for maintenance. +#: src/clients/lan_auto.rb:171 msgid "Configuration Error: uninitialized interface." msgstr "" @@ -724,9 +726,7 @@ msgstr "نام سرویس proxy یا آدرس IP باید تعیین شود." #: src/clients/routing.rb:354 -msgid "" -"At least one of the following parameters (gateway, netmask, device, options) " -"must be specified" +msgid "At least one of the following parameters (gateway, netmask, device, options) must be specified" msgstr "" #: src/clients/routing.rb:376 @@ -739,13 +739,13 @@ #. interface summary: WiFi without encryption #. interface summary: WiFi without encryption -#: src/include/network/complex.rb:101 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1348 +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:101 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1361 msgid "Warning: no encryption is used." msgstr "" #. Hyperlink: Change the configuration of an interface #. Hyperlink: Change the configuration of an interface -#: src/include/network/complex.rb:107 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1350 +#: src/include/network/complex.rb:107 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1363 msgid "Change." msgstr "" @@ -1350,12 +1350,9 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1414 msgid "" "<p><b><big>IFPLUGD PRIORITY</big></b></p> \n" -"<p> All interfaces configured with <b>On Cable Connection</b> and with " -"IFPLUGD_PRIORITY != 0 will be\n" -" used mutually exclusive. If more then one of these interfaces is <b>On " -"Cable Connection</b>\n" -" then we need a way to decide which interface to take up. Therefore we have " -"to\n" +"<p> All interfaces configured with <b>On Cable Connection</b> and with IFPLUGD_PRIORITY != 0 will be\n" +" used mutually exclusive. If more then one of these interfaces is <b>On Cable Connection</b>\n" +" then we need a way to decide which interface to take up. Therefore we have to\n" " set the priority of each interface. </p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1364,10 +1361,8 @@ msgid "Network Card Setup" msgstr "" -#. when using wicked every device which can be bridged -#. can be set to BOOTPROTO=none. No workaround with -#. BOOTPROTO=static required anymore -#: src/include/network/lan/bridge.rb:89 +#. remove all aliases (bnc#590167) +#: src/include/network/lan/bridge.rb:103 msgid "" "At least one selected device is already configured.\n" "Adapt the configuration for bridge?\n" @@ -1554,9 +1549,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:101 -msgid "" -"Value of \"id\" is out of range. Use \"list\" option to check max. value of " -"\"id\"." +msgid "Value of \"id\" is out of range. Use \"list\" option to check max. value of \"id\"." msgstr "" #. Handler for action "add" @@ -1663,9 +1656,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:234 -msgid "" -"For successful firmware installation, the 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' script " -"needs to be executed. Execute it now?" +msgid "For successful firmware installation, the 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' script needs to be executed. Execute it now?" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:248 @@ -1741,17 +1732,14 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:98 msgid "" "<p><b>Udev Rules</b> are rules for the kernel device manager that allow\n" -"associating the MAC address or BusID of the network device with its name " -"(for\n" +"associating the MAC address or BusID of the network device with its name (for\n" "example, eth1, wlan0 ) and assures a persistent device name upon reboot.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:104 msgid "" -"<p><b>Show visible port identification</b> allows you to physically identify " -"now configured NIC. \n" -"Set appropriate time, click <b>Blink</b> and LED diodes on you NIC will " -"start blinking for selected time.\n" +"<p><b>Show visible port identification</b> allows you to physically identify now configured NIC. \n" +"Set appropriate time, click <b>Blink</b> and LED diodes on you NIC will start blinking for selected time.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1759,26 +1747,20 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:117 msgid "" "<p><b>Kernel Module</b>. Enter the kernel module (driver) name \n" -"for your network device here. If the device is already configured, see if " -"there is more than one driver available for\n" -"your device in the drop-down list. If necessary, choose a driver from the " -"list, but usually the default value works.</p>\n" +"for your network device here. If the device is already configured, see if there is more than one driver available for\n" +"your device in the drop-down list. If necessary, choose a driver from the list, but usually the default value works.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Manual networ card setup help 3/4 #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:124 msgid "" "<p>Additionally, specify <b>Options</b> for the kernel module. Use this\n" -"format: <i>option</i>=<i>value</i>. Each entry should be space-separated, " -"for example: <i>io=0x300 irq=5</i>. <b>Note:</b> If two cards are \n" -"configured with the same module name, the options will be merged while " -"saving.</p>\n" +"format: <i>option</i>=<i>value</i>. Each entry should be space-separated, for example: <i>io=0x300 irq=5</i>. <b>Note:</b> If two cards are \n" +"configured with the same module name, the options will be merged while saving.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:130 -msgid "" -"<p>If you specify options via <b>Ethtool options</b>, ifup will call ethtool " -"with these options.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>If you specify options via <b>Ethtool options</b>, ifup will call ethtool with these options.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Manual dialog help 4/4 @@ -1966,27 +1948,19 @@ #. S/390 dialog help: QETH Options #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:966 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter any additional <b>Options</b> for this interface (separated by " -"spaces).</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter any additional <b>Options</b> for this interface (separated by spaces).</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:969 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Enable IPA Takeover</b> if IP address takeover should be " -"enabled for this interface.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Enable IPA Takeover</b> if IP address takeover should be enabled for this interface.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:972 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Enable Layer 2 Support</b> if this card has been configured " -"with layer 2 support.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Enable Layer 2 Support</b> if this card has been configured with layer 2 support.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:975 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the <b>Layer 2 MAC Address</b> if this card has been configured " -"with layer 2 support.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the <b>Layer 2 MAC Address</b> if this card has been configured with layer 2 support.</p>" msgstr "" #. TextEntry label @@ -2139,8 +2113,7 @@ "<p>Check <b>Enable IPv6</b> to enable the ipv6 module in the kernel.\n" "It is possible to use IPv6 together with IPv4. This is the default option.\n" "To disable IPv6, uncheck this option. This will blacklist the kernel \n" -"module for ipv6. If the IPv6 protocol is not used on your network, the " -"response \n" +"module for ipv6. If the IPv6 protocol is not used on your network, the response \n" "time can be faster.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2162,8 +2135,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>For each route, enter destination network IP address, gateway address,\n" "and netmask. To omit any of these values, use a dash sign \"-\". Select\n" -"the device through which the traffic to the defined network will be routed." -"\"-\" is an alias for any interface.</p>\n" +"the device through which the traffic to the defined network will be routed.\"-\" is an alias for any interface.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Routing dialog help 2/2 @@ -2183,8 +2155,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:112 msgid "" -"<p><b>Important:</b> if the firewall is enabled, allowing forwarding alone " -"is not enough. \n" +"<p><b>Important:</b> if the firewall is enabled, allowing forwarding alone is not enough. \n" "You should enable masquerading and/or set at least one redirect rule in the\n" "firewall configuration. Use the YaST firewall module.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2192,24 +2163,18 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:117 msgid "" "<p>If you are using DHCP to get an IP address, check whether you get\n" -"also a hostname via DHCP. The hostname will be set automatically by the " -"DHCP client.\n" -"However, changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical " -"desktop. \n" -"Therefore, disable this option if you connect to different networks that " -"assign \n" +"also a hostname via DHCP. The hostname will be set automatically by the DHCP client.\n" +"However, changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical desktop. \n" +"Therefore, disable this option if you connect to different networks that assign \n" "different hostnames.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:124 msgid "" "<p><b>Assign Hostname to Loopback IP</b> associates your hostname with \n" -"the IP address <tt>127.0.0.2</tt> (loopback) in <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>. This is " -"a \n" -"useful option if you want to have the hostname resolvable at all times, " -"even \n" -"without an active network. In all other cases, use it carefully, " -"especially \n" +"the IP address <tt>127.0.0.2</tt> (loopback) in <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>. This is a \n" +"useful option if you want to have the hostname resolvable at all times, even \n" +"without an active network. In all other cases, use it carefully, especially \n" "if this computer provides some network services.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2232,31 +2197,25 @@ msgid "" "<p>Search domain is the domain name where hostname searching starts.\n" "The primary search domain is usually the same as the domain name of\n" -"your computer (for example, suse.de). There may be additional search " -"domains\n" +"your computer (for example, suse.de). There may be additional search domains\n" "(such as suse.com). Separate the domains with commas or white space.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:147 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the short name for this computer (e.g. <i>mymachine</i>) and the " -"DNS domain\n" -"(e.g. <i>example.com</i>) that it belongs to. The domain is especially " -"important if this \n" -"computer is a mail server. You can view the hostname of you computer using " -"the <i>hostname</i> \n" +"<p>Enter the short name for this computer (e.g. <i>mymachine</i>) and the DNS domain\n" +"(e.g. <i>example.com</i>) that it belongs to. The domain is especially important if this \n" +"computer is a mail server. You can view the hostname of you computer using the <i>hostname</i> \n" "command.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:153 msgid "" "<p>Select the way how the DNS configuration will be modified (name servers,\n" -"search list, the content of <i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>). Normally, it is " -"handled\n" +"search list, the content of <i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>). Normally, it is handled\n" "by the <i>netconfig</i> script, which merges statically defined data with\n" "dynamically obtained data (e.g. from the DHCP client, NetworkManager,\n" -"etc.). This is the default. <b>Use Default Policy</b> is sufficient for " -"most\n" +"etc.). This is the default. <b>Use Default Policy</b> is sufficient for most\n" "configurations.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2277,15 +2236,12 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:174 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Address Setup</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>Select <b>No Address Setup</b> if you do not want to assign an IP address " -"to this device.\n" +"<p>Select <b>No Address Setup</b> if you do not want to assign an IP address to this device.\n" "This is particularly useful for bonding ethernet devices.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:179 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>iBFT</b> if you want to keep the network configured in your BIOS." -"</p>\n" +msgid "<p>Check <b>iBFT</b> if you want to keep the network configured in your BIOS.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 2/8 @@ -2307,17 +2263,14 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:193 msgid "" "<p>To search for an IP address and assign it statically, select \n" -"<b>Zeroconf</b>. To use DHCP and fall back to zeroconf, select <b>DHCP + " -"Zeroconf\n" -"</b>. Otherwise, the network addresses must be assigned <b>Statically</b>.</" -"p>\n" +"<b>Zeroconf</b>. To use DHCP and fall back to zeroconf, select <b>DHCP + Zeroconf\n" +"</b>. Otherwise, the network addresses must be assigned <b>Statically</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:199 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the <b>IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) for " -"your computer, and the \n" +"<p>Enter the <b>IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) for your computer, and the \n" " <b>Remote IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.254</tt>)\n" "for your peer.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2325,12 +2278,9 @@ #. Address dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:205 msgid "" -"<p>For <b>Static Address Setup</b> enter the static IP address for your " -"computer (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) and\n" -"the network mask (usually <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> or just length of prefix " -"<tt>/24</tt>).Optionally, you can enter\n" -"a fully qualified hostname for this IP address. The hostname will be written " -"to <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>.</p>\n" +"<p>For <b>Static Address Setup</b> enter the static IP address for your computer (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) and\n" +"the network mask (usually <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> or just length of prefix <tt>/24</tt>).Optionally, you can enter\n" +"a fully qualified hostname for this IP address. The hostname will be written to <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 8/8 @@ -2358,9 +2308,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:226 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Mandatory Interface</b> specifies whether the network service reports " -"failure if the interface fails to start at boot time.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Mandatory Interface</b> specifies whether the network service reports failure if the interface fails to start at boot time.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:229 @@ -2369,16 +2317,14 @@ "<p>Maximum transfer unit (<b>MTU</b>) is the maximum size of the packet,\n" "transferred over the network in one frame. Usually, you do not need to\n" "set a MTU, but using lower MTU values may improve the network performance,\n" -"especially on slow dial-up connections. Either select one of the " -"recommended\n" +"especially on slow dial-up connections. Either select one of the recommended\n" "values or define another one.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:237 msgid "" "<p>Select the slave devices for the bond device.\n" -"Only devices with the device activation set to <b>Never</b> and with <b>No " -"Address Setup</b> are available.</p>" +"Only devices with the device activation set to <b>Never</b> and with <b>No Address Setup</b> are available.</p>" msgstr "" #. DHCP dialog help 1/7 @@ -2390,8 +2336,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:244 msgid "" "<p>The <b>DHCP Client Identifier</b>, if left empty, defaults to\n" -"the hardware address of the network interface. It must be different for " -"each\n" +"the hardware address of the network interface. It must be different for each\n" "DHCP client on a single network. Therefore, specify a unique free-form\n" "identifier here if you have several (virtual) machines using the same\n" "network interface and thus the same hardware address.</p>" @@ -2401,15 +2346,12 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:252 msgid "" "<p>The <b>Hostname to Send</b> specifies a string used for the\n" -"hostname option field when the DHCP client sends messages to the DHCP " -"server. Some \n" +"hostname option field when the DHCP client sends messages to the DHCP server. Some \n" "DHCP servers update name server zones (forward and reverse records) \n" "according to this hostname (dynamic DNS).</p>\n" "Some DHCP servers require the <b>Hostname to Send</b> option field to\n" -"contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave <b>AUTO</" -"b>\n" -"to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>/etc/" -"HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" +"contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave <b>AUTO</b>\n" +"to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>/etc/HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" "If you do not want to send a hostname, leave the field empty.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2430,19 +2372,14 @@ #. Aliases dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:272 msgid "" -"<p><b>IPv4 Address Label</b>, formerly known as Alias Name, is optional and " -"legacy. The total\n" -" length of interface name (inclusive of the colon and label) " -"is\n" -" limited to 15 characters and the obsolete ifconfig utility " -"truncates it after 9 characters.</p>" +"<p><b>IPv4 Address Label</b>, formerly known as Alias Name, is optional and legacy. The total\n" +" length of interface name (inclusive of the colon and label) is\n" +" limited to 15 characters and the obsolete ifconfig utility truncates it after 9 characters.</p>" msgstr "" #. Aliases dialog help 3/4, #83766 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:278 -msgid "" -"<p>Do not include the interface name in the alias name. For example, enter " -"<b>foo</b> instead of <b>eth0:foo</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Do not include the interface name in the alias name. For example, enter <b>foo</b> instead of <b>eth0:foo</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. shared between WirelessDialog and WirelessKeyPopup @@ -2487,8 +2424,7 @@ "<p>Set the <b>Network Name (ESSID)</b> used to identify\n" "cells that are part of the same virtual network. All stations in a\n" "wireless LAN need the same ESSID to communicate with each other. If\n" -"you choose the operation mode <b>Managed</b> and no <b>WPA</b> " -"authentication mode,\n" +"you choose the operation mode <b>Managed</b> and no <b>WPA</b> authentication mode,\n" "you can leave this field empty or set it to <tt>any</tt>. In this\n" "case, your WLAN card associates with the access point with the best\n" "signal strength.</p>\n" @@ -2508,8 +2444,7 @@ "NOTE: Shared key authentication makes it easier for a\n" "potential attacker to break into your network. Unless you have\n" "specific needs for shared key authentication, use the <b>Open</b>\n" -"mode. Because WEP has been proven insecure, <b>WPA</b> (Wi-Fi Protected " -"Access)\n" +"mode. Because WEP has been proven insecure, <b>WPA</b> (Wi-Fi Protected Access)\n" "was defined to close its security holes, but not all hardware supports\n" "WPA. If you want to use WPA, select <b>WPA-PSK</b> or <b>WPA-EAP</b> as the\n" "authentication mode. This is only possible in the operation mode\n" @@ -2549,8 +2484,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>These values will be written to the interface configuration file\n" "'ifcfg-*' in '/etc/sysconfig/network'. If you need additional settings,\n" -"add them manually. Refer to the file 'wireless' in the same directory for " -"all\n" +"add them manually. Refer to the file 'wireless' in the same directory for all\n" "available options.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2643,8 +2577,7 @@ "<p>For TTLS and PEAP, enter your <b>Identity</b>\n" "and <b>Password</b> as configured on the server.\n" "If you have special requirements to set the username used as\n" -"<b>Anonymous Identity</b>, you may set it here. This is usually not needed.</" -"p>\n" +"<b>Anonymous Identity</b>, you may set it here. This is usually not needed.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. text entry label @@ -2666,8 +2599,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:128 msgid "" "<p>TLS uses a <b>Client Certificate</b> instead of a username and\n" -"password combination for authentication. It uses a public and private key " -"pair\n" +"password combination for authentication. It uses a public and private key pair\n" "to encrypt negotiation communication, therefore you will additionally need\n" "a <b>Client Key</b> file that contains your private key and\n" "the appropriate <b>Client Key Password</b> for that file.</p>\n" @@ -2885,8 +2817,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>To use your wireless LAN card in master or ad-hoc mode,\n" "set the <b>Channel</b> the card should use here. This is not needed\n" -"for managed mode--the card will hop through the channels searching for " -"access\n" +"for managed mode--the card will hop through the channels searching for access\n" "points in that case.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2981,8 +2912,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1001 msgid "" "<p>In this dialog, define your WEP keys used\n" -"to encrypt your data before it is transmitted. You can have up to four " -"keys,\n" +"to encrypt your data before it is transmitted. You can have up to four keys,\n" "although only one key is used to encrypt the data. This is the default key.\n" "The other keys can be used to decrypt data. Usually you have only\n" "one key.</p>" @@ -3037,8 +2967,7 @@ #. validated in ValidateWpaEap #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1281 msgid "" -"Not using a Certificate Authority (CA) certificate can result in " -"connections\n" +"Not using a Certificate Authority (CA) certificate can result in connections\n" "to insecure, rogue wireless networks. Continue without CA ?" msgstr "" @@ -3121,8 +3050,7 @@ "<p>If this feature is enabled, you can\n" "administer this machine remotely from another machine. Use a VNC\n" "client, such as krdc (connect to <tt><hostname>:%1</tt>), or\n" -"a Java-capable Web browser (connect to <tt>http://<hostname>:%2/</" -"tt>).\n" +"a Java-capable Web browser (connect to <tt>http://<hostname>:%2/</tt>).\n" "This form of remote administration is less secure than using SSH.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3132,12 +3060,12 @@ msgstr "" #. Popup text -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:143 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:144 msgid "These packages need to be installed:" msgstr "" #. Popup text -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:161 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:162 msgid "" "The required packages are not installed.\n" "The configuration will be aborted.\n" @@ -3148,113 +3076,112 @@ #. Translators: Appended after a network card name to indicate that #. there is no carrier, no link to the network, the cable is not #. plugged in. Preferably a short string. -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:253 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:254 msgid "unplugged" msgstr "" #. Table field (Unknown device) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:259 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:260 msgid "Unknown" msgstr "ناشناس" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:287 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:288 msgid "Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:292 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:293 msgid "DNS Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:294 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:295 msgid "DSL Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:296 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:297 msgid "Hosts Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:300 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:301 msgid "ISDN Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:304 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:305 msgid "Network Card Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:308 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:309 msgid "Modem Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:312 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:313 msgid "Proxy Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:316 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:317 msgid "Provider Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "" #. Popup headline -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:320 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:321 msgid "Routing Configuration Successfully Saved" msgstr "" #. Popup text -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:329 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:330 msgid "Configure mail now?" msgstr "" #. Popup text -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:334 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:335 msgid "Run configuration of %1?" msgstr "" +#. Disables all widgets which cannot be configured with current network service +#. +#. see bnc#433084 +#. if listed any items, disable them, if show_popup, show warning popup +#. +#. returns true if items were disabled +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1008 +msgid "" +"Network is currently handled by NetworkManager\n" +"or completely disabled. YaST is unable to configure some options." +msgstr "" + #. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:682 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1067 msgid "Network Cards" msgstr "" #. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:686 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1071 msgid "Modems" msgstr "" #. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:690 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1075 msgid "ISDN Cards" msgstr "" #. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:694 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1079 #, fuzzy msgid "DSL Devices" msgstr "دستگاه:" -#. Confirmation: label text (detecting hardware: xxx) -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:700 +#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1084 msgid "All Network Devices" msgstr "" -#. Disables all widgets which cannot be configured with current network service -#. -#. see bnc#433084 -#. if listed any items, disable them, if show_popup, show warning popup -#. -#. returns true if items were disabled -#: src/include/network/routines.rb:1109 -msgid "" -"Network is currently handled by an unsupported network service\n" -"or completely disabled. YaST is unable to configure some options." -msgstr "" - #. validation error popup #. Popup::Error text #: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:93 @@ -3361,9 +3288,7 @@ #. @param [Hash] event the event being handled #. @return whether valid #: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:502 -msgid "" -"It's not recommended to use .local as domainname due to Multicast DNS. Use " -"it at your own risk?" +msgid "It's not recommended to use .local as domainname due to Multicast DNS. Use it at your own risk?" msgstr "" #. Popup::Error text @@ -3544,8 +3469,7 @@ #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:58 msgid "" "<p>When <b>Dial Prefix Regular Expression</b> is set, users can\n" -"change the dial prefix in KInternet provided that it matches the " -"expression.\n" +"change the dial prefix in KInternet provided that it matches the expression.\n" "A recommended value is <tt>[09]?</tt>, allowing <tt>0</tt>, <tt>9</tt>,\n" "and the empty prefix. If the expression is empty, users are not allowed\n" "to change the prefix.</p>\n" @@ -3643,18 +3567,15 @@ #. help text for Device Activation #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:152 msgid "" -"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is similar to <tt>auto</tt>. Interfaces with this " -"startmode will never\n" -"be shut down via <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt>. <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> is still " -"available.\n" +"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is similar to <tt>auto</tt>. Interfaces with this startmode will never\n" +"be shut down via <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt>. <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> is still available.\n" "Use this if you have an NFS or iSCSI root filesystem.\n" msgstr "" #. help text for Device Activation #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:162 msgid "" -"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is nearly like 'auto'. But interfaces with this " -"startmode will never\n" +"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is nearly like 'auto'. But interfaces with this startmode will never\n" "be shut down via 'rcnetwork stop'. 'ifdown <iface>' still works.\n" "Use this when you have a nfs or iscsi root filesystem.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3669,8 +3590,7 @@ #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:201 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Device Activation</big></b></p> \n" -"<p>Choose when to bring up the network interface. <b>At Boot Time</b> " -"activates it during system boot, \n" +"<p>Choose when to bring up the network interface. <b>At Boot Time</b> activates it during system boot, \n" "<b>Never</b> does not start the device.\n" "%1</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3756,7 +3676,7 @@ msgstr "" #. enable ipv6 support -#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:418 src/modules/Lan.rb:815 +#: src/include/network/widgets.rb:418 src/modules/Lan.rb:820 msgid "Enable IPv6" msgstr "" @@ -3799,9 +3719,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/network/confirm_virt_proposal.rb:26 -msgid "" -"Because of the bridged network, YaST2 needs to restart the network to apply " -"the settings." +msgid "Because of the bridged network, YaST2 needs to restart the network to apply the settings." msgstr "" #. Opens dialog for editing NIC name @@ -3847,7 +3765,7 @@ #. Progress stage 2 #. Progress stage 10 -#: src/modules/DNS.rb:373 src/modules/Lan.rb:538 +#: src/modules/DNS.rb:373 src/modules/Lan.rb:535 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Save configuration" msgid "Update configuration" @@ -3924,210 +3842,210 @@ msgstr "" #. Read dialog caption -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:275 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:272 msgid "Initializing Network Configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 1/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:288 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:285 msgid "Detect network devices" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 2/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:290 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:287 msgid "Read driver information" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 3/9 - multiple devices may be present, really plural -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:292 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:289 msgid "Read device configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 4/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:294 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:291 msgid "Read network configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 5/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:296 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:293 msgid "Read firewall settings" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 6/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:298 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:295 msgid "Read hostname and DNS configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 7/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:300 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:297 msgid "Read installation information" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 8/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:302 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:299 msgid "Read routing configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 9/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:304 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:301 msgid "Detect current status" msgstr "" #. Progress step 1/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:318 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:315 msgid "Detecting ndiswrapper..." msgstr "" #. modprobe ndiswrapper before hwinfo when needed (#343893) -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:337 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:334 msgid "" "Detected a ndiswrapper configuration,\n" "but the kernel module was not modprobed.\n" "Do you want to modprobe ndiswrapper?\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:345 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:342 msgid "" "ndiswrapper kernel module has not been loaded.\n" "Check configuration manually.\n" msgstr "" #. Progress step 2/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:359 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:356 msgid "Detecting network devices..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 3/9 - multiple devices may be present, really plural -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:367 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:364 msgid "Reading device configuration..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 4/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:373 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:370 msgid "Reading network configuration..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 5/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:382 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:379 msgid "Reading firewall settings..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 6/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:390 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:387 msgid "Reading hostname and DNS configuration..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 7/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:397 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:394 msgid "Reading installation information..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 8/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:403 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:400 msgid "Reading routing configuration..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 9/9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:409 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:406 msgid "Detecting current status..." msgstr "" #. Final progress step #. Final progress step -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:415 src/modules/Lan.rb:651 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:412 src/modules/Lan.rb:651 #, fuzzy msgid "Finished" msgstr "فنلاندی" #. (a specialization used when a parameterless function is needed) #. @return Read(`cache) -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:441 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:438 msgid "To apply this change, a reboot is needed." msgstr "" #. Write dialog caption -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:510 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:507 msgid "Saving Network Configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 2 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:517 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:514 msgid "Write drivers information" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 3 - multiple devices may be present,really plural -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:519 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:516 msgid "Write device configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 4 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:521 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:518 msgid "Write network configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 5 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:523 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:520 msgid "Write routing configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 6 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:525 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:522 msgid "Write hostname and DNS configuration" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 7 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:527 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:524 msgid "Set up network services" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 8 #. Progress stage 1 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:531 src/modules/Remote.rb:289 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:528 src/modules/Remote.rb:289 msgid "Write firewall settings" msgstr "" #. Progress stage 9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:535 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:532 msgid "Activate network services" msgstr "" #. Progress step 2 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:552 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:549 msgid "Writing /etc/modprobe.conf..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 3 - multiple devices may be present, really plural -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:557 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:554 msgid "Writing device configuration..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 4 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:563 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:560 msgid "Writing network configuration..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 5 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:569 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:566 msgid "Writing routing configuration..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 6 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:577 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:574 msgid "Writing hostname and DNS configuration..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 7 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:590 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:587 msgid "Setting up network services..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 8 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:598 src/modules/Remote.rb:303 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:595 src/modules/Remote.rb:303 msgid "Writing firewall settings..." msgstr "" #. Progress step 9 -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:608 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:605 msgid "Activating network services..." msgstr "" @@ -4135,151 +4053,155 @@ msgid "No network running" msgstr "" +#. Import data +#. @param [Hash] settings settings to be imported +#. @return true on success +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:706 +msgid "AutoYaST setting networking/managed: NetworkManager is not available, Wicked will be used." +msgstr "" + #. Create a textual summary for the general network settings #. proposal (NetworkManager + ipv6) #. @return [rich text, links] -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:787 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:792 msgid "Network Mode" msgstr "" #. network mode: the interfaces are controlled by the user -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:792 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:797 msgid "Interfaces controlled by NetworkManager" msgstr "" #. disable NetworkManager applet -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:794 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:799 msgid "Disable NetworkManager" msgstr "" #. network mode -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:798 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:803 msgid "Traditional network setup with NetControl - ifup" msgstr "" #. enable NetworkManager applet #. for virtual network proposal (bridged) don't show hyperlink to enable networkmanager -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:801 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:806 msgid "Enable NetworkManager" msgstr "" #. ipv6 support is enabled -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:807 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:812 msgid "Support for IPv6 protocol is enabled" msgstr "" #. disable ipv6 support -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:809 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:814 msgid "Disable IPv6" msgstr "" #. ipv6 support is disabled -#: src/modules/Lan.rb:813 +#: src/modules/Lan.rb:818 msgid "Support for IPv6 protocol is disabled" msgstr "" #. translators: a possible value for: IPoIB device mode -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:182 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:195 msgid "connected" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:183 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:196 msgid "datagram" msgstr "" #. summary description of STARTMODE=auto #. summary description of STARTMODE=auto #. summary description of STARTMODE=hotplug -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1238 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1242 -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1246 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1251 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1255 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1259 msgid "Started automatically at boot" msgstr "" #. summary description of STARTMODE=ifplugd -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1250 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1263 msgid "Started automatically on cable connection" msgstr "" #. summary description of STARTMODE=managed -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1254 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1267 msgid "Managed by NetworkManager" msgstr "" #. summary description of STARTMODE=off -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1258 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1271 msgid "Will not be started at all" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1263 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1276 msgid "Started manually" msgstr "" #. do nothing -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1275 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1288 msgid "IP address assigned using" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1279 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1292 #, fuzzy #| msgid "&IP Address" msgid "IP address: %s/%s" msgstr "آ&درس IP" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1282 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1295 msgid "IP address: %s, subnet mask %s" msgstr "" #. FIXME: #. - side effect: sets @type. No reason for that. It should only build item #. overview. Check and remove. -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1313 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1326 msgid "Not configured" msgstr "" #. display it only if we need it, don't duplicate "ifcfg_name" above -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1336 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1402 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1349 src/modules/LanItems.rb:1415 #, fuzzy msgid "Device Name: %s" msgstr "دستگاه:" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1356 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1369 msgid "Bonding slaves" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1370 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1383 msgid "enslaved in %s" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1371 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1384 msgid "Bonding master" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1385 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1398 msgid "Not connected" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1388 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1401 msgid "No hwinfo" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1408 -msgid "" -"Unable to configure the network card because the kernel device (eth0, wlan0) " -"is not present. This is mostly caused by missing firmware (for wlan " -"devices). See dmesg output for details." +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1421 +msgid "Unable to configure the network card because the kernel device (eth0, wlan0) is not present. This is mostly caused by missing firmware (for wlan devices). See dmesg output for details." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1414 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1427 msgid "" "The device is not configured. Press <b>Edit</b>\n" "to configure.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1421 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1434 msgid "Needed firmware" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1421 +#: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1434 msgid "unknown" msgstr "ناشناس" @@ -4373,17 +4295,17 @@ msgstr "" #. item in combo box Firewall Zone -#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:82 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:121 msgid "Automatically Assigned Zone" msgstr "" #. item in combo box Firewall Zone -#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:84 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:123 msgid "Firewall Disabled" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Part of combo box item -> "Internal Zone (Unprotected)" -#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:96 +#: src/modules/SuSEFirewall4Network.rb:135 msgid "(Unprotected)" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/nfs.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/nfs.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/nfs.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/nfs_server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/nfs_server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/nfs_server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -59,9 +59,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:113 -msgid "" -"Domain specification for NFSv4 ID mapping, such as 'localdomain' or 'abc." -"com' etc." +msgid "Domain specification for NFSv4 ID mapping, such as 'localdomain' or 'abc.com' etc." msgstr "" #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:119 @@ -103,14 +101,11 @@ #. @param [Hash] options command options #. @return whether successful #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:319 -msgid "" -"Domain cannot be set without enabling NFSv4. Use the 'set enablev4' command." +msgid "Domain cannot be set without enabling NFSv4. Use the 'set enablev4' command." msgstr "" #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:330 -msgid "" -"Command 'set' must be used in the form 'set option=value'. Use 'set help' to " -"get information about available options." +msgid "Command 'set' must be used in the form 'set option=value'. Use 'set help' to get information about available options." msgstr "" #. Then no need to check for conflict. @@ -217,9 +212,7 @@ #. Opening NFS server dialog #. @return `back, `abort, `next `or finish #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:272 -msgid "" -"Unable to read the /etc/idmapd.conf file. Setting the default setting for " -"the domain to 'localdomain'." +msgid "Unable to read the /etc/idmapd.conf file. Setting the default setting for the domain to 'localdomain'." msgstr "" #. Help, part 1 of 2 @@ -239,18 +232,15 @@ #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:311 msgid "" "<P>If the server needs to handle NFSv4 clients, check <B>Enable NFSv4</B>\n" -"and fill in the NFSv4 domain name you want the ID mapping daemon to use. " -"Leave\n" -"it as localdomain or refer to the man page for idmapd and idmapd.conf if you " -"are not sure.</P>\n" +"and fill in the NFSv4 domain name you want the ID mapping daemon to use. Leave\n" +"it as localdomain or refer to the man page for idmapd and idmapd.conf if you are not sure.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. FIXME: use %1 as nfs-utils.src.rpm produces nfs-kernel-server.rpm #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:321 msgid "" "<P>If the server and client must authenticate using GSS library, check the\n" -"<B>Enable GSS Security</B> box. To use GSS API, you currently need to have " -"Kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils > 1.0.7) on your system.</P>\n" +"<B>Enable GSS Security</B> box. To use GSS API, you currently need to have Kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils > 1.0.7) on your system.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. frame label @@ -301,16 +291,14 @@ #. Help, part 2 of 4 #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:495 msgid "" -"<P><b>Host Wild Card</b> sets which hosts can access the selected " -"directory.\n" +"<P><b>Host Wild Card</b> sets which hosts can access the selected directory.\n" "It can be a single host, groups, wild cards, or\n" "IP networks.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. Help, part 3 of 4 #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:503 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter an asterisk (<tt>*</tt>) instead of a name to specify all hosts.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter an asterisk (<tt>*</tt>) instead of a name to specify all hosts.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help, part 4 of 4 @@ -421,9 +409,7 @@ #. FIXME svcgssd is gone! (only nfsserver is left) #: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:266 -msgid "" -"Unable to start svcgssd. Ensure your kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils) setup " -"is correct." +msgid "Unable to start svcgssd. Ensure your kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils) setup is correct." msgstr "" #: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:275 Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/nis.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/nis.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/nis.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/nis_server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/nis_server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/nis_server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -156,8 +156,7 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:73 msgid "" -"<p>Select if your <i>passwd</i> file should be merged with the <i>shadow</" -"i>\n" +"<p>Select if your <i>passwd</i> file should be merged with the <i>shadow</i>\n" "file (only possible if the <i>shadow</i> file exists).</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -212,8 +211,7 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:71 msgid "" -"<p>Enter a NIS <b>domain</b>. If this host is also a NIS client using this " -"machine as a server, check\n" +"<p>Enter a NIS <b>domain</b>. If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check\n" "the corresponding option.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -300,8 +298,7 @@ "<p><b>Firewall Settings</b><br>\n" "To open the firewall to allow accessing the NIS server\n" "from remote computers, set <b>Open Port in Firewall</b>.\n" -"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click <b>Firewall Details</" -"b>.\n" +"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click <b>Firewall Details</b>.\n" "This option is only available if the firewall is enabled.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -374,16 +371,12 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:62 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the NIS <b>domain</b> and the IP <b>address</b> or host name of the " -"master NIS server.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the NIS <b>domain</b> and the IP <b>address</b> or host name of the master NIS server.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 #: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:69 -msgid "" -"<p>If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check " -"the corresponding option.</p>" +msgid "<p>If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check the corresponding option.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -423,10 +416,7 @@ #. help text 1/1 #: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:175 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, enter the names of hosts to configure as NIS server slaves. Use " -"<i>Add</i> to add a new one, <i>Edit</i> to change an existing entry, and " -"<i>Delete</i> to remove an entry.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, enter the names of hosts to configure as NIS server slaves. Use <i>Add</i> to add a new one, <i>Edit</i> to change an existing entry, and <i>Delete</i> to remove an entry.</p>" msgstr "" #. To translators: selection box label Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/ntp-client.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/ntp-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/ntp-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-09-03 16:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -23,32 +23,21 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:92 -msgid "" -"<p>Press <b>Synchronize Now</b>, to get your system time set correctly using " -"the selected NTP server. If you want to make use of NTP permanently, enable " -"the <b>Save NTP Configuration</b> option</p>" +msgid "<p>Press <b>Synchronize Now</b>, to get your system time set correctly using the selected NTP server. If you want to make use of NTP permanently, enable the <b>Save NTP Configuration</b> option</p>" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:98 -msgid "" -"<p>Enabling <b>Run NTP as daemon</b> option, the NTP service will be started " -"as daemon. Otherwise the system time will be synchronized periodically. The " -"default interval is 15 min. You can change it after installation with the " -"<b>yast2 ntp-client module</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enabling <b>Run NTP as daemon</b> option, the NTP service will be started as daemon. Otherwise the system time will be synchronized periodically. The default interval is 15 min. You can change it after installation with the <b>yast2 ntp-client module</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text, cont. #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:107 -msgid "" -"<p>Using the <b>Configure</b> button, open the advanced NTP configuration.</" -"p>" +msgid "<p>Using the <b>Configure</b> button, open the advanced NTP configuration.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text, cont. #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:116 -msgid "" -"<p>Synchronization with the NTP server can be done only when the network is " -"configured.</p>" +msgid "<p>Synchronization with the NTP server can be done only when the network is configured.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: error popup @@ -57,21 +46,20 @@ msgstr "" #. combo box label -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:239 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:240 msgid "&NTP Server Address" msgstr "" #. check box label -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:249 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:250 msgid "&Run NTP as daemon" msgstr "" #. check box label -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:258 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:259 msgid "&Save NTP Configuration" msgstr "" -#. try to line up the widgets horizontally #. push button label #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:269 msgid "S&ynchronize now" @@ -84,24 +72,29 @@ msgstr "" #. Otherwise, prompt user for confirming pkg installation -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:388 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:386 msgid "" "Synchronization with NTP server is not possible\n" "without package %1 installed." msgstr "" #. Only if network is running try to synchronize the ntp server -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:399 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:398 msgid "Synchronizing with NTP server..." msgstr "" +#. update time widgets +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:443 +msgid "Connection to selected NTP server failed." +msgstr "" + #. Translators: yes-no popup, #. ntpdate is a command, %1 is the server address -#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:481 +#: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:474 msgid "" -"'Test query to server '%1' failed. If server is not yet accessible or " -"network is not configured click 'No' to ignore. Revisit NTP server " -"configuration?" +"Test query to server '%1' failed.\n" +"If server is not yet accessible or network is not configured\n" +"click 'No' to ignore. Revisit NTP server configuration?" msgstr "" #. local clock type name @@ -603,10 +596,8 @@ "Select whether to start the NTP daemon now and on every system boot. \n" "The NTP daemon resolves host names when initializing. Your\n" "network connection must be started before the NTP daemon starts.</p>\n" -"Selecting <b>Synchronize without Daemon</b> the ntp daemon will not be " -"activated. \n" -"The system time will be set periodically. The interval is configurable. It " -"is 15 minutes by default.\n" +"Selecting <b>Synchronize without Daemon</b> the ntp daemon will not be activated. \n" +"The system time will be set periodically. The interval is configurable. It is 15 minutes by default.\n" " You can change this when the system was set up." msgstr "" @@ -622,12 +613,9 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:51 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Secure NTP Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"By selecting <b>Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only</b>, remote " -"hosts will not be able to view and modify NTP settings on your \n" -"computer. The NTP service is restricted to servers in the <tt>/etc/ntp.conf</" -"tt> file and to localhost.<br> \n" -"Access control flags can be fine-tuded in the servers overview table. This " -"option is not available if NTP is configured via DHCP.</p>\n" +"By selecting <b>Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only</b>, remote hosts will not be able to view and modify NTP settings on your \n" +"computer. The NTP service is restricted to servers in the <tt>/etc/ntp.conf</tt> file and to localhost.<br> \n" +"Access control flags can be fine-tuded in the servers overview table. This option is not available if NTP is configured via DHCP.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text 3/5 @@ -645,8 +633,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Configured Servers</big></b><br>\n" "To adjust NTP servers, peers, local clocks, and NTP broadcasting,\n" -"select the appropriate line and click <b>Edit</b>. To add a new " -"synchronization\n" +"select the appropriate line and click <b>Edit</b>. To add a new synchronization\n" "peer, click <b>Add</b>. To delete an existing synchronization peer,\n" "select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -662,8 +649,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:78 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Advanced configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"To configure this host to synchronize against multiple remote hosts or " -"against\n" +"To configure this host to synchronize against multiple remote hosts or against\n" "a locally connected clock, use <b>Advanced Configuration</b>." msgstr "" @@ -686,8 +672,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:94 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Device</big></b><br>\n" -"To make the clock work, it may be necessary to create a special symbolic " -"link to \n" +"To make the clock work, it may be necessary to create a special symbolic link to \n" "the device to which the clock is connected. To do this, check\n" "<b>Create Symlink</b> and set the <b>Device</b>. To browse for the device,\n" "click <b>Browse</b>.\n" @@ -757,8 +742,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:148 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Options</big></b><br>\n" -"To fine-tune the synchronization source, enter the respective options in " -"the\n" +"To fine-tune the synchronization source, enter the respective options in the\n" "<b>Options</b> text field. For details, see\n" "<i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/confopt.htm</i>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -767,8 +751,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Access Control Options</big></b><br>\n" "Define the access control flags (<b><tt>restrict</tt></b> directive in\n" -"<i>/etc/ntp.conf</i>) for this server, indicating which types of actions the " -"remote\n" +"<i>/etc/ntp.conf</i>) for this server, indicating which types of actions the remote\n" "host can perform on your NTP daemon. By default, it is set to <i>notrap\n" "nomodify noquery</i>. This option is only available if you have checked the\n" "<b>Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only</b> option in\n" @@ -839,8 +822,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:202 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Selecting a Public NTP Server</b></big><br>\n" -"Select the NTP server to use from the <b>Public NTP Servers</b> list. To " -"display\n" +"Select the NTP server to use from the <b>Public NTP Servers</b> list. To display\n" "NTP servers only for a particular country, select it in <b>Country</b>.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -870,10 +852,8 @@ msgid "" "<p><big><b>Use Random Servers</b></big><br>\n" "This service is offered by pool.ntp.org. If you select this option,\n" -"three different servers are added to the configuration. The server names " -"are\n" -"permanent, but they change their DNS records (IPs) every hour. This means " -"that\n" +"three different servers are added to the configuration. The server names are\n" +"permanent, but they change their DNS records (IPs) every hour. This means that\n" "your NTP client is synchronized with different servers every hour.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -881,10 +861,8 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:238 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Clock Driver Calibration</b></big><br>\n" -"The clock driver may need to be calibrated. In this dialog, various " -"calibration\n" -"options can be set. The meaning of particular options depends on the " -"particular\n" +"The clock driver may need to be calibrated. In this dialog, various calibration\n" +"options can be set. The meaning of particular options depends on the particular\n" "driver. Some drivers do not use all the options.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -892,8 +870,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:245 msgid "" "To learn more about available options, install the package\n" -"<i>ntp-doc</i> and see <i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/html/refclock.htm</" -"i>.</p>\n" +"<i>ntp-doc</i> and see <i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/html/refclock.htm</i>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. yes-no popup @@ -1224,118 +1201,121 @@ msgstr "" #. progress step -#. error report +#. While calling "yast clone_system" it is possible that +#. the ntp server has not already been installed at that time. +#. (This would be done if yast2-ntp-client will be called in the UI) +#. In that case the error popup will not be shown. (bnc#889557) #. progress step -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:502 src/modules/NtpClient.rb:594 -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:755 src/modules/NtpClient.rb:906 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:502 src/modules/NtpClient.rb:597 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:758 src/modules/NtpClient.rb:909 #, fuzzy msgid "Finished" msgstr "فنلاندی" #. boolean update_dhcp = original_config_dhcp != config_dhcp; #. NtpClient read dialog caption -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:728 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:731 msgid "Saving NTP Client Configuration" msgstr "" #. progress stage -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:745 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:748 msgid "Write NTP settings" msgstr "" #. progress stage -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:747 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:750 msgid "Restart NTP daemon" msgstr "" #. progress step -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:751 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:754 msgid "Writing the settings..." msgstr "" #. progress step -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:753 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:756 msgid "Restarting NTP daemon..." msgstr "" #. error message -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:838 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:841 msgid "Cannot update the dynamic configuration policy." msgstr "" #. error report -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:876 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:879 msgid "Cannot restart the NTP daemon." msgstr "" #. summary string -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:970 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:973 msgid "The NTP daemon starts when starting the system." msgstr "" #. summary string -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:976 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:979 msgid "The NTP daemon does not start automatically." msgstr "" #. summary string, %1 is list of addresses -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:982 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:985 msgid "Servers: %1" msgstr "" #. summary string, %1 is list of addresses -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:986 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:989 msgid "Radio Clocks: %1" msgstr "" #. summary string, %1 is list of addresses -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:990 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:993 msgid "Peers: %1" msgstr "" #. summary string, %1 is list of addresses -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:994 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:997 msgid "Broadcast time information to: %1" msgstr "" #. summary string, %1 is list of addresses -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:998 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1001 msgid "Accept broadcasted time information from: %1" msgstr "" #. summary string, FIXME -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1014 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1017 msgid "Combine static and DHCP configuration." msgstr "" #. summary string, FIXME -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1018 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1021 msgid "Static configuration only." msgstr "" #. summary string, FIXME -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1021 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1024 msgid "Custom configuration policy." msgstr "" #. An informative popup label diring the NTP server testings -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1054 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1057 msgid "Testing the NTP server..." msgstr "" #. message report - result of test of connection to NTP server -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1084 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1087 msgid "Server is reachable and responds properly." msgstr "" #. error message - result of test of connection to NTP server #. report error instead of simple message (#306018) -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1088 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1091 msgid "Server is unreachable or does not respond properly." msgstr "" #. if package is not installed (in the inst-sys, it is: bnc#399659) -#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1106 +#: src/modules/NtpClient.rb:1109 msgid "" "Cannot search for NTP server in local network\n" "without package %1 installed.\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/oneclickinstall.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/oneclickinstall.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/oneclickinstall.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/online-update-configuration.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/online-update-configuration.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/online-update-configuration.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/online-update.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/online-update.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/online-update.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -60,10 +60,7 @@ #. help text for online-update initialization #: src/clients/online_update.rb:130 -msgid "" -"<p>The system is initializing the installation and update repositories. " -"Software repositories can be altered in the <b>Installation Source</b> " -"module.</p>" +msgid "<p>The system is initializing the installation and update repositories. Software repositories can be altered in the <b>Installation Source</b> module.</p>" msgstr "" #. progress stage label @@ -151,9 +148,7 @@ #. help text for online update #: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:73 -msgid "" -"<p>If special messages associated with patches are available, they will be " -"shown in an extra dialog when the patch is installed.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>If special messages associated with patches are available, they will be shown in an extra dialog when the patch is installed.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. using SetContents (define in online_update.ycp) @@ -253,8 +248,7 @@ #. continue/cancel popup text #: src/modules/OnlineUpdate.rb:76 msgid "" -"There are patches for package management available that require a restart of " -"YaST.\n" +"There are patches for package management available that require a restart of YaST.\n" "They should be installed first and all other patches after the restart.\n" "\n" "You selected some other patches to be installed now.\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/opensuse_mirror.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/opensuse_mirror.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/opensuse_mirror.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -40,11 +40,11 @@ #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:129 msgid "yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "بلی" #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:129 msgid "no" -msgstr "" +msgstr "خیر" #: src/lib/opensuse_mirror/main_dialog.rb:139 msgid "&Exit" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/packager.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/packager.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/packager.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-15 15:57+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ #: src/clients/do_not_show_again_editor.rb:79 msgid "Type" -msgstr "" +msgstr "نوع" #: src/clients/do_not_show_again_editor.rb:79 msgid "Popup Ident." @@ -114,12 +114,12 @@ #. radio button #: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:162 msgid "&Other" -msgstr "" +msgstr "&سایر" #. dialog caption #: src/clients/inst_desktop.rb:185 msgid "Desktop Selection" -msgstr "" +msgstr "انتخاب محیط کار" #. by default, nothing is selected, enabling next #. handling [Next] button @@ -173,11 +173,12 @@ #: src/clients/repositories.rb:687 #: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:306 msgid "Name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "نام" +# اینجه همان معنی نسخه است #: src/clients/inst_mediacopy.rb:65 msgid "Version" -msgstr "" +msgstr "نسخه" #. feedback popup 1/2 #: src/clients/inst_mediacopy.rb:118 @@ -187,7 +188,7 @@ #. feedback popup 2/2 #: src/clients/inst_mediacopy.rb:120 msgid "Please wait..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "لطفا صبر کنید..." #. TRANSLATORS: popup header #. TRANSLATORS: popup header @@ -289,7 +290,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: used for "Recommended: Yes" (see *4) #: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:914 msgid "Yes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "بله" #. TRANSLATORS: This is a complex HTML-formatted information about selecetd external repository #. It contains "key: value" pair, one per line, separated by <br> tags @@ -432,7 +433,7 @@ #. force reinitialization #: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:129 src/clients/sw_single.rb:744 msgid "Installing Packages..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "درحال نصب بسته ها...." #. error report, %1 is number #: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:322 @@ -465,9 +466,9 @@ #. dialog caption #. dialog caption #: src/clients/key_manager.rb:70 src/clients/repositories.rb:1809 -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:682 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:683 msgid "Initializing..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "در حال مقدار دهی اولیه..." #. intermediate popup while initializing internal packagemanagement #: src/clients/media_proposal.rb:39 @@ -524,11 +525,11 @@ #: src/clients/repositories.rb:326 src/clients/repositories.rb:362 #: src/clients/repositories.rb:368 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:436 msgid "Unknown" -msgstr "" +msgstr "ناشناس" #. label to be used instead of URL if not found #: src/clients/repositories.rb:328 src/clients/repositories.rb:361 -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1324 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1325 msgid "URL: %1" msgstr "" @@ -576,7 +577,7 @@ #: src/clients/repositories.rb:669 src/clients/repositories.rb:682 #: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:393 msgid "Enabled" -msgstr "" +msgstr "فعال" #. table header - is autorefresh enabled for the repo? #. keep the translation as short as possible! @@ -595,7 +596,7 @@ #. table header - URL of the repo #: src/clients/repositories.rb:678 src/clients/repositories.rb:689 msgid "URL" -msgstr "" +msgstr "آدرس" #. push button - change URL of the selected repository #: src/clients/repositories.rb:789 @@ -747,7 +748,7 @@ #. popup message part 2 followed by other info #. popup message, after message header, header of details -#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1011 src/modules/Packages.rb:1314 +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1011 src/modules/Packages.rb:1326 #: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:162 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:310 msgid "Details:" msgstr "" @@ -755,7 +756,7 @@ #. popup message part 3 #. end of popup message, question #. end of popup message, question -#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1013 src/modules/Packages.rb:1322 +#: src/clients/repositories.rb:1013 src/modules/Packages.rb:1334 #: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:164 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:312 msgid "Try again?" msgstr "" @@ -1081,7 +1082,7 @@ msgid "&Start Check" msgstr "" -#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:361 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:694 +#: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:361 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:684 msgid "&Eject" msgstr "" @@ -1098,7 +1099,7 @@ #. progress bar label #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:374 msgid "Progress" -msgstr "" +msgstr "پیش رفت" #. window title - open file dialog #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:421 @@ -1244,7 +1245,7 @@ #. table header #: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:306 msgid "Key ID" -msgstr "" +msgstr "ID کلید" #. remove the key #: src/include/packager/key_manager_dialogs.rb:338 @@ -1285,7 +1286,7 @@ #. add at least one product if the scan result is empty (no product info available) #: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:152 msgid "Repository" -msgstr "" +msgstr "خزانه" #. continue-back popup #. continue-back popup @@ -1302,7 +1303,7 @@ #. popup message part 1 #. Import GPG keys found in the inst-sys #: src/include/packager/repositories_include.rb:319 -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1309 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:306 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1321 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:306 msgid "" "Unable to create repository\n" "from URL '%1'." @@ -1334,73 +1335,73 @@ #. error report #. popup error #. popup error -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:516 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:618 -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:582 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:773 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:517 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:619 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:538 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:729 msgid "An error occurred while preparing the installation system." msgstr "" #. error report -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:653 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:654 msgid "Control file %1 not found on media." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: error report #. TRANSLATORS: error report -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1251 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1415 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1252 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1416 msgid "Unable to use additional products." msgstr "" #. fill up internal map (used later when item selected) -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1302 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1308 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1303 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1309 msgid "%1, URL: %2" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1318 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1319 msgid "URL: %1, Path: %2" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: popup heading -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1349 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1350 msgid "Additional Products" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: additional dialog information -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1355 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1356 msgid "" "The installation repository also contains the listed additional repositories.\n" "Select the ones you want to use.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1366 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1367 msgid "Additional Products to Select" msgstr "" #. push button label -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1373 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1374 msgid "Add Selected &Products" msgstr "" #. %1 is either "CD" or "DVD" -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1504 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1505 msgid "Insert the addon %1 medium" msgstr "" #. %1 is the product name, %2 is either "CD" or "DVD" -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1509 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1510 msgid "Insert the %1 %2 medium" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: error message, %1 is replaced with product URL -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1561 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1562 msgid "Unable to add product %1." msgstr "" #. adding the product to the list of products (BNC #269625) #. no such products -#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1753 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1759 +#: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1754 src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1760 #: src/modules/Packages.rb:463 msgid "Unknown Product" -msgstr "" +msgstr "محصول ناشناس" #. update the trusted flag #: src/modules/KeyManager.rb:214 @@ -1459,7 +1460,7 @@ #. Nothing more to install from this CD (very concise - little space!!) #: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:222 src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:237 msgid "Done." -msgstr "" +msgstr "انجام شد" #. Status line informing about the next CD that will be used #. %1: Media type ("CD" / "DVD", ???) @@ -1479,7 +1480,7 @@ #. Add "Total" item - at the top so it is visible by default even if there are many items #. #. List column header for total remaining MB and time to install -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:989 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:924 msgid "Total" msgstr "" @@ -1488,41 +1489,41 @@ #. #. message in the installatino log, %1 is package name, #. %2 is package size -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1116 src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1368 -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1420 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1051 src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1303 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1355 msgid "Downloading %1 (download size %2)" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1146 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1081 msgid " (Remaining: %1%2 packages)" msgstr "" #. display download progress in DownloadInAdvance mode #. translations: progress message (part1) -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1179 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1114 msgid "Downloading Packages..." msgstr "" #. progress message (part2) -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1182 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1117 msgid " (Downloaded %1 of %2 packages)" msgstr "" #. Heading for the progress bar for the current package #. while it is deleted. "%1" is the package name. -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1318 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1253 msgid "Deleting %1" msgstr "" #. package installation - summary text #. %1 is RPM name, %2 is installed (unpacked) size (e.g. 6.20MB) -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1325 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1260 msgid "Installing %1 (installed size %2)" msgstr "" #. message in the installatino log, %1 is package name, #. %2 is package size -#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1403 +#: src/modules/PackageSlideShow.rb:1338 msgid "Applying delta RPM: %1" msgstr "" @@ -1648,23 +1649,25 @@ msgid "<b>Error:</b> Product <b>%s</b> will be automatically removed.</font>" msgstr "" -#. update proposal warning -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:751 +#. TRANSLATORS: update proposal warning, do NOT translate "-release", +#. it is part of a package name (like "sles-release") +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:752 msgid "" "<ul><li><b>Some products are marked for automatic removal.</b></li>\n" "<ul><li>Contact the vendor of the removed add-on to provide you with a new\n" "installation media</li><li>Or select the appropriate online extension or module\n" -"in the registration step</li><li>Or resolve the conflicts manually in the \n" -"package management</li></ul></li></ul>" +"in the registration step</li><li>Or to continue with product upgrade go to the\n" +"software selection and mark the product (the -release package) for removal.\n" +"</li></ul></li></ul>" msgstr "" #. error in proposal, %1 is URL -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1330 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1342 msgid "No repository found at '%1'." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: beginning of the rich text with the release notes -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1603 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1615 msgid "" "<p><b>The release notes for the initial release are part of the installation\n" "media. If an Internet connection is available during configuration, you can\n" @@ -1672,50 +1675,50 @@ msgstr "" #. popup - information label -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1630 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1642 msgid "Integrating booted media..." msgstr "" #. close the popup in order to be able to ask about the license -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1652 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1664 msgid "Failed to integrate the service pack repository." msgstr "" #. popup - information label -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1685 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1697 msgid "Initializing repositories..." msgstr "" #. message popup, %1 is product name -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1917 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1929 msgid "Insert %1 CD 1" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1919 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:1931 msgid "%1 CD 1 not found" msgstr "" #. an error message -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2029 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2041 msgid "" "Error while initializing package descriptions.\n" "Check the log file %1 for more details." msgstr "" #. bnc #436925 -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2290 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2302 msgid "" "The software selection has been changed externally.\n" "Software proposal will be called again." msgstr "" #. popup label -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2308 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2320 msgid "Evaluating package selection..." msgstr "" #. Error message, %{pattern_name} is replaced with the missing pattern name in runtime -#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2583 +#: src/modules/Packages.rb:2595 msgid "" "Failed to select default product pattern %{pattern_name}.\n" "Pattern has not been found." @@ -1724,26 +1727,26 @@ #. Sets that the license (file) has been already accepted #. #. @param string filename -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:192 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:199 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:148 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:155 msgid "Cannot read license file %1" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:193 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:149 msgid "To show the product license properly, put the license.tar.gz file to the root of the live media when building the image." msgstr "" #. combo box -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:337 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:293 msgid "&Language" -msgstr "" +msgstr "&زبان" #. check box label -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:389 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:345 msgid "I &Agree to the License Terms." -msgstr "" +msgstr "من با تفاهم نامه &موافق هستم." #. %{license_url} is an URL where the displayed license can be found -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:429 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:385 msgid "" "If you want to print this EULA, you can download it from\n" "%{license_url}" @@ -1751,14 +1754,14 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: addition license information #. %1 is replaced with the filename -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:435 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:391 msgid "" "If you want to print this EULA, you can find it\n" "on the first media in the file %1" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:451 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:407 msgid "" "<p>Read the license agreement carefully and select\n" "one of the available options. If you do not agree to the license agreement,\n" @@ -1767,31 +1770,31 @@ #. dialog title #. dialog caption -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:461 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1290 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:417 src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1212 msgid "License Agreement" -msgstr "" +msgstr "تفاهم نامه" #. popup question -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1083 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1017 msgid "Really abort the add-on product installation?" msgstr "" #. text asking whether to refuse a license (Yes-No popup) -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1103 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1041 msgid "" "Refusing the license agreement cancels the installation.\n" "Really refuse the agreement?" msgstr "" #. text asking whether to refuse a license (Yes-No popup) -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1107 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1044 msgid "" "Refusing the license agreement cancels the add-on\n" "product installation. Really refuse the agreement?" msgstr "" #. timed ok/cancel popup -#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1124 +#: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:1054 msgid "The system is shutting down..." msgstr "" @@ -1870,165 +1873,170 @@ #. radio button #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:34 +msgid "&Extensions and Modules from Registration Server..." +msgstr "" + +#. radio button +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:36 msgid "Specify &URL..." msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:36 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:38 msgid "&FTP..." msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:38 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:40 msgid "&HTTP..." msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:40 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:42 msgid "HTT&PS..." msgstr "" #. radio button #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:42 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1711 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:44 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1719 msgid "&SMB/CIFS" msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:44 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:46 msgid "&NFS..." msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:46 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:48 msgid "&CD..." msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:48 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:50 msgid "&DVD..." msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:50 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:52 msgid "&Hard Disk..." msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:52 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:54 msgid "&USB Mass Storage (USB Stick, Disk)..." msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:54 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:56 msgid "&Local Directory..." msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:56 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:58 msgid "&Local ISO Image..." msgstr "" #. check box -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:58 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:60 msgid "&Download repository description files" msgstr "" #. Help text suffix for some types of the media -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:106 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:109 msgid "" "<p>If the location is a file holding an ISO image\n" "of the media, set <b>ISO Image</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help text suffix for some types of the media -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:111 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:114 msgid "" "<p>If the repository is on multiple media,\n" "set the location of the first media of the set.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:120 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:128 msgid "&Server Name" msgstr "" #. text entry #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:128 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1575 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:136 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1583 msgid "&Path to Directory or ISO Image" msgstr "" #. checkbox label -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:136 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:144 msgid "&ISO Image" msgstr "" #. checkbox label -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:138 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:146 msgid "N&FS v4 Protocol" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:144 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:152 msgid "Mount Options" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: "(default)" - is a combobox value and means default libzypp #. NFS mount option (users can change it to anything else, the field is editable) -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:148 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:156 msgid "(default)" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:159 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:167 msgid "URL of the Repository" msgstr "" #. frame -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:168 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:176 msgid "P&rotocol" msgstr "" #. input field label -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:178 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:186 msgid "&URL of the Repository" msgstr "" #. label / dialog caption #. bugzilla #219759 #. service label can be empty (not defined) -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:193 src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:323 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:201 src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:323 msgid "Repository URL" msgstr "" #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:195 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:203 msgid "NFS Server" msgstr "" #. label / dialog caption #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:197 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:199 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:205 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:207 msgid "CD or DVD Media" msgstr "" #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:201 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:209 msgid "Hard Disk" msgstr "" #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:203 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:211 msgid "USB Stick or Disk" msgstr "" #. label / dialog caption #. dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:205 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:880 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:213 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:888 msgid "Local Directory" msgstr "" #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:207 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:215 msgid "Local ISO Image" msgstr "" @@ -2037,53 +2045,53 @@ #. label / dialog caption #. label / dialog caption #. label / dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:209 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:211 -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:213 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:215 -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:217 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:217 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:219 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:221 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:223 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:225 msgid "Server and Directory" msgstr "" #. popup message -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:432 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:440 msgid "The name of the repository cannot be empty." msgstr "" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:444 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:452 msgid "&Repository Name" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:459 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:467 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Repository Name</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>Repository Name</b> to specify the name of the repository. If it is empty, YaST will use the product name (if available) or the URL as the name.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:473 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:481 msgid "&Service Name" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:481 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:489 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Service Name</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>Service Name</b> to specify the name of the service. If it is empty, YaST will use part of the service URL as the name.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. popup message -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:516 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:524 msgid "URL cannot be empty." msgstr "" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:529 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:537 msgid "&URL" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:543 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:551 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Repository URL</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>URL</b> to specify the URL of the repository.</p>" @@ -2093,23 +2101,23 @@ #. @return widget description map #. Get widget description map #. @return widget description map -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:716 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1843 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:724 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1851 msgid "Edit Parts of the URL" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:723 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1850 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:731 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1858 msgid "Edit Complete URL" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:735 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:743 msgid "" "<p><big><b>NFS Server</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>Server Name</b> and <b>Path to Directory or ISO Image</b>\n" "to specify the NFS server host name and path on the server.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:742 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:750 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Mount Options</b></big><br>\n" "You can specify extra options used for mounting the NFS volume.\n" @@ -2118,42 +2126,42 @@ msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:797 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:805 msgid "&CD-ROM" msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:799 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:807 msgid "&DVD-ROM" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:804 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:812 msgid "" "<p><big><b>CD or DVD Media</b></big><br>\n" "Set <b>CD-ROM</b> or <b>DVD-ROM</b> to specify the type of media.</p>" msgstr "" #. dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:895 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:903 msgid "ISO Image File" msgstr "" #. error popup - the entered path is not a directory -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:918 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:926 msgid "" "The entered path is not a directory\n" "or the directory does not exist.\n" msgstr "" #. error popup - the entered path is not a regular file -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:948 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:956 msgid "" "The entered path is not a file\n" "or the file does not exist.\n" msgstr "" #. continue/cancel popup, %1 is a file name -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:972 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:980 msgid "" "File '%1'\n" "does not seem to be an ISO image.\n" @@ -2161,17 +2169,17 @@ msgstr "" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:993 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1001 msgid "&Path to Directory" msgstr "" #. checkbox label -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1001 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1259 -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1326 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1009 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1267 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1334 msgid "&Plain RPM Directory" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1016 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1024 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Local Directory</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>Path to Directory</b> to specify the path to the\n" @@ -2181,20 +2189,20 @@ msgstr "" #. `opt(`hstretch), -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1252 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1260 msgid "&USB Mass Storage Device" msgstr "" #. the spacing is added to make the widget wider -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1257 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1324 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1265 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1332 msgid "&File System" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1258 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1325 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1266 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1333 msgid "Dire&ctory" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1263 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1271 msgid "" "<p><big><b>USB Stick or Disk</b></big><br>\n" "Select the USB device on which the repository is located.\n" @@ -2207,7 +2215,7 @@ #. 'auto' is a value in the combo box widget, do not translate it! #. 'auto' is a value in the combo box widget, do not translate it! -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1273 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1340 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1281 src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1348 msgid "" "<p>The file system used on the device will be detected automatically\n" "if you select file system 'auto'. If the detection fails or you\n" @@ -2215,11 +2223,11 @@ msgstr "" #. combobox title -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1323 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1331 msgid "&Disk Device" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1330 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1338 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Disk</b></big><br>\n" "Select the disk on which the repository is located.\n" @@ -2231,12 +2239,12 @@ msgstr "" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1356 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1364 msgid "&Path to ISO Image" msgstr "" #. push button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1376 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1384 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Local ISO Image</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>Path to ISO Image</b> to specify the path to the\n" @@ -2244,71 +2252,71 @@ msgstr "" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1557 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1565 msgid "Server &Name" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1561 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1569 msgid "&Port" -msgstr "" +msgstr "&درگاه" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1566 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1574 msgid "&Share" msgstr "" #. checkbox label -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1579 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1587 msgid "ISO &Image" msgstr "" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1582 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1590 msgid "&Directory on Server" msgstr "" #. frame -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1587 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1595 msgid "Au&thentication" msgstr "" #. check box -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1594 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1602 msgid "&Anonymous" msgstr "" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1603 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1611 msgid "&Workgroup or Domain" msgstr "" #. text entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1612 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1620 msgid "&User Name" msgstr "" #. password entry -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1619 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1627 msgid "&Password" -msgstr "" +msgstr "کل&مه رمز" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1694 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1702 msgid "&FTP" msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1697 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1705 msgid "H&TTP" msgstr "" #. radio button -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1704 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1712 msgid "HTT&PS" msgstr "" #. help text - server dialog -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1874 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1882 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Server and Directory</b></big><br>\n" "Use <b>Server Name</b> and <b>Path to Directory or ISO Image</b>\n" @@ -2323,7 +2331,7 @@ msgstr "" #. help text - server dialog, there is a "Port" widget -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1887 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1895 msgid "" "<p>It is possible to set the <b>Port</b> number for a HTTP/HTTPS repository.\n" "Leave it empty to use the default port.</p>\n" @@ -2332,12 +2340,12 @@ #. Returns whether Community Repositories are defined in the control file. #. #. @return [Boolean] whether defined -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1949 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1957 msgid "I would like to install an additional Add On Product" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2067 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2076 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Media Type</b></big><br>\n" "The software repository can be located on CD, on a network server,\n" @@ -2345,7 +2353,7 @@ msgstr "" #. help, continued -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2076 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2085 msgid "" "<p>\n" "To add <b>CD</b> or <b>DVD</b>,\n" @@ -2353,7 +2361,7 @@ msgstr "" #. help, continued -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2086 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2095 msgid "" "<p>\n" "The product CDs can be copied to the hard disk.\n" @@ -2363,7 +2371,7 @@ msgstr "" #. help, continued -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2098 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2107 msgid "" "<p>\n" "Network installation requires a working network connection.\n" @@ -2372,25 +2380,25 @@ msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2113 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2122 msgid "Select the media type" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2119 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2128 msgid "Insert the add-on product CD" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2120 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2129 msgid "Insert the add-on product DVD" msgstr "" #. ask for a medium -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2138 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2147 msgid "No USB disk was detected." msgstr "" #. TODO: disable "download" option when CD or DVD source is selected -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2333 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2344 msgid "" "<p><b>Download Files</b><br>\n" "Each repository has description files which describe the content of the\n" @@ -2400,12 +2408,12 @@ msgstr "" #. dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2552 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2563 msgid "Media Type" msgstr "" #. dialog caption -#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2576 +#: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:2587 msgid "Add On Product" msgstr "" @@ -2438,7 +2446,7 @@ #. Progress finished #: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:122 src/modules/SourceManager.rb:200 msgid "Finished" -msgstr "" +msgstr "پایان" #. Error message #: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:133 @@ -2478,12 +2486,12 @@ #. status info, to be used inside summary #: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:395 msgid "Disabled" -msgstr "" +msgstr "غیر فعال" #. translators: name of a repository if no other idenfication found #: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:407 msgid "unknown" -msgstr "" +msgstr "ناشناس" #. corresponds to the "Enable/Disable" button #: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:430 @@ -2500,7 +2508,9 @@ msgid "Configured Repositories" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:680 +#. To adjust the width of the dialog, look for the more lengthy device label +#. (and add some extra space for the frame) +#: src/modules/SourceManager.rb:670 msgid "&Drive to eject" msgstr "" @@ -2532,7 +2542,7 @@ #: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:176 msgid "&Details..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "&جزییات..." #. error popup #. message popup @@ -2553,7 +2563,7 @@ #. table header item #: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:283 msgid "Value" -msgstr "" +msgstr "مقدار" #. message popup #: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:403 @@ -2570,12 +2580,12 @@ msgstr "" #. progress information, %1 stands for number of services -#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:520 +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:493 msgid "Collecting information of %1 services found..." msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:618 +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:591 msgid "" "No SLP repositories have been found on your network.\n" "This could be caused by a running SuSEfirewall2,\n" @@ -2583,7 +2593,7 @@ msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:627 +#: src/modules/SourceManagerSLP.rb:600 msgid "No SLP repositories have been found on your network." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/pam.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/pam.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/pam.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:33+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-03-02 21:36+0330\n" "Last-Translator: مصطفی برمشوری <mostafa.barmshor@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Farsi (Persian) <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/pkg-bindings.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/pkg-bindings.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/pkg-bindings.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ #. 3 steps per repository (download, cache rebuild, load resolvables) #: src/Source_Load.cc:161 src/Source_Load.cc:483 src/Source_Set.cc:83 -#: src/Target_Load.cc:74 src/Target_Load.cc:187 +#: src/Target_Load.cc:74 src/Target_Load.cc:204 msgid "Loading the Package Manager..." msgstr "" @@ -178,6 +178,6 @@ msgid "Initialize the Target System" msgstr "" -#: src/Target_Load.cc:71 src/Target_Load.cc:183 +#: src/Target_Load.cc:71 src/Target_Load.cc:200 msgid "Read Installed Packages" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/printer.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/printer.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/printer.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:40+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/product-creator.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/product-creator.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/product-creator.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/proxy.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/proxy.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/proxy.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/qt-pkg.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/qt-pkg.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/qt-pkg.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -41,48 +41,48 @@ msgid "&Repositories" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:418 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:419 msgid "S&earch" msgstr "" #. DEBUG -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:425 src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:113 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:426 src/YQPkgSearchFilterView.cc:113 msgid "&Keywords" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:434 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:435 msgid "&Installation Summary" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:519 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:520 msgid "D&escription" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:532 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:533 msgid "&Technical Data" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:545 src/YQPkgProductDialog.cc:115 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:546 src/YQPkgProductDialog.cc:115 msgid "Dependencies" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:561 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:562 #, fuzzy msgid "&Versions" msgstr "فارسی" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:579 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:580 msgid "File List" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:596 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:597 msgid "Change Log" msgstr "" #. "Cancel" button #. button #0 #. text -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:623 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:194 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:624 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:194 #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:249 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:305 #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:326 src/YQPatternSelector.cc:259 #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:163 src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:398 @@ -92,176 +92,176 @@ msgstr "&انصراف" #. Translators: "Accept" here refers to licenses or similar -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:633 src/YQPatternSelector.cc:268 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:634 src/YQPatternSelector.cc:268 #: src/YQPkgTextDialog.cc:258 src/YQSimplePatchSelector.cc:228 msgid "&Accept" msgstr "&پذیرش" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:676 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:677 msgid "&File" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:678 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:679 msgid "&Import..." msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:679 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:680 msgid "&Export..." msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:683 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:684 msgid "E&xit -- Discard Changes" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:684 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:685 msgid "&Quit -- Save Changes" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:696 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:697 msgid "&Package" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:736 src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:92 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:737 src/YQPkgPackageKitGroupsFilterView.cc:92 #: src/YQPkgRepoFilterView.cc:149 msgid "All Packages" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:738 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:430 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:739 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:430 msgid "Update if newer version available" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:741 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:415 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:742 src/YQPkgObjList.cc:415 #: src/YQPkgObjList.cc:436 msgid "Update unconditionally" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:755 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:756 msgid "&Patch" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:782 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:783 msgid "Confi&guration" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:783 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:784 msgid "&Repositories..." msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:784 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:785 msgid "&Online Update..." msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:794 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:795 msgid "&Dependencies" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:796 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:797 #, fuzzy msgid "&Check Now" msgstr "چچنی" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:797 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:798 msgid "&Autocheck" msgstr "" #. Translators: Menu for view options (Use a noun, not a verb!) -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:810 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:811 msgid "&Options" msgstr "&گزینه" #. Translators: This is about packages ending in "-devel", so don't translate that "-devel"! -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:813 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:814 msgid "Show -de&vel Packages" msgstr "" #. Translators: This is about packages ending in "-debuginfo", so don't translate that "-debuginfo"! -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:822 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:823 msgid "Show -&debuginfo/-debugsource Packages" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:830 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:831 msgid "&System Verification Mode" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:835 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:836 msgid "&Ignore Recommended Packages for Already Installed Packages" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:841 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:842 msgid "&Cleanup when deleting packages" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:845 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:846 msgid "&Allow vendor change" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:858 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:859 msgid "E&xtras" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:860 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:861 msgid "Show &Products" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:861 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:862 msgid "Show P&ackage Changes" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:862 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:863 msgid "Show &History" msgstr "" #. Translators: This is about packages ending in "-devel", so don't translate that "-devel"! -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:870 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:871 msgid "Install All Matching -&devel Packages" msgstr "" #. Translators: This is about packages ending in "-debuginfo", so don't translate that "-debuginfo"! -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:874 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:875 msgid "Install All Matching -de&buginfo Packages" msgstr "" #. Translators: This is about packages ending in "-debugsource", so don't translate that "-debugsource"! -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:877 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:878 msgid "Install All Matching -debug&source Packages" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:882 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:883 msgid "Generate Dependency Resolver &Test Case" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:902 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:903 msgid "&Help" msgstr "&راهنما" #. Note: The help functions and their texts are moved out #. to a separate source file YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc #. Menu entry for help overview -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:908 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:909 msgid "&Overview" msgstr "" #. Menu entry for help about used symbols ( icons ) -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:911 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:912 msgid "&Symbols" msgstr "" #. Menu entry for keyboard help -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:914 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:915 msgid "&Keys" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1100 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1101 msgid "All package dependencies are OK." msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1116 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1117 msgid "P&atches" msgstr "" #. startsWith #. filter -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1178 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1179 msgid "Save Package List" msgstr "" @@ -269,56 +269,56 @@ #. parent #. Post error popup. #. parent -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1217 src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1311 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1218 src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1312 #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:425 src/YQPkgConflictList.cc:201 #: src/YQPkgList.cc:605 msgid "Error" msgstr "خطا" #. caption -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1218 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1219 msgid "Error exporting package list to %1" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1230 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1231 msgid "Load Package List" msgstr "" #. caption -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1312 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1313 msgid "Error loading package list from %1" msgstr "" #. caption #. Translators: %1 is the number of affected packages -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1414 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1415 msgid "%1 packages will be updated" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1415 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1416 msgid "&Continue" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1415 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1416 msgid "C&ancel" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1454 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1455 msgid "<p><small><a href=\"repoupgraderemove:///%1\">Cancel switching</a> system packages to versions in repository %2</small></p>" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1473 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1474 msgid "<p><a href=\"repoupgradeadd:///%1\">Switch system packages</a> to the versions in this repository (%2)</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1696 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1697 msgid "Added Subpackages:" msgstr "" #. "OK" button #. addHStretch( hbox ); #. "OK" button -#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1698 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:214 +#: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1699 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:214 #: src/YQPkgDescriptionDialog.cc:120 src/YQPkgDiskUsageList.cc:156 #: src/YQPkgDiskUsageList.cc:165 src/YQPkgProductDialog.cc:135 #: src/YQPkgTextDialog.cc:71 Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/qt.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/qt.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/qt.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:34+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -60,14 +60,14 @@ msgid "Stylesheet Editor" msgstr "" -#: src/YQApplication.cc:640 +#: src/YQApplication.cc:643 msgid "" "You clicked the right mouse button where a left-click was expected.\n" "Switch left and right mouse buttons?" msgstr "" #. Popup dialog caption -#: src/YQApplication.cc:653 +#: src/YQApplication.cc:656 msgid "Unexpected Click" msgstr "" @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ #. Help button - intentionally without keyboard shortcut #: src/YQWizard.cc:869 msgid "Release Notes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "یادداشت راهنما" #. "Steps" button - intentionally without keyboard shortcut #: src/YQWizard.cc:1324 Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/rdp.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/rdp.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/rdp.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/rear.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/rear.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/rear.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:57+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/registration.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/registration.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/registration.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-15 15:56+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -17,52 +17,56 @@ "Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" #. popup heading (in bold) -#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:34 +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:35 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "Local Registration Servers" msgstr "ثبت" -#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:36 +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:37 msgid "" "Select a detected registration server from the list\n" "or the default SUSE registration server." msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:63 +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:65 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "No registration server selected." msgstr "ثبت" #. %s is the default SCC URL -#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:98 +#: src/clients/discover_registration_services.rb:100 msgid "SUSE Customer Center (%s)" msgstr "" #. popup message -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:55 +#. popup message +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:52 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:48 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "Contacting the Registration Server" msgstr "ثبت" #. reset the user input in case an exception is raised -#. register the system -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:149 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:164 +#. nil = use the default URL +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:147 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:169 msgid "Registering the System..." msgstr "" #. then register the product(s) #. %s is name of given product -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:158 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:509 +#. register the base product +#. %s is name of given product +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:156 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:427 +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:177 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:192 msgid "Registering %s ..." msgstr "" #. updating base product registration, %s is a new base product name #. updating registered addon/extension, %s is an extension name -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:205 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:230 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:206 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:236 msgid "Updating to %s ..." msgstr "" @@ -70,28 +74,28 @@ #. dialog title #. dialog title #. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:254 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:347 -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:597 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:633 -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:372 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:260 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:352 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:504 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:552 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:92 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "Registration" msgstr "ثبت" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:255 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:261 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "Registration is being updated..." msgstr "ثبت" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:256 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:262 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "The previous registration is being updated." msgstr "ثبت" #. automatic registration refresh during system upgrade failed, register from scratch -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:269 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:275 msgid "" "Automatic registration upgrade failed.\n" "You can manually register the system from scratch." @@ -99,10 +103,10 @@ #. label text describing the registration (1/2) #. use \n to split to more lines if needed (use max. 76 chars/line) -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:283 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:289 msgid "" "Please enter a registration or evaluation code for this product and your\n" -"User Name/EMail from the SUSE Customer Center in the fields below.\n" +"User Name/E-mail address from the SUSE Customer Center in the fields below.\n" "Access to security and general software updates is only possible on\n" "a registered system." msgstr "" @@ -110,53 +114,57 @@ #. label text describing the registration (2/2), #. not displayed in installed system #. use \n to split to more lines if needed (use max. 76 chars/line) -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:295 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:301 msgid "" -"If you skip the registration now be sure to do so in the installed system." +"If you skip product registration now, remember to register after\n" +"installation has completed." msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:302 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:309 msgid "Network Configuration..." msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:311 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:584 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:318 src/clients/inst_scc.rb:491 msgid "The system is already registered." msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:318 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:374 -msgid "&Email" -msgstr "" +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:325 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:94 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "&IP Address" +msgid "&E-mail Address" +msgstr "آ&درس IP" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:320 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:239 -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:376 +#. handle nil specifically, it cannot be stored in XML profile +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:327 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:167 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:96 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "Registration &Code" msgstr "ثبت" #. button label -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:326 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:332 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "&Local Registration Server..." msgstr "ثبت" #. button label -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:329 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:335 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "&Skip Registration" msgstr "ثبت" -#. TODO: improve the help text -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:338 -msgid "" -"Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get " -"updates and extensions." +#. help text +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:343 +msgid "Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get updates and extensions." msgstr "" #. not set yet? -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:372 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:377 msgid "" "Registration added some update repositories.\n" "\n" @@ -164,54 +172,31 @@ "on-line updates during installation?" msgstr "" -#. round the half up (more items in the first column for odd number of items) -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:430 -msgid "The extension you selected needs a separate registration code." -msgid_plural "The extensions you selected need separate registration codes." -msgstr[0] "" - -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:435 -msgid "Enter the registration code into the field below." -msgid_plural "Enter the registration codes into the fields below." -msgstr[0] "" - #. cache the available addons -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:460 +#. create a new dialog for accepting and importing a SSL certificate and run it +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:406 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_workflow.rb:101 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "Loading Available Extensions and Modules..." msgstr "ثبت" #. dialog title -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:542 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:458 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "Register Extensions and Modules" msgstr "ثبت" #. help text -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:546 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:462 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "<p>Extensions and Modules are being registered.</p>" msgstr "ثبت" -#. dialog title -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:555 -msgid "Extension and Module Registration Codes" -msgstr "" - -#. help text -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:559 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter registration codes for the requested extensions or modules.</p>\n" -"<p>Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you " -"cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective " -"extension or module.</p>" -msgstr "" - #. Popup question: confirm skipping the registration -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:573 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:480 msgid "" "If you do not register your system we will not be able\n" "to grant you access to the update repositories.\n" @@ -223,165 +208,87 @@ msgstr "" #. button label -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:587 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:494 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "Register Again" msgstr "ثبت" #. button label -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:590 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:497 msgid "Select Extensions" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:600 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:507 msgid "<p>The system is already registered.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:601 -msgid "" -"<p>You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or " -"modules to enhance the functionality of the system.</p>" +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:508 +msgid "<p>You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or modules to enhance the functionality of the system.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:603 -msgid "" -"<p>If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE " -"Customer Center and remove the system manually there.</p>" +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:510 +msgid "<p>If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE Customer Center and remove the system manually there.</p>" msgstr "" #. error message -#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:627 +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:534 msgid "" "The base product was not found,\n" "check your system." msgstr "" -#. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "SUSEconnect" -#: src/clients/scc.rb:42 -msgid "Use '%s' instead of this YaST module." +#. TRANSLATORS: %s = bugzilla URL +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:538 +msgid "" +"The installation medium or the installer itself is seriously broken.\n" +"Report a bug at %s." msgstr "" -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:165 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:174 -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:194 -msgid "Contacting the SUSE Customer Center server" +#: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:541 +msgid "" +"Make sure a product is installed and /etc/products.d/baseproduct\n" +"is a symlink pointing to the base product .prod file." msgstr "" -#. register the base product -#. register addons -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:173 src/clients/scc_auto.rb:193 -msgid "Registering Product..." -msgid_plural "Registering Products..." -msgstr[0] "" +#. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "SUSEconnect" +#: src/clients/scc.rb:44 +msgid "Use '%s' instead of this YaST module." +msgstr "" #. popup message: registration finished properly -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:213 +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:208 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "Registration was successfull." msgstr "ثبت" -#. --------------------------------------------------------- -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:238 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Registration" -msgid "Extension or Module &Name" -msgstr "ثبت" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:267 -msgid "Really delete '%s'?" +#. remove possible duplicates +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:243 +msgid "SLP discovery failed, no server found" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:301 -msgid "Identifier" +#. more than one server found: let the user select, we cannot automatically +#. decide which one to use, asking user in AutoYast mode is not nice +#. but better than aborting the installation... +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:259 +msgid "Downloading SSL Certificate" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:301 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Registration" -msgid "Registration Code" -msgstr "ثبت" - -#. help text -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:311 -msgid "" -"<p>Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered " -"together with the base product.</p>" +#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:263 +msgid "Importing SSL Certificate" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:313 +#. display the extension selection dialog and wait for a button click +#. @return [Symbol] user input (:import, :cancel) +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:5 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:49 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" -msgid "Register Optional Extensions or Modules" -msgstr "ثبت" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:350 src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:5 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Registration" msgid "Product Registration" msgstr "ثبت" -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:352 -msgid "" -"<p>Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center " -"database,\n" -"enabling you to get online updates and technical support.\n" -"To register while installing automatically, select <b>Run Product " -"Registration</b>.</p>" -msgstr "" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:357 -msgid "" -"<p>If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL " -"of the server\n" -"and the location of the SMT certificate in <b>SMT Server Settings</b>. " -"Refer\n" -"to your SMT manual for further assistance.</p>" -msgstr "" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:365 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Registration" -msgid "Register the Product" -msgstr "ثبت" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:380 -msgid "Install Available Updates from Update Repositories" -msgstr "" - -#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:388 -msgid "Server Settings" -msgstr "" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:392 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Registration" -msgid "Find Registration Server Using SLP Discovery" -msgstr "ثبت" - -#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:397 -msgid "Use Specific Server URL Instead of the Default" -msgstr "" - -#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:404 -msgid "Optional SSL Server Certificate URL" -msgstr "" - -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:422 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Registration" -msgid "Register Extensions or Modules..." -msgstr "ثبت" - -#. remove possible duplicates -#: src/clients/scc_auto.rb:479 -msgid "SLP discovery failed, no server found" -msgstr "" - #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:9 msgid "Run registration during autoinstallation" msgstr "" @@ -397,8 +304,10 @@ msgstr "ثبت" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:17 -msgid "Email: %s" -msgstr "" +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "MAC Address: %1" +msgid "E-mail Address: %s" +msgstr "آدرسMAC:%1" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:19 #, fuzzy @@ -430,268 +339,234 @@ msgstr "" #: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:40 +msgid "SSL Certificate Fingerprint: %s" +msgstr "" + +#: src/data/registration/autoyast_summary.erb:48 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" msgid "Extensions and Modules" msgstr "ثبت" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:6 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_error.erb:6 msgid "Secure Connection Error" msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:10 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_error.erb:10 msgid "Details:" msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:14 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_error.erb:14 msgid "Failed Certificate Details" msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:16 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:153 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:4 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:35 msgid "Issued To" msgstr "" #. label followed by the SSL certificate identification -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:19 -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:28 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:178 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:7 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:16 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:61 msgid "Common Name (CN): " msgstr "" #. label followed by the SSL certificate identification -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:20 -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:29 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:180 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:8 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:17 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:63 msgid "Organization (O): " msgstr "" #. label followed by the SSL certificate identification -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:21 -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:30 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:182 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:9 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:18 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:65 msgid "Organization Unit (OU): " msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:25 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:156 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:13 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:36 msgid "Issued By" msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:34 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:22 msgid "Validity" msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:38 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:26 msgid "Issued On: " msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:41 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:29 msgid "WARNING: The certificate is not valid yet!" msgstr "" -#. label followed by the certificate expiration date -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:45 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:32 msgid "Expires On: " msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:48 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:35 msgid "WARNING: The certificate has expired!" msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:56 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:43 msgid "Serial Number: " msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:57 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:159 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:44 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:36 msgid "SHA1 Fingerprint: " msgstr "" -#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:59 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:161 +#: src/data/registration/certificate_summary.erb:46 +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:38 msgid "SHA256 Fingerprint: " msgstr "" #. Error popup -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:65 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:71 msgid "" "Network is not configured, the registration server cannot be reached.\n" "Do you want to configure the network now?" msgstr "" -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:71 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:77 msgid "Network error, check the network configuration." msgstr "" #. Error popup -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:76 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:82 msgid "Connection time out." msgstr "" -#. Error popup -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:83 +#. TRANSLATORS: additional hint for an error message +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:90 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Registration" +msgid "Check that this system is known to the registration server." +msgstr "ثبت" + +#. TRANSLATORS: additional hint for an error message +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:96 msgid "" -"The email address is not known or\n" -"the registration code is not valid." +"If you are upgrading from SLE11 make sure the SCC server\n" +"knows the old NCC registration. Synchronization from NCC to SCC\n" +"might take very long time.\n" +"\n" +"If the SLE11 system was installed recently you could log into\n" +"%s to speed up the synchronization process.\n" +"Just wait several minutes after logging in and then retry \n" +"the upgrade again." msgstr "" -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:85 +#. add the hint to the error details +#. Error popup +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:110 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:113 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:119 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:167 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" +msgid "Registration failed." +msgstr "ثبت" + +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:115 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Registration" msgid "Registration client error." msgstr "ثبت" -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:87 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:117 msgid "" "Registration server error.\n" "Retry registration later." msgstr "" -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:89 -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:126 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Registration" -msgid "Registration failed." -msgstr "ثبت" - -#. try to use a translatable message first, if not found then use -#. the original error message from openSSL -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:119 -msgid "Secure connection error: %s" +#. error message +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:158 +msgid "Received SSL Certificate does not match the expected certificate." msgstr "" #. %s are error details -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:143 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:184 msgid "Details: %s" msgstr "" -#. label follwed by a certificate description -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:152 -msgid "Certificate:" -msgstr "" - #. progress label -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:196 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:209 msgid "Importing the SSL certificate" msgstr "" -#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:197 +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:210 msgid "Importing '%s' certificate..." msgstr "" +#. try to use a translatable message first, if not found then use +#. the original error message from openSSL +#: src/lib/registration/connect_helpers.rb:228 +msgid "Secure connection error: %s" +msgstr "" + #. progress step title #: src/lib/registration/finish_dialog.rb:34 msgid "Storing Registration Configuration..." msgstr "" -#. return the boot command line parameter -#: src/lib/registration/helpers.rb:236 -msgid "Searching..." -msgstr "" - -#: src/lib/registration/helpers.rb:236 -msgid "Looking up local registration servers..." -msgstr "" - -#. error message, %s is URL -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:9 -msgid "" -"Cannot download SSL certificate from\n" -"%s" -msgstr "" - -#. autoyast support for certificates -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:11 -msgid "SSL Certificate Fingerprint" -msgstr "" - -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:12 -msgid "SSL Certificate Fingerprint: %s" -msgstr "" - -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:13 -msgid "Import File..." -msgstr "" - -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:14 +#. this is just a placeholder for texts which will/might be needed after the text freeze +#. TODO FIXME: remove this file before GM! +#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:8 msgid "SSL Certificate" msgstr "" -#. progress message -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:16 -msgid "Importing certificate..." +#. checkbox: use SLP discovery later again in the installed system +#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:10 +msgid "Use SLP Discovery Also Later in Installed System" msgstr "" -#. button label -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:18 -msgid "Download Available Extensions..." +#. indent size used in summary text +#: src/lib/registration/ssl_certificate_details.rb:35 +msgid "Certificate:" msgstr "" -# اینجه همان معنی نسخه است -#. table header: additial extension attributes for AutoYast -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:20 -#, fuzzy -#| msgid "Version" -msgid "Version" -msgstr "نسخه" - -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:21 -msgid "Architecture" -msgstr "" - -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:22 -msgid "Release Type" -msgstr "" - -#. error message, requested pattern cannot be installed -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:24 -msgid "Pattern '%s' was not found." -msgstr "" - -#. checkbox: use SLP discovery later again in the installed system -#. (missing autoyast feature) -#: src/lib/registration/new_messages.rb:27 -msgid "Use SLP Discovery Also Later in Installed System" -msgstr "" - #. create UI label for a base product #. @param [Hash] Product (hash from pkg-bindings) #. @return [String] UI Label -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:108 +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:119 msgid "Unknown product" msgstr "" #. error message -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:139 +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:152 msgid "Saving repository configuration failed." msgstr "" #. # error message #. error message -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:177 src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:188 +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:190 src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:201 msgid "Updating service '%s' failed." msgstr "" #. error message -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:183 +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:196 msgid "Adding service '%s' failed." msgstr "" #. error message -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:195 +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:208 msgid "Saving service '%s' failed." msgstr "" #. error message -#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:200 +#: src/lib/registration/sw_mgmt.rb:213 msgid "Refreshing service '%s' failed." msgstr "" #. dialog title #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:40 msgid "License Agreement" -msgstr "" +msgstr "تفاهم نامه" #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:41 msgid "Downloading Licenses..." @@ -699,13 +574,13 @@ #. ask user to accept an addon EULA #. @param addon [SUSE::Connect::Product] the addon -#. @return [Boolean] true if the EULA has been accepted -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:71 +#. @return [Symbol] :accepted, :back, :abort, :halt +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:73 msgid "Downloading License Agreement..." msgstr "" #. %s is an extension name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Software Development Kit" -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:83 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:85 msgid "" "Downloading the license for\n" "%s\n" @@ -713,11 +588,34 @@ msgstr "" #. %s is an extension name, e.g. "SUSE Linux Enterprise Software Development Kit" -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:92 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_eula_dialog.rb:94 msgid "%s License Agreement" msgstr "" #. dialog title +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:37 +msgid "Extension and Module Registration Codes" +msgstr "" + +#. help text +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:41 +msgid "" +"<p>Enter registration codes for the requested extensions or modules.</p>\n" +"<p>Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective extension or module.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. round the half up (more items in the first column for odd number of items) +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:87 +msgid "The extension you selected needs a separate registration code." +msgid_plural "The extensions you selected need separate registration codes." +msgstr[0] "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:92 +msgid "Enter the registration code into the field below." +msgid_plural "Enter the registration codes into the fields below." +msgstr[0] "" + +#. dialog title #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:39 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Registration" @@ -726,97 +624,224 @@ #. help text (1/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:42 -msgid "" -"<p>Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (2/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:45 -msgid "" -"<p>Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific " -"registration code.</p>" +msgid "<p>Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific registration code.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (3/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:48 -msgid "" -"<p>If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the " -"SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there.</p>" msgstr "" -#. FIXME make parameters -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:66 +#. always enable Back/Next, the dialog cannot be the first in workflow +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:67 msgid "Available Extensions and Modules" msgstr "" -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:68 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:69 msgid "Details" msgstr "" -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:71 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:72 msgid "Select an extension or a module to show details here" msgstr "" #. checkbox label for an unavailable extension #. (%s is an extension name) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:130 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:131 msgid "%s (not available)" msgstr "" #. check the addons requiring a reg. code -#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:210 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:212 msgid "YaST allows to select at most %s extensions or modules." msgstr "" +#. help text +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:33 +msgid "<p>Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together with the base product.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:36 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Registration" +msgid "Register Optional Extensions or Modules" +msgstr "ثبت" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:50 +msgid "Identifier" +msgstr "" + +# اینجه همان معنی نسخه است +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:51 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Version" +msgid "Version" +msgstr "نسخه" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:52 +msgid "Architecture" +msgstr "معماری" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:53 +msgid "Release Type" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:54 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Registration" +msgid "Registration Code" +msgstr "ثبت" + +#. button label +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:65 +msgid "Download Available Extensions..." +msgstr "" + +#. disable download on a non-registered system +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:119 +msgid "Really delete '%s'?" +msgstr "" + +#. replace the content +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:161 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Registration" +msgid "Extension or Module &Identifier" +msgstr "ثبت" + +# اینجه همان معنی نسخه است +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:162 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Version" +msgid "&Version" +msgstr "نسخه" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:163 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Architecture" +msgid "&Architecture" +msgstr "معماری" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:164 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Release Notes" +msgid "&Release Type" +msgstr "یادداشت راهنما" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:51 +msgid "" +"<p>Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center database,\n" +"enabling you to get online updates and technical support.\n" +"To register while installing automatically, select <b>Run Product Registration</b>.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:56 +msgid "" +"<p>If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL of the server\n" +"and the location of the SMT certificate in <b>SMT Server Settings</b>. Refer\n" +"to your SMT manual for further assistance.</p>" +msgstr "" + +#. FIXME the dialog should be created by external code before calling this +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:83 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Registration" +msgid "Register the Product" +msgstr "ثبت" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:100 +msgid "Install Available Updates from Update Repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:114 +msgid "Server Settings" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:118 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Registration" +msgid "Find Registration Server Using SLP Discovery" +msgstr "ثبت" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:123 +msgid "Use Specific Server URL Instead of the Default" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:130 +msgid "Optional SSL Server Certificate URL" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:139 +msgid "Optional SSL Server Certificate Fingerprint" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:141 +msgid "none" +msgstr "" + +#. Translators: Text for UI Label - capitalized +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:152 +msgid "SSL Certificate Fingerprint" +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:173 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Registration" +msgid "Register Extensions or Modules..." +msgstr "ثبت" + #. SSL error message -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:26 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:25 +msgid "Certificate has expired" +msgstr "" + +#. SSL error message +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:27 msgid "Self signed certificate" msgstr "" #. SSL error message -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:28 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:29 msgid "Self signed certificate in certificate chain" msgstr "" #. push button -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:95 +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:90 msgid "&Trust and Import" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (1/5) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:124 -msgid "" -"<p>Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the " -"authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data.</p>" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:118 +msgid "<p>Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (2/5) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:128 -msgid "" -"<p>You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known " -"certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the " -"issuer of the unknown certificate.</p>" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:122 +msgid "<p>You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the issuer of the unknown certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (3/5) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:133 -msgid "" -"<p>Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed " -"certificate.</p>" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:127 +msgid "<p>Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (4/5) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:137 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Important:</b> You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to " -"be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server.</p>" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:131 +msgid "<p><b>Important:</b> You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (5/5) -#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:142 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big " -"security risk.</b></p>" +#: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:136 +msgid "<p><b>Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security risk.</b></p>" msgstr "" #. error message, the entered URL is not valid @@ -831,6 +856,15 @@ msgid "&Local Registration Server URL" msgstr "ثبت" +#. return the boot command line parameter +#: src/lib/registration/url_helpers.rb:205 +msgid "Searching..." +msgstr "" + +#: src/lib/registration/url_helpers.rb:205 +msgid "Looking up local registration servers..." +msgstr "" + #, fuzzy #~| msgid "Registration" #~ msgid "Register Optional Add-ons" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/reipl.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/reipl.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/reipl.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: part of a shutdown message #. %1 is replaced with a device name #. Newline at the end is required -#: src/clients/reipl_bootloader_finish.rb:68 +#: src/clients/reipl_bootloader_finish.rb:64 msgid "" "\n" "After shutdown, reload the system\n" @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ #. %2 is replaced with a WWPN name #. %3 is replaced with a LUN name #. Newline at the end is required -#: src/clients/reipl_bootloader_finish.rb:91 +#: src/clients/reipl_bootloader_finish.rb:83 msgid "" "\n" "After shutdown, reload the system\n" @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ "and LUN '%3'.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/reipl_bootloader_finish.rb:105 +#: src/clients/reipl_bootloader_finish.rb:97 msgid "" "\n" "After shutdown, reload the system \n" @@ -241,30 +241,30 @@ #. Create a textual summary and a list of unconfigured cards #. @return summary of the current configuration -#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:342 +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:329 msgid "Configured reipl methods" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:349 +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:336 msgid "The method ccw is configured and being used." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:351 +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:338 msgid "The method ccw is configured." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:354 +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:341 msgid "The method ccw is not supported." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:362 +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:349 msgid "The method fcp is configured and being used." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:364 +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:351 msgid "The method fcp is configured." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:367 +#: src/modules/Reipl.rb:354 msgid "The method fcp is not supported." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/relocation-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/relocation-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/relocation-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:57+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/s390.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/s390.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/s390.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-client.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-client.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -156,9 +156,7 @@ #. help text, do not translate 'winbind uid', 'winbind gid' #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:174 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <b>Range</b> for Samba user and group IDs (<tt>winbind uid</" -"tt> and <tt>winbind gid</tt> values).</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Range</b> for Samba user and group IDs (<tt>winbind uid</tt> and <tt>winbind gid</tt> values).</p>" msgstr "" #. frame label @@ -383,8 +381,7 @@ #. continue/cancel popup #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:808 msgid "" -"Configuring this system as a client for Active Directory resets the " -"following\n" +"Configuring this system as a client for Active Directory resets the following\n" "settings in smb.conf to the default values:\n" "%1" msgstr "" @@ -465,8 +462,7 @@ #. translators: Samba workgroup dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"<p>A Linux client can be a member of a workgroup, NT domain, or Active " -"Directory domain.\n" +"<p>A Linux client can be a member of a workgroup, NT domain, or Active Directory domain.\n" "Specify the name of the membership.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -474,15 +470,13 @@ #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "<p><b>Use SMB Information for Linux Authentication</b> allows \n" -"verification of passwords with the NT server or the Kerberos server if " -"joining an AD domain.</p>\n" +"verification of passwords with the NT server or the Kerberos server if joining an AD domain.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Samba role dialog help 2.5/3 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:67 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Change primary DNS suffix</b> to add your AD server into the " -"list of name servers.\n" +"<p>Check <b>Change primary DNS suffix</b> to add your AD server into the list of name servers.\n" "This option is only available for static network setups.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -490,8 +484,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:71 msgid "" "<p>When you press <b>OK</b>, the system verifies the membership and,\n" -"if it is a NT or Active Directory domain, allows this host to join the " -"domain.</p>\n" +"if it is a NT or Active Directory domain, allows this host to join the domain.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. translators: Samba membership dialog help 1/2 (installation) @@ -508,28 +501,17 @@ #. Samba membership dialog help (common part 1/4) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:85 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Create Home Directory on Login</b> to have local home " -"directories created on the first login.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Create Home Directory on Login</b> to have local home directories created on the first login.</p>" msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog help (common part 2/4) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:89 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Offline Authentication</b> enables the user to log in even if there is " -"no connection to the domain controller. For this option to work, you must " -"log in to your domain at least once. The user's credentials are then stored " -"encrypted on your computer and are reused for a domain login when no " -"connection to the domain controller can be established. This is especially " -"useful for mobile users." +msgid "<p><b>Offline Authentication</b> enables the user to log in even if there is no connection to the domain controller. For this option to work, you must log in to your domain at least once. The user's credentials are then stored encrypted on your computer and are reused for a domain login when no connection to the domain controller can be established. This is especially useful for mobile users." msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog help (common part) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:93 -msgid "" -"<p>Click <b>Expert Settings</b> to enable advanced features such as WINS " -"options or mounting server home directories from Active Directory domains.</" -"p>" +msgid "<p>Click <b>Expert Settings</b> to enable advanced features such as WINS options or mounting server home directories from Active Directory domains.</p>" msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config @@ -540,18 +522,13 @@ #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"<p>Set the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b> that should be used for " -"joining\n" -"the selected domain during autoinstallation. Note that the password will be " -"saved to the profile in cleartext (unencrypted) form.</p>" +"<p>Set the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b> that should be used for joining\n" +"the selected domain during autoinstallation. Note that the password will be saved to the profile in cleartext (unencrypted) form.</p>" msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:105 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <b>Active Directory Server</b> to use for joining an Active " -"Directory domain. This is also used as the value for KDC in the Kerberos " -"configuration.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Active Directory Server</b> to use for joining an Active Directory domain. This is also used as the value for KDC in the Kerberos configuration.</p>" msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for possible NTP configuration @@ -670,9 +647,7 @@ #. help text for "Use WINS for Hostname Resolution" check box label #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:395 -msgid "" -"<p>If you want to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for " -"name resolution, check <b>Use WINS for Hostname Resolution</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you want to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for name resolution, check <b>Use WINS for Hostname Resolution</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. check box label @@ -682,9 +657,7 @@ #. help text ("Retrieve WINS server via DHCP" is a checkbox label) #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:412 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Retrieve WINS server via DHCP</b> to use a WINS server provided " -"by DHCP.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Retrieve WINS server via DHCP</b> to use a WINS server provided by DHCP.</p>" msgstr "" #. frame label @@ -720,55 +693,36 @@ #. membership dialog help (common part 3/4), %1 is separator (e.g. '\') #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:505 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Allow Users to Share Their Directories</b> enables members of the " -"group in <b>Permitted Group</b> to share directories they own with other " -"users. For example, <tt>users</tt> for a local scope or <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</" -"tt> for a domain scope. The user also must make sure that the file system " -"permissions allow access.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Allow Users to Share Their Directories</b> enables members of the group in <b>Permitted Group</b> to share directories they own with other users. For example, <tt>users</tt> for a local scope or <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</tt> for a domain scope. The user also must make sure that the file system permissions allow access.</p>" msgstr "" #. membership dialog help (common part 3/4) #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:511 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Maximum Number of Shares</b>, limit the total amount of shares " -"that may be created.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Maximum Number of Shares</b>, limit the total amount of shares that may be created.</p>" msgstr "" #. membership dialog help common part #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:516 -msgid "" -"<p>To permit access to user shares without authentication, enable <b>Allow " -"Guest Access</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To permit access to user shares without authentication, enable <b>Allow Guest Access</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for PAM Mount table #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:525 msgid "" "<p>In the table <b>Mount Server Directories</b>, you can specify server\n" -"directories (such as home directory) which should be locally mounted when " -"the\n" +"directories (such as home directory) which should be locally mounted when the\n" "user is logged in. If mounting should be user-specific, specify <b>User\n" -"Name</b> for the selected rule. Otherwise, the directory is mounted for each " -"user. For more information, see pam_mount.conf manual page.</p>" +"Name</b> for the selected rule. Otherwise, the directory is mounted for each user. For more information, see pam_mount.conf manual page.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for PAM Mount table: example #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:532 -msgid "" -"<p>For example, you may use <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> value for " -"<b>Remote Path</b>, <tt>~/</tt> value for <b>Local Mount Point</b> to mount " -"the home directory, together with a value <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> as a " -"part of <b>Options</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>For example, you may use <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> value for <b>Remote Path</b>, <tt>~/</tt> value for <b>Local Mount Point</b> to mount the home directory, together with a value <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> as a part of <b>Options</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for kerberos method option #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:540 -msgid "" -"<p>The value of <b>Kerberos Method</b> defines how kerberos tickets are " -"verified. When <b>Single Sing-on for SSH</b> is used, the default Kerberos " -"Method set by YaST is <tt>secrets and keytab</tt>. See smb.conf manual page " -"for details.</p>" +msgid "<p>The value of <b>Kerberos Method</b> defines how kerberos tickets are verified. When <b>Single Sing-on for SSH</b> is used, the default Kerberos Method set by YaST is <tt>secrets and keytab</tt>. See smb.conf manual page for details.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: initialization dialog caption Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-users.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-users.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/samba-users.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-03-02 16:08+0330\n" "Last-Translator: مصطفی برمشوری <mostafa.barmshor@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Farsi (Persian) <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/scanner.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/scanner.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/scanner.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/security.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/security.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/security.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:57+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/services-manager.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/services-manager.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/services-manager.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-18 16:19+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -17,12 +17,208 @@ "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +#: src/clients/default_target_finish.rb:33 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Searching for system files..." +msgid "Saving default systemd target..." +msgstr "در حال جستجو برای سیستم های فایل لینوکس ..." + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:26 +msgid "VNC needs graphical system to be available" +msgstr "" + #. TODO implement behaviour if force_reset parameter provided +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:51 +msgid "&Default systemd target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:52 +msgid "Default systemd target" +msgstr "" + +#. create the proposal dialog and get the sequence symbol from block +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:116 +msgid "Set Default Systemd Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:134 +msgid "Selecting the Default Systemd Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:136 +msgid "Systemd is a system and service manager for Linux. It consists of units whose job is to activate services and other units." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:139 +msgid "Default target unit is activated on boot by default. Usually it is a symlink located in path/etc/systemd/system/default.target . See more on systemd man page." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:143 +msgid "Multi-User target is for setting up a non-graphical multi-user system with network suitable for server (similar to runlevel 3)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:146 +msgid "Graphical target for setting up a graphical login screen with network which is typical for workstations (similar to runlevel 5)." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:149 +msgid "When you are not sure what would be the best option for you then go with graphical target." +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:160 +msgid "Available Targets" +msgstr "" + +#. Check if the user forced a particular target before; if he did and the +#. autodetection recommends a different one now, warn the user about this +#. and keep the default target unchanged. +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:219 +msgid "The installer is recommending you the default target '%s' " +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:231 +msgid "X11 packages have been selected for installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:234 +msgid "Live Installation is typically used for full GUI in target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:237 +msgid "Serial connection does typically not support GUI" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:241 +msgid "Text mode installation assumes no GUI on the target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:244 +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:248 +msgid "Using VNC assumes a GUI on the target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:251 +msgid "SSH installation mode assumes no GUI on the target system" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:254 +msgid "X11 packages have not been selected for installation" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/default_target_proposal.rb:257 +msgid "This recommendation is based on the analysis of other installation settings" +msgstr "" + +#. Default for double-click in the table +#. Default for double-click in the table +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:71 src/clients/services.rb:71 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Preparing configuration..." +msgid "Writing configuration..." +msgstr "در حال آماده سازی قالب بندی.." + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:76 src/clients/services.rb:76 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Writing the system configuration" +msgid "Writing the configuration failed:\n" +msgstr "نوشتن قالب بندی سیستم" + +#. Fills the dialog contents +#. Fills the dialog contents +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:91 src/clients/services.rb:91 +msgid "Default System &Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:99 src/clients/services.rb:99 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Service Start" +msgid "Service" +msgstr "آغاز سرویس" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:100 src/clients/services-manager.rb:130 +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:146 src/clients/services.rb:100 +#: src/clients/services.rb:130 src/clients/services.rb:146 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:16 +msgid "Enabled" +msgstr "فعال" + +#. The current state matches the futural state +#. The current state matches the futural state +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:101 src/clients/services-manager.rb:131 +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:156 src/clients/services.rb:101 +#: src/clients/services.rb:131 src/clients/services.rb:156 +msgid "Active" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:102 src/clients/services.rb:102 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "توضیحات" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:107 src/clients/services.rb:107 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "&Stop" +msgid "&Start/Stop" +msgstr "&توقف" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:109 src/clients/services.rb:109 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Disabled" +msgid "&Enable/Disable" +msgstr "غیر فعال" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:111 src/clients/services.rb:111 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "&Details..." +msgid "Show &Details" +msgstr "&جزییات..." + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:114 src/clients/services.rb:114 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:5 +msgid "Services Manager" +msgstr "" + +#. Redraws the services dialog +#. Redraws the services dialog +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:126 src/clients/services.rb:126 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Starting service %1..." +msgid "Reading services status..." +msgstr "درحال راه اندازی سرویس %1...." + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:130 src/clients/services-manager.rb:146 +#: src/clients/services.rb:130 src/clients/services.rb:146 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:23 +msgid "Disabled" +msgstr "غیر فعال" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:131 src/clients/services-manager.rb:156 +#: src/clients/services.rb:131 src/clients/services.rb:156 +msgid "Inactive" +msgstr "" + +#. The current state differs the the futural state +#. The current state differs the the futural state +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:163 src/clients/services.rb:163 +msgid "Active (will start)" +msgstr "" + +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:163 src/clients/services.rb:163 +msgid "Inactive (will stop)" +msgstr "" + +#. Opens up a popup with details about the currently selected service +#. Opens up a popup with details about the currently selected service +#: src/clients/services-manager.rb:190 src/clients/services.rb:190 +msgid "Service %{service} Full Info" +msgstr "" + +#. TODO implement behaviour if force_reset parameter provided #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:52 msgid "&Services" msgstr "" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:53 +#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:15 msgid "Services" msgstr "" @@ -35,18 +231,14 @@ #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:121 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Services</b></big><br>\n" -"This installation proposal allows you to start and enable a service from " -"the \n" +"This installation proposal allows you to start and enable a service from the \n" " list of services.</p>\n" -"<p>It may also open ports in the firewall for a service if firewall is " -"enabled\n" +"<p>It may also open ports in the firewall for a service if firewall is enabled\n" "and a particular service requires opening them.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:145 -msgid "" -"Service %service will be %toggled and port in firewall will be %switched " -"%link" +msgid "Service %service will be %toggled and port in firewall will be %switched %link" msgstr "" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:160 @@ -67,20 +259,68 @@ msgid "Cannot enable service %1" msgstr "" -#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:5 -msgid "Services Manager" -msgstr "" - #: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:6 msgid "Default Target" msgstr "" -#: src/data/services-manager/autoyast_summary.erb:9 -msgid "Enabled Services" -msgstr "" - #. Name of the systemd default target unit. Suffix '.target' is optional. #. @return [String] if the target has been specified in the profile. Can be nil. #: src/lib/services-manager/services_manager_profile.rb:104 msgid "Unknown autoyast services profile schema for 'services-manager'" msgstr "" + +#. AutoYast summary +#: src/modules/services_manager.rb:29 +msgid "Not configured yet." +msgstr "هنوز پیکربندی نشده." + +#. Do not start or stop services that are already in the desired state +#. they might be coming from AutoYast import and thus they are :modified. +#: src/modules/services_manager_service.rb:407 +msgid "Could not %{change} %{service} which is currently %{status}. " +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_service.rb:426 +msgid "Could not %{change} %{service}. " +msgstr "" + +#. Default systemd target (previously: runlevel 5) option #1 +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:22 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Graphics" +msgid "Graphical mode" +msgstr "گرافیک" + +#. Default systemd target (previously: runlevel 3) option #2 +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:24 +msgid "Text mode" +msgstr "" + +#. Systemd targets +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:27 +msgid "Graphical Interface" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:28 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Select Mode" +msgid "Emergency Mode" +msgstr "انتخاب حالت" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:29 +msgid "Switch Root" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:30 +msgid "Initrd Default Target" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:31 +msgid "Multi-User System" +msgstr "" + +#: src/modules/services_manager_target.rb:32 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Select Mode" +msgid "Rescue Mode" +msgstr "انتخاب حالت" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/slp-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/slp-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/slp-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:57+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/snapper.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/snapper.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/snapper.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -23,14 +23,14 @@ #. text entry label #. text entry label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:124 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:245 -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:492 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:130 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:251 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:490 msgid "Description" msgstr "توضیحات" #. text entry label #. text entry label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:130 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:291 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:136 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:297 #, fuzzy #| msgid "User ID" msgid "User data" @@ -38,39 +38,39 @@ #. combo box label #. text entry label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:138 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:296 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:144 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:302 msgid "Cleanup algorithm" msgstr "" #. popup label, %1 is number -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:152 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:158 msgid "Modify Snapshot %1" msgstr "" #. popup label, %1, %2 are numbers (range) -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:160 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:166 msgid "Modify Snapshots %1 - %2" msgstr "" #. label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:163 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:169 msgid "Pre (%1)" msgstr "" #. label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:167 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:173 msgid "Post (%1)" msgstr "" #. popup label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:243 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:249 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Create a New TSIG Key" msgid "Create New Snapshot" msgstr "ایجاد یک کلید TSIG جدید" #. radio button label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:256 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:262 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Creating list of finish scripts to call..." msgid "Single snapshot" @@ -78,134 +78,134 @@ #. radio button label #. 0 means there's no post -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:265 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:437 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:271 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:435 msgid "Pre" msgstr "" #. radio button label, snapshot selection will follow -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:275 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:281 msgid "Post, paired with:" msgstr "" #. yes/no popup question -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:346 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:352 msgid "Really delete snapshot '%1'?" msgstr "" #. summary dialog caption -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:359 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:365 msgid "Snapshots" msgstr "" #. generate list of snapshot table items -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:392 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:394 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Singapore" msgid "Single" msgstr "سنگاپور" #. pre canot be 0 -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:421 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:419 msgid "Pre & Post" msgstr "" #. busy popup message -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:456 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:454 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Creating list of finish scripts to call..." msgid "Reading list of snapshots..." msgstr "ایجاد لیست دست نویس های پایانی برای فراخانی..." #. combo box label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:477 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:475 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Automatic Configuration" msgid "Current Configuration" msgstr "قالب بندی خود کار" #. table header -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:488 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:486 msgid "ID" msgstr "" -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:489 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:487 msgid "Type" msgstr "نوع" -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:490 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:488 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Start &Update" msgid "Start Date" msgstr "آغاز به &روزرسانی" -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:491 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:489 msgid "End Date" msgstr "" -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:493 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:491 #, fuzzy #| msgid "User ID" msgid "User Data" msgstr "شناسه ی کاربر" #. button label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:499 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:497 msgid "Show Changes" msgstr "" #. button label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:502 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:500 msgid "Modify" msgstr "" #. popup message -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:544 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:542 msgid "" "This 'Pre' snapshot is not paired with any 'Post' one yet.\n" "Showing differences is not possible." msgstr "" #. dialog caption -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:590 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:588 msgid "Selected Snapshot Overview" msgstr "" #. '%1: %2' means 'ID: description', adapt the order if necessary -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:636 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:626 msgid "%1: %2" msgstr "" #. busy popup message -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:655 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:645 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Installing Packages..." msgid "Calculating changed files..." msgstr "درحال نصب بسته ها...." #. busy popup message -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:752 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:742 msgid "Calculating file modifications..." msgstr "" #. label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:760 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:750 msgid "New file was created." msgstr "" #. label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:764 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:754 #, fuzzy #| msgid "File name" msgid "File was removed." msgstr "نام پرونده" #. label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:769 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:759 msgid "File content was not changed." msgstr "" #. label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:775 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:765 #, fuzzy #| msgid "" #| "The path %1 does not exist.\n" @@ -216,95 +216,95 @@ "آیا مسیر ایجاد شود?\n" #. label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:781 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:771 msgid "File content was modified." msgstr "" #. text label, %1, %2 are file modes (like '-rw-r--r--') -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:791 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:781 msgid "File mode was changed from '%1' to '%2'." msgstr "" #. text label, %1, %2 are user names -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:806 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:796 msgid "File user ownership was changed from '%1' to '%2'." msgstr "" #. text label, %1, %2 are group names -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:822 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:812 msgid "File group ownership was changed from '%1' to '%2'." msgstr "" #. button label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:857 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:847 msgid "R&estore from First" msgstr "" #. button label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:859 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:849 msgid "Restore" msgstr "" -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:882 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:872 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Desktop Selection" msgid "Res&tore from Second" msgstr "انتخاب محیط کار" #. radio button label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:919 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:909 msgid "Show the difference between snapshot and current system" msgstr "" #. radio button label, snapshot selection will follow -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:931 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:921 msgid "Show the difference between current and selected snapshot:" msgstr "" #. radio button label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:978 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:968 msgid "Show the difference between first and second snapshot" msgstr "" #. radio button label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:989 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:979 msgid "Show the difference between first snapshot and current system" msgstr "" #. radio button label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1000 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:990 msgid "Show the difference between second snapshot and current system" msgstr "" #. label, date string will follow at the end of line -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1041 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1031 msgid "Time of taking the first snapshot:" msgstr "" #. label, date string will follow at the end of line -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1046 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1036 msgid "Time of taking the second snapshot:" msgstr "" #. label, date string will follow at the end of line -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1054 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1044 msgid "Time of taking the snapshot:" msgstr "" #. button label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1076 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1066 msgid "&Open" msgstr "" #. button label -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1122 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1112 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Desktop Selection" msgid "Restore Selected" msgstr "انتخاب محیط کار" #. yes/no question, %1 is file name, %2 is number -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1196 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1186 msgid "" "Do you want to delete the file\n" "\n" @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ #. yes/no question, %1 is file name, %2 is number #. yes/no question, %1 is file name, %2 is number -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1216 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1234 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1206 src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1224 msgid "" "Do you want to copy the file\n" "\n" @@ -325,19 +325,19 @@ msgstr "" #. popup message -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1269 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1259 msgid "No file was selected for restoring" msgstr "" #. popup headline -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1274 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1264 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Opening file..." msgid "Restoring files" msgstr "در حال باز کردن فایل..." #. popup message, %1 is snapshot number, %2 list of files -#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1277 +#: src/include/snapper/dialogs.rb:1267 msgid "" "<p>These files will be restored from snapshot '%1':</p>\n" "<p>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/sound.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/sound.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/sound.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:57+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/squid.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/squid.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/squid.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -1351,11 +1351,11 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: language name - combo box entry #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:53 msgid "Afrikaans" -msgstr "" +msgstr "آفریکانس" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:54 msgid "Arabic" -msgstr "" +msgstr "عربی" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:55 msgid "Armenian" @@ -1404,7 +1404,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:66 msgid "Persian" -msgstr "" +msgstr "فارسی" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:67 msgid "Finnish" @@ -1424,7 +1424,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:71 msgid "Indonesian" -msgstr "" +msgstr "اندونزیایی" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:72 msgid "Italian" @@ -1440,7 +1440,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:75 msgid "Latvian" -msgstr "" +msgstr "لتونیایی" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:76 msgid "Lithuanian" @@ -1448,7 +1448,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:77 msgid "Malay" -msgstr "" +msgstr "مالزیایی" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:78 msgid "Dutch" @@ -1509,7 +1509,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:90 msgid "Thai" -msgstr "" +msgstr "تایلندی" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:91 msgid "Turkish" @@ -1522,11 +1522,11 @@ #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:93 msgid "Uzbek" -msgstr "" +msgstr "ازبکی" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:94 msgid "Vietnamese" -msgstr "" +msgstr "ویتنامی" #: src/modules/SquidErrorMessages.rb:95 #, fuzzy Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/sshd.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/sshd.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/sshd.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:56+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/storage.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/storage.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/storage.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-09-29 18:07+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:117 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:123 #: src/clients/partitions_proposal.rb:105 msgid "" "No automatic proposal possible.\n" @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ #. this is the resize case #. #. this is the normal case -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:129 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:164 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:135 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:164 #: src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:178 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:185 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Write proxy settings" @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ msgstr "نوشتن تنظیمات proxy" #. help on suggested partitioning -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:159 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:165 msgid "" "<p>\n" "Your hard disks have been checked. The partition setup\n" @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ #. help text continued #. %1 is replaced by button text -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:169 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:175 msgid "" "<p>\n" "To make only small adjustments to the proposed\n" @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ msgstr "" #. help text continued -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:182 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:188 msgid "" "<p>\n" "If the suggestion does not fit your needs, create\n" @@ -136,15 +136,21 @@ #. Attention! besides the testsuite, AutoYaST is using this to turn off #. the proposal screen too. See inst_autosetup.ycp -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:226 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:232 msgid "Impossible to create the requested proposal." msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:230 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:449 +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:238 +msgid "Not enough space available to propose snapshots for root volume." +msgstr "" + +#. TRANSLATORS: popup error message +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:244 src/clients/inst_target_part.rb:449 msgid "Not enough space available to propose separate /home." msgstr "" -#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:314 +#: src/clients/inst_disk_proposal.rb:295 msgid "" "Computing this proposal will overwrite manual changes \n" "done so far. Continue with computing proposal?" @@ -517,8 +523,7 @@ #. normally the target is located on hard disks. Here no hard disks #. can be found. YaST2 cannot install. Update CD might have newer drivers. #: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:172 -msgid "" -"No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." +msgid "No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." msgstr "" #. There are several hard disks found. Linux is completely installed on @@ -771,7 +776,7 @@ #. Label text #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text #: src/include/partitioning/auto_part_ui.rb:341 -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6229 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6230 msgid "Propose Separate &Home Partition" msgstr "" @@ -907,22 +912,8 @@ msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:436 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:433 msgid "" -"Warning: With your current setup, your %1 installation\n" -"will encounter problems when booting, because you have no \"boot\"\n" -"partition and your \"root\" partition is an LVM logical volume.\n" -"This does not work.\n" -"\n" -"If you do not know exactly what you are doing, use a normal\n" -"partition for your files below /boot.\n" -"\n" -"Really use this setup?\n" -msgstr "" - -#. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:457 -msgid "" "Warning: With your current setup, your %2 installation\n" "will encounter problems when booting, because you have no\n" "FAT partition mounted on %1.\n" @@ -936,7 +927,7 @@ msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:479 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:455 msgid "" "Warning: With your current setup, your %2 installation will\n" "encounter problems when booting, because you have no \n" @@ -951,26 +942,25 @@ msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:502 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:478 msgid "Really use this setup?" msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:510 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:486 msgid "" "\n" "You have not assigned a swap partition. In most cases, we highly recommend \n" "to create and assign a swap partition.\n" "Swap partitions on your system are listed in the main window with the\n" -"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap" -"\".\n" +"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap\".\n" "You can assign more than one swap partition, if desired.\n" "\n" "Really use the setup without swap partition?\n" msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:526 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:502 msgid "" "\n" "You chose to install onto an existing partition that will not be\n" @@ -979,7 +969,7 @@ msgstr "" #. continued popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:533 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:509 msgid "" "- if this is an existing ReiserFS partition\n" "- if this partition already contains a Linux distribution that will be\n" @@ -988,16 +978,15 @@ msgstr "" #. continued popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:540 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:516 msgid "" "If in doubt, better go back and mark this partition for\n" -"formatting, especially if it is assigned to one of the standard mount " -"points\n" +"formatting, especially if it is assigned to one of the standard mount points\n" "like /, /boot, /opt or /var.\n" msgstr "" #. continued popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:546 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:522 msgid "" "If you decide to format the partition, all data on it will be lost.\n" "\n" @@ -1005,64 +994,62 @@ msgstr "" #. popup text %1 is replaced by a raid name e.g. md0 -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:601 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:577 msgid "" "The selected device belongs to the RAID (%1).\n" "Remove it from the RAID before editing it.\n" msgstr "" #. popup text %1 is replaced by a name e.g. system -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:612 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:588 msgid "" "The selected device belongs to a volume group (%1).\n" "Remove it from the volume group before editing it.\n" msgstr "" #. popup text %1 is replaced by a name e.g. system -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:622 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:598 msgid "" "The selected device is used by volume (%1).\n" "Remove the volume before editing it.\n" msgstr "" #. popup text %2 is a device name, %1 is the raid name -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:655 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:631 msgid "" "The device (%2) belongs to the RAID (%1).\n" "Remove it from the RAID before deleting it.\n" msgstr "" #. popup text, %1 and %2 are device names -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:666 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:642 msgid "" "The device (%2) is used by %1.\n" "Remove %1 before deleting it.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:678 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:654 msgid "It cannot be deleted while mounted." msgstr "" #. popup text, %1 is a device name -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:714 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:690 msgid "" "The device (%1) cannot be removed since it is a logical partition and \n" "another logical partition with a higher number is in use.\n" msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:790 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:766 msgid "" -"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently " -"mounted:\n" +"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the " -"extended partition.\n" +"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the extended partition.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" #. popup text, Do not translate LVM. -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:808 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:784 msgid "" "\n" "The selected extended partition contains at least one LVM partition\n" @@ -1072,7 +1059,7 @@ msgstr "" #. popup text, Do not translate RAID. -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:819 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:795 msgid "" "\n" "The selected extended partition contains at least one partition\n" @@ -1082,7 +1069,7 @@ msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:830 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:806 msgid "" "\n" "The selected extended partition contains at least one partition\n" @@ -1097,13 +1084,13 @@ #. label text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:75 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:766 -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6356 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:768 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6357 msgid "Do not forget what you enter here!" msgstr "" #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:79 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:769 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:771 msgid "Empty password allowed." msgstr "" @@ -1130,7 +1117,7 @@ #. Label: get password for user root #. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:137 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:794 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:796 msgid "&Enter a Password for your File System:" msgstr "" @@ -1141,7 +1128,7 @@ #. Label: get same password again for verification #. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:148 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:778 src/modules/Storage.rb:3996 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:780 src/modules/Storage.rb:3998 msgid "Reenter the Password for &Verification:" msgstr "" @@ -1161,7 +1148,7 @@ #. popup text #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:197 -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3952 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3954 msgid "" "You did not enter a password.\n" "Try again.\n" @@ -1170,7 +1157,7 @@ #. popup text #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:204 -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3960 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3962 msgid "" "The password must have at least %1 characters.\n" "Try again.\n" @@ -1199,8 +1186,7 @@ "Normally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" "by the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system \n" "to mount is found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file \n" -"systems can be mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is " -"disabled, \n" +"systems can be mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, \n" "this is not possible.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1208,8 +1194,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:480 msgid "" "<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" -"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1428,8 +1413,7 @@ msgid "" "The selected device contains partitions that are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the " -"partition table.\n" +"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the partition table.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1496,7 +1480,7 @@ #. TRANSLATOR: checkbox text #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1650 -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6210 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6211 msgid "Enable Snapshots" msgstr "" @@ -1507,21 +1491,21 @@ msgid "Subvolume Handling" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1721 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1724 msgid "Empty subvolume name not allowed." msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1725 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1728 msgid "" "Only subvolume names starting with \"%1\" currently allowed!\n" "Automatically prepending \"%1\" to name of subvolume." msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1734 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1738 msgid "Subvolume name %1 already exists." msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1765 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:1767 msgid "Modifications done so far in this dialog will be lost." msgstr "" @@ -1553,11 +1537,10 @@ #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:87 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:706 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:708 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/" -"tmp.\n" +"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/tmp.\n" "If you leave the encryption password empty, the system will create\n" "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose all\n" "data on these filesystems at system shutdown.\n" @@ -1567,11 +1550,10 @@ #. help text, continued #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:100 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:721 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:723 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file " -"system.\n" +"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file system.\n" "Choose your password carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure the password was entered correctly,\n" "enter it twice.\n" @@ -1581,11 +1563,10 @@ #. help text, continued #. helptext, %1 is replaced by integer #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:114 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:735 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:737 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have " -"at\n" +"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" "least %1 characters and, as a rule, not contain any special characters\n" "(e.g., letters with accents or umlauts).\n" "</p>\n" @@ -1604,7 +1585,7 @@ #. help text, continued #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:142 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:747 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:749 msgid "" "<p>\n" "Do not forget this password!\n" @@ -1623,8 +1604,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:159 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore " -"is\n" +"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore is\n" "not needed for the update, you may select <b>Skip</b>. In this case, the\n" "file system is not accessed during update.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -1725,8 +1705,7 @@ #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:259 -msgid "" -"Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." +msgid "Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." msgstr "" #. error popup text @@ -1780,12 +1759,12 @@ #. ////////////////////////////////////////////// #. modify map new -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:948 -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:975 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:954 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:981 msgid "The file system is currently mounted on %1." msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:953 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:959 msgid "" "You can try to unmount it now, continue without unmounting or cancel.\n" "Click Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing." @@ -1793,26 +1772,26 @@ #. button text #. button text -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:964 -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:989 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:970 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:995 msgid "Unmount" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:980 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:986 msgid "" "You can try to unmount it now or cancel.\n" "Click Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing." msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1026 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1032 msgid "It is not possible to shrink the file system while it is mounted." msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1039 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1045 msgid "It is not possible to extend the file system while it is mounted." msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1050 +#: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:1056 msgid "It is not possible to resize the file system while it is mounted." msgstr "" @@ -2247,8 +2226,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:114 msgid "" "<p>If you want to encrypt all data on the\n" -"volume, select <b>Encrypt Device</b>. Changing the encryption on an " -"existing\n" +"volume, select <b>Encrypt Device</b>. Changing the encryption on an existing\n" "volume will delete all data on it.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2260,47 +2238,47 @@ msgstr "" #. set globals -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:307 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:309 msgid "Formatting Options" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:315 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:317 msgid "Format partition" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:326 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:328 msgid "Do not format partition" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:342 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:344 msgid "Do not mount partition" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:361 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:363 msgid "Mounting Options" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:369 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:371 msgid "Mount partition" msgstr "" #. Column header -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:375 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:144 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:377 src/modules/StorageFields.rb:144 msgid "Mount Point" msgstr "" #. button text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:382 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:384 msgid "Fs&tab Options..." msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:556 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:558 msgid "Crypt files must be encrypted." msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:567 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:569 msgid "" "You chose to create the crypt file, but did not specify\n" "that it should be formatted. This does not make sense.\n" @@ -2309,17 +2287,17 @@ msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:583 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:585 msgid "Crypt files require a mount point." msgstr "" #. error popup -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:597 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:599 msgid "Tmpfs requires a mount point." msgstr "" #. helptext -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:681 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:683 msgid "" "<p>\n" "Keep in mind that this file system is only protected when it is not\n" @@ -2329,7 +2307,7 @@ msgstr "" #. helptext -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:694 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:696 msgid "" "<p>\n" "The file system used for this volume is swap. You can leave the encryption \n" @@ -2338,58 +2316,58 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:764 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:766 #, fuzzy #| msgid "All changes will be lost!" msgid "All data stored on the volume will be lost!" msgstr "تمام تغییرات از دست خواهد رفت؟" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:787 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:789 msgid "Password" msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:884 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:886 msgid "Resize not supported by underlying device." msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:889 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:891 msgid "" "\n" "You cannot resize the selected partition because the file system\n" "on this partition does not support resizing.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:913 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:915 msgid "" "It is not possible to check whether a NTFS\n" "can be resized while it is mounted." msgstr "" #. FIXME: Really? -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:932 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:934 msgid "" "Partition %1 cannot be resized\n" "because the filesystem seems to be inconsistent.\n" msgstr "" #. Heading for dialog -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:959 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:961 msgid "Resize Partition %1" msgstr "" #. Heading for dialog -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:980 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:982 msgid "Resize Logical Volume %1" msgstr "" #. size_k + min_size_k could be > max_size_k -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1012 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1014 msgid "Current size: %1" msgstr "" -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1024 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1026 msgid "Currently used: %1" msgstr "" @@ -2397,8 +2375,8 @@ #. input field label #. combo box label #. Column header -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1037 -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1074 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1039 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1076 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:256 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:118 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:559 @@ -2410,33 +2388,33 @@ #. radio button text, %1 is replaced by size #. radio button text, %1 is replaced by size -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1047 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1049 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:242 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:535 msgid "Maximum Size (%1)" msgstr "" #. radio button text, %1 is replaced by size -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1057 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1059 msgid "Minimum Size (%1)" msgstr "" #. radio button text #. radio button text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1066 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1068 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:251 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:568 msgid "Custom Size" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1100 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1102 msgid "<p>Choose new size.</p>" msgstr "" #. error popup, %1 and %2 are replaced by sizes #. error popup, %1 and %2 are replaced by sizes -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1151 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1153 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-dialogs.rb:359 #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:692 msgid "The size entered is invalid. Enter a size between %1 and %2." @@ -2446,7 +2424,7 @@ #. after user tries to do that is stupid - in some cases #. we can tell beforehand, thus user should never get to this #. point (e.g. when the partition is mounted) -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1194 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1196 msgid "" "You are extending a mounted filesystem by %1 Gigabyte. \n" "This may be quite slow and can take hours. You might possibly want \n" @@ -2455,12 +2433,12 @@ msgstr "" #. label for log view -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1270 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1272 msgid "Output of %1" msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1297 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:1299 msgid "Rescanning disks..." msgstr "" @@ -2711,7 +2689,7 @@ #. error popup #. TRANSLATORS: error popup -#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:51 src/modules/Storage.rb:5162 +#: src/include/partitioning/ep-hd-lib.rb:51 src/modules/Storage.rb:5164 msgid "The disk is in use and cannot be modified." msgstr "" @@ -3201,8 +3179,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:36 msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b>Path Name of Loop File:</b><br>This must be an absolute path to the " -"file\n" +"<p><b>Path Name of Loop File:</b><br>This must be an absolute path to the file\n" "containing the data for the encrypted loop device to set up.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3467,8 +3444,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:491 msgid "" "<p>Enter the size as well as the number and size\n" -"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be " -"higher\n" +"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be higher\n" "than the number of physical volumes of the volume group.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -3514,8 +3490,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:778 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Normal Volume</b>.\n" -"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before " -"the feature of <b>Thin Provisioning</b> existed.\n" +"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before the feature of <b>Thin Provisioning</b> existed.\n" "If in doubt this is most probably the right choice</p>" msgstr "" @@ -3523,16 +3498,14 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:787 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Pool</b>.\n" -"This means <b>Thin Volumes</b> allocate their needed space on demand from " -"such a pool.</p>" +"This means <b>Thin Volumes</b> allocate their needed space on demand from such a pool.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:794 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Volume</b>.\n" -"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a <b>Thin Pool</" -"b>.</p>" +"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a <b>Thin Pool</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. heading for frame @@ -3589,8 +3562,7 @@ msgid "" "There are not enough suitable unused devices to create a volume group.\n" "\n" -"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one " -"unused\n" +"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one unused\n" "RAID device is required. Change your partition table accordingly." msgstr "" @@ -3808,9 +3780,7 @@ #. fallback dialog content #: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:55 -msgid "" -"NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package " -"installation." +msgid "NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package installation." msgstr "" #. heading @@ -3840,18 +3810,15 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:87 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 0:</b> This level increases your disk performance.\n" -"There is <b>NO</b> redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, " -"data recovery will not be possible.</p>\n" +"There is <b>NO</b> redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, data recovery will not be possible.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:95 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 1:</b> <br>This mode has the best redundancy. It can be\n" -"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data " -"on all\n" -"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The " -"partitions\n" +"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on all\n" +"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The partitions\n" "used for this type of RAID should have approximately the same size.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3859,10 +3826,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:106 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 5:</b> <br>This mode combines management of a larger number\n" -"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three " -"disks or more.\n" -"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail " -"simultaneously, all data is lost</p>\n" +"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three disks or more.\n" +"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail simultaneously, all data is lost</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext @@ -3877,10 +3842,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:126 msgid "" "<p>Add partitions to your RAID. According to\n" -"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), " -"the size\n" -"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).</" -"p>\n" +"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), the size\n" +"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext @@ -3943,10 +3906,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:338 msgid "" "<p><b>Chunk Size:</b><br>It is the smallest \"atomic\" mass\n" -"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID " -"5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" -"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect " -"the array very much.</p>\n" +"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID 5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" +"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect the array very much.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:346 @@ -3957,8 +3918,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:353 msgid "" "The parity algorithm to use with RAID5/6.\n" -"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks " -"with rotating platters.\n" +"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks with rotating platters.\n" msgstr "" #. helptext @@ -4224,11 +4184,9 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Default Mount by</b> gives the mount by\n" "method for newly created file systems. <i>Device Name</i> uses the kernel\n" -"device name, which is not persistent. <i>Device ID</i> and <i>Device Path</" -"i>\n" +"device name, which is not persistent. <i>Device ID</i> and <i>Device Path</i>\n" "use names generated by udev from hardware information. These should be\n" -"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally <i>UUID</i> " -"and\n" +"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally <i>UUID</i> and\n" "<i>Volume Label</i> use the file systems UUID and label.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -4243,9 +4201,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:217 msgid "" "<p><b>Alignment of Newly Created Partitions</b>\n" -"determines how created partitions are aligned. <b>cylinder</b> is the " -"traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. <b>optimal</b> " -"aligns the \n" +"determines how created partitions are aligned. <b>cylinder</b> is the traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. <b>optimal</b> aligns the \n" "partitions for best performance according to hints provided by the Linux \n" "kernel or tries to be compatible with Windows Vista and Win 7.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -4500,8 +4456,7 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:316 msgid "" "<p>This dialog is for defining classes for the raid devices\n" -"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many " -"cases\n" +"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many cases\n" "fewer classes are needed (e.g. only A and B). </p>" msgstr "" @@ -4509,12 +4464,9 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:325 msgid "" "<p>You can put a device into a class by right-clicking on the\n" -"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing " -"the \n" -"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class " -"in\n" -"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put " -"currently \n" +"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the \n" +"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class in\n" +"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put currently \n" "selected devices into this class.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -4537,8 +4489,7 @@ msgid "" "<b>Interleaved</b> uses first device of class A, then first device of \n" "class B, then all the following classes with assigned devices. Then the \n" -"second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will " -"follow." +"second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will follow." msgstr "" #. dialog help text @@ -4553,16 +4504,12 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:379 msgid "" "By pressing button \"<b>%1</b>\" you can select a file that contains\n" -"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All " -"devices that match \n" -"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular " -"expression is \n" +"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All devices that match \n" +"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular expression is \n" "matched against the kernel name (e.g. /dev/sda1), \n" -"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-" -"part1) and the\n" +"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) and the\n" "the udev id (e.g. /dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1). \n" -"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more " -"then one\n" +"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more then one\n" "regular expression.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -4598,8 +4545,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:295 msgid "" "<p><b>Tmpfs Size:</b>\n" -"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or " -"Gigabyte or\n" +"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or Gigabyte or\n" "as a number followed by a percent sign meaning percentage of memory.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -4621,67 +4567,64 @@ msgstr "" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:478 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:479 msgid "Mount &Read-Only" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:482 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:483 msgid "" "<p><b>Mount Read-Only:</b>\n" -"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During " -"installation\n" +"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During installation\n" "the file system is always mounted read-write.</p>" msgstr "" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:494 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:495 msgid "No &Access Time" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:498 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:499 msgid "" "<p><b>No Access Time:</b>\n" "Access times are not updated when a file is read. Default is false.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:508 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:509 msgid "Mountable by &User" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:512 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:513 msgid "" "<p><b>Mountable by User:</b>\n" "The file system may be mounted by an ordinary user. Default is false.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:525 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:526 msgid "Do Not Mount at System &Start-up" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:531 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:532 msgid "" "<p><b>Do Not Mount at System Start-up:</b>\n" "The file system is not automatically mounted when the system starts.\n" "An entry in /etc/fstab is created and the file system is mounted\n" -"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></" -"tt>\n" -"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is " -"mounted). Default is false.</p>\n" +"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></tt>\n" +"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is mounted). Default is false.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:548 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:549 msgid "Enable &Quota Support" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:554 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:555 msgid "" "<p><b>Enable Quota Support:</b>\n" "The file system is mounted with user quotas enabled.\n" @@ -4689,231 +4632,214 @@ msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:573 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:574 msgid "Data &Journaling Mode" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:582 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:583 msgid "" "<p><b>Data Journaling Mode:</b>\n" "Specifies the journaling mode for file data.\n" "<tt>journal</tt> -- All data is committed to the journal prior to being\n" "written into the main file system. Highest performance impact.<br>\n" "<tt>ordered</tt> -- All data is forced directly out to the main file system\n" -"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance " -"impact.<br>\n" -"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact." -"</p>\n" +"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance impact.<br>\n" +"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:603 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:604 msgid "&Access Control Lists (ACL)" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:607 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:608 msgid "" "<p><b>Access Control Lists (ACL):</b>\n" "Enable access control lists on the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. button text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:618 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:619 msgid "&Extended User Attributes" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:622 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:623 msgid "" "<p><b>Extended User Attributes:</b>\n" "Allow extended user attributes on the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:639 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:640 msgid "Arbitrary Option &Value" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:644 -msgid "" -"Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try " -"again." +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:645 +msgid "Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try again." msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:648 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:649 msgid "" "<p><b>Arbitrary Option Value:</b>\n" -"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /" -"etc/fstab.\n" +"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /etc/fstab.\n" "Multiple options are separated by commas.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:665 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:666 msgid "Char&set for file names" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:686 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:687 msgid "" "<p><b>Charset for File Names:</b>\n" "Set the charset used for display of file names in Windows partitions.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:697 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:698 msgid "Code&page for short FAT names" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:703 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:704 msgid "" "<p><b>Codepage for Short FAT Names:</b>\n" -"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file " -"systems.</p>\n" +"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file systems.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:717 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:718 msgid "Number of &FATs" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:723 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:724 msgid "" "<p><b>Number of FATs:</b>\n" -"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default " -"is 2.</p>" +"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default is 2.</p>" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:732 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:733 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Size" msgid "FAT &Size" msgstr "اندازه" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:743 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:744 msgid "" "<p><b>FAT Size:</b>\n" -"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If " -"auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable " -"for the file system size.</p>\n" +"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for the file system size.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:752 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:753 msgid "Root &Dir Entries" msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:760 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:761 msgid "The minimum size for \"Root Dir Entries\" is 112. Try again." msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:764 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:765 msgid "" "<p><b>Root Dir Entries:</b>\n" "Select the number of entries available in the root directory.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:777 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:778 msgid "Hash &Function" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:784 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:785 msgid "" "<p><b>Hash Function:</b>\n" -"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names " -"in directories.</p>\n" +"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in directories.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:793 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:794 msgid "FS &Revision" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:800 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:801 msgid "" "<p><b>FS Revision:</b>\n" -"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for " -"backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more " -"recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to " -"2.4.</p>\n" +"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to 2.4.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:813 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:977 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:814 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:978 msgid "Block &Size in Bytes" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:820 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:821 msgid "" "<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, " -"2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size " -"of 4096 is used.</p>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size of 4096 is used.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:829 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1059 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:830 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1060 msgid "&Inode Size" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:835 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1065 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:836 src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1066 msgid "" "<p><b>Inode Size:</b>\n" "This option specifies the inode size of the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:844 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:845 msgid "&Percentage of Inode Space" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:872 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:873 msgid "" "<p><b>Percentage of Inode Space:</b>\n" -"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of " -"space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.</p>\n" +"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:881 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:882 msgid "Inode &Aligned" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:887 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:888 msgid "" "<p><b>Inode Aligned:</b>\n" -"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is " -"or\n" +"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is or\n" "is not aligned. By default inodes are aligned, which\n" "is usually more efficient than unaligned access.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:917 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:918 msgid "&Log Size in Megabytes" msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:926 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:927 msgid "" "The \"Log Size\" value is incorrect.\n" "Enter a value greater than zero.\n" @@ -4921,32 +4847,31 @@ #. xgettext: no-c-format #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:931 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:932 msgid "" "<p><b>Log Size</b>\n" -"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the " -"aggregate size.</p>\n" +"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate size.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:939 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:940 msgid "Invoke Bad Blocks List &Utility" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:953 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:954 msgid "Stride &Length in Blocks" msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:961 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:962 msgid "" "The \"Stride Length in Blocks\" value is invalid.\n" "Select a value greater than 1.\n" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:965 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:966 msgid "" "<p><b>Stride Length in Blocks:</b>\n" "Set RAID-related options for the file system. Currently, the only supported\n" @@ -4955,21 +4880,19 @@ msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:984 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:985 msgid "" "<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, " -"and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined " -"by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.</p>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:993 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:994 msgid "Bytes per &Inode" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:999 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1000 msgid "" "<p><b>Bytes per Inode:</b> \n" "Specify the bytes to inode ratio. YaST creates an inode for every\n" @@ -4977,18 +4900,17 @@ "bytes-per-inode ratio, the fewer inodes will be created. Generally, this\n" "value should not be smaller than the block size of the file system, or else\n" "too many inodes will be created. It is not possible to expand the number of\n" -"inodes on a file system after its creation. So be sure to enter a " -"reasonable\n" +"inodes on a file system after its creation. So be sure to enter a reasonable\n" "value for this parameter.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1015 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1016 msgid "Percentage of Blocks &Reserved for root" msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1025 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1026 msgid "" "The \"Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root\" value is incorrect.\n" "Allowed are float numbers no larger than 99 (e.g. 0.5).\n" @@ -4996,49 +4918,44 @@ #. xgettext: no-c-format #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1030 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root:</b> Specify the percentage of " -"blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally " -"1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved " -"default is 0.1.</p>" +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1031 +msgid "<p><b>Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root:</b> Specify the percentage of blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally 1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved default is 0.1.</p>" msgstr "" #. checkbox text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1039 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1040 msgid "Disable Regular Checks" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1047 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1048 msgid "" "<p><b>Disable Regular Checks:</b>\n" "Disable regular file system check at booting.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1074 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1075 msgid "&Directory Index Feature" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1081 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1082 msgid "" "<p><b>Directory Index:</b>\n" "Enables use of hashed b-trees to speed up lookups in large directories.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1093 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1094 msgid "&No Journal" msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format -#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1100 +#: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1101 msgid "" "<p><b>No Journal:</b>\n" -"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you " -"really\n" +"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you really\n" "know what you are doing.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -5111,7 +5028,7 @@ #. mark swap-partitions with pseudo Mountpoint swap in targetMap #. @param [Hash{String => map}] target Disk map #. @return [Hash{String => map}] modified target -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:2704 src/modules/Storage.rb:3909 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:2706 src/modules/Storage.rb:3911 msgid "" "Could not set encryption.\n" "System error code is %1.\n" @@ -5120,7 +5037,7 @@ msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3940 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3942 msgid "" "The first and the second version\n" "of the password do not match.\n" @@ -5128,7 +5045,7 @@ msgstr "" #. popup text -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3971 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:3973 msgid "" "The password may only contain the following characters:\n" "0..9, a..z, A..Z, and any of \"@#* ,.;:._-+=!$%&/|?{[()]}^\\<>\".\n" @@ -5137,24 +5054,24 @@ #. Label: get password for encrypted volume #. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4025 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4027 msgid "&Enter Encryption Password:" msgstr "" #. Clear password fields on every round. -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4084 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4086 msgid "Provide Password" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4103 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4105 msgid "The following encrypted volumes are already available." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4118 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4120 msgid "Encrypted Volume Activation" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4122 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4124 msgid "" "The following volumes contain an encryption signature but the \n" "passwords are not yet known.\n" @@ -5162,12 +5079,12 @@ "during an update or if they contain an encrypted LVM physical volume." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4134 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4136 msgid "Do you want to provide encryption passwords?" msgstr "" #. text in help field -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4191 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4193 msgid "" "Enter encryption password for any of the\n" "devices in the locked devices list.\n" @@ -5175,87 +5092,86 @@ msgstr "" #. header text -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4197 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4199 msgid "Enter Encryption Password" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4200 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4202 msgid "There are no encrypted volume to unlock." msgstr "" #. label text, multiple device names follow -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4213 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4215 msgid "Provide password for any of the following devices:" msgstr "" #. label text, one device name follows -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4216 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4218 msgid "Provide password for the following device:" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4229 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4231 msgid "Trying to unlock encrypted volumes..." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4253 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4255 msgid "Password did not unlock any volume." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4339 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4341 msgid "IDE Disk" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4345 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4347 msgid "SCSI Disk" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4351 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4353 msgid "Disk" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4379 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4381 msgid "DM RAID" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4392 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:4394 msgid "MD RAID" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: error popup -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5174 -msgid "" -"Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5176 +msgid "Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5200 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5202 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be modified because it contains activated swap\n" "that is needed to run the installation.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5214 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5216 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be modified because it contains the installation\n" "data needed to perform the installation.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5243 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5245 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be removed because it contains activated swap\n" "that is needed to run the installation.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5252 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5254 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be removed because it contains the installation\n" "data needed to perform the installation.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5281 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5283 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be removed because this would indirectly change\n" @@ -5263,7 +5179,7 @@ "the installation.\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5292 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5294 msgid "" "\n" "Device %1 cannot be removed because this would indirectly change\n" @@ -5271,7 +5187,7 @@ msgstr "" #. the check for verbose is needed for calls from StorageProposal (see bnc#871779) -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5314 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5316 msgid "" "\n" "Partition %1 cannot be removed since other partitions on the\n" @@ -5279,18 +5195,18 @@ msgstr "" #. FIXME: please, add description of the list that is returned by this function. -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5403 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5405 msgid "Nothing assigned as root filesystem!" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5404 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:5406 msgid "Installation will most certainly fail fatally!" msgstr "" #. Set rather than Add, there might be some packs left over #. from previous 'MakeProposal' we don't need now #. This also covers the case when AddPackagesList returns [] or nil -#: src/modules/Storage.rb:6006 +#: src/modules/Storage.rb:6008 msgid "Adding the following resolvables failed: %1" msgstr "" @@ -5524,8 +5440,7 @@ #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:346 msgid "" "<b>Mount by</b> indicates how the file system\n" -"is mounted: (Kernel) by kernel name, (Label) by file system label, (UUID) " -"by\n" +"is mounted: (Kernel) by kernel name, (Label) by file system label, (UUID) by\n" "file system UUID, (ID) by device ID, and (Path) by device path.\n" msgstr "" @@ -5534,8 +5449,7 @@ msgid "" "A question mark (?) indicates that\n" "the file system is not listed in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>. It is either mounted\n" -"manually or by some automount system. When changing settings for this " -"volume\n" +"manually or by some automount system. When changing settings for this volume\n" "YaST will not update <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>.\n" msgstr "" @@ -5550,8 +5464,7 @@ #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:374 msgid "" "An asterisk (*) after the mount point\n" -"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because " -"it\n" +"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because it\n" "has the <tt>noauto</tt> option set in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>)." msgstr "" @@ -5893,52 +5806,50 @@ #. enable snapshots for root volume if desired #. penalty for not having separate /home -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:4551 src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:5674 -msgid "" -"Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system " -"under Windows." +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:4552 src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:5675 +msgid "Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system under Windows." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6163 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6164 msgid "Create &LVM-based Proposal" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6178 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6179 msgid "Encr&ypt Volume Group" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: combobox label -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6196 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6197 msgid "File System for Root Partition" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: combobox label -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6243 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6244 msgid "File System for Home Partition" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6261 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6262 msgid "Enlarge &Swap for Suspend" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6271 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6272 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Write proxy settings" msgid "Proposal Settings" msgstr "نوشتن تنظیمات proxy" #. TRANSLATORS: help text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6286 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6287 msgid "" "<p>To create an LVM-based proposal, choose the corresponding button. The\n" "LVM-based proposal can be encrypted.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: help text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6293 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6294 msgid "" "<p>The filesystem for the root partition can be selected with the\n" "corresponding combo box. With the filesystem BtrFS the proposal can\n" @@ -5947,32 +5858,32 @@ msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: help text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6302 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6303 msgid "" "<p>The proposal can create a separate home partition. The filesystem for\n" "the home partition can be selected with the corresponding combo box.</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: help text -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6309 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6310 msgid "" "<p>The swap partition can be made large enough to be used to suspend\n" "the system to disk in most cases.</p>" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6334 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6335 msgid "Enter your password for the proposal encryption." msgstr "" #. Label: get password for user root #. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6341 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6342 msgid "Password:" msgstr "" #. Label: get same password again for verification #. Please use newline if label is longer than 40 characters -#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6352 +#: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:6353 msgid "Reenter the password for verification:" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/sudo.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/sudo.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/sudo.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:42+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/support.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/support.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/support.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: opensuse-i 18n\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" "Last-Translator: Automatically generated\n" "Language-Team: none\n" @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:708 msgid "Name" -msgstr "" +msgstr "نام" #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:715 msgid "Phone Number" @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:866 msgid "Progress" -msgstr "" +msgstr "پیش رفت" #: src/include/support/dialogs.rb:931 msgid "Collected Data Review" @@ -325,10 +325,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p><b><big>Opening SUSE Support Center</big></b><br>\n" -"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use " -"<b>Open SUSE Support Center</b>.\n" -"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure " -"you write down\n" +"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use <b>Open SUSE Support Center</b>.\n" +"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure you write down\n" "the Service Request number to include in the supportconfig data upload.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -351,8 +349,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:90 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Supportconfig Options</big></b><br>\n" -"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default " -"settings,\n" +"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default settings,\n" "gather the most data or only gather a minimum amount of data." msgstr "" @@ -369,38 +366,31 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Options</big></b><br>\n" "Collect additional information. Usually these options are not\n" -"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.</" -"p>\n" +"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Expert dialog help 1/1 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:108 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Default Options</b></big><br>\n" -"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the " -"supportconfig tarball.</p>" +"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the supportconfig tarball.</p>" msgstr "" #. Contact dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:112 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Contact Information</b></big><br>\n" -"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to " -"include\n" -"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment." -"txt file.</p>" +"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to include\n" +"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment.txt file.</p>" msgstr "" #. Contact dialog help 2/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload Information</big></b><br>\n" -"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported " -"upload services include\n" -"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball " -"filename in your upload target,\n" -"use the <i>tarball</i> keyword. This will get replaced with the actual " -"tarball filename.\n" +"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported upload services include\n" +"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball filename in your upload target,\n" +"use the <i>tarball</i> keyword. This will get replaced with the actual tarball filename.\n" "See <i>man supportconfig(1)</i> for further details.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -408,8 +398,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:126 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload Target Examples</big></b><br>\n" -"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=<i>tarball</" -"i><br>\n" +"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=<i>tarball</i><br>\n" "ftp://ftp.novell.com/incoming<br>\n" "scp://central.server.foo.com/supportconfig/archives</p>" msgstr "" @@ -417,10 +406,8 @@ #. Contact dialog help 4/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:133 msgid "" -"<p><b>Note:</b> If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global " -"Technical Support,\n" -"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open " -"service request.\n" +"<p><b>Note:</b> If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support,\n" +"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open service request.\n" msgstr "" #. Collecting data dialkog help 1/1 @@ -434,16 +421,14 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:141 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Collected Data Review</big></b><br>\n" -"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some " -"of the collected data,\n" +"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some of the collected data,\n" "use <b>Remove from Data</b> and the selected file will be removed.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Configure1 dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:148 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></" -"b><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b><br>\n" "If you want to store a copy of the supportconfig tarball, select the target\n" "directory and make sure that this option is checked.\n" "<br></p>\n" @@ -454,8 +439,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:155 src/include/support/helps.rb:180 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload URL</big></b><br>\n" -"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be " -"uploaded\n" +"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded\n" "as default value.\n" "Change this value only in special cases.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -472,8 +456,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></" -"b><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b><br>\n" "If you have already created the supportconfig tarball, write the full path\n" "into the <i>Package with log files</i> field.\n" "<br></p>\n" @@ -554,15 +537,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:57 -msgid "" -"System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env." -"txt" +msgid "System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:60 -msgid "" -"Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files " -"in /etc. etc.txt" +msgid "Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files in /etc. etc.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:63 @@ -582,9 +561,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:75 -msgid "" -"Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX " -"Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" +msgid "Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:78 @@ -640,9 +617,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:117 -msgid "" -"Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account " -"information. pam.txt" +msgid "Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account information. pam.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:120 @@ -662,9 +637,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:132 -msgid "" -"System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR " -"data files. sar.txt" +msgid "System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR data files. sar.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:135 @@ -677,10 +650,8 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:141 msgid "" -"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for " -"hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" -"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to " -"read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" +"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" +"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" "works in your environment before enabling this option. fs-smartmon.txt\n" msgstr "" @@ -713,21 +684,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:167 -msgid "" -"Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances " -"files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" +msgid "Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:170 -msgid "" -"A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" +msgid "A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:173 -msgid "" -"Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just " -"VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if " -"available. -l" +msgid "Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if available. -l" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:176 @@ -735,21 +700,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option " -"minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." +msgid "Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:182 -msgid "" -"Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to " -"complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" +msgid "Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:185 -msgid "" -"Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you " -"to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" +msgid "Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:188 @@ -769,47 +728,33 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:200 -msgid "" -"The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the " -"entire file." +msgid "The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the entire file." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:203 -msgid "" -"The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is " -"always used." +msgid "The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is always used." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:206 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the " -"entire file." +msgid "The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the entire file." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:209 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the " -"supportconfig tarball." +msgid "The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:212 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." +msgid "The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:215 msgid "" -"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if " -"you\n" -"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -" -"Q." +"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if you\n" +"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -Q." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:218 -msgid "" -"Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using " -"the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports " -"anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." +msgid "Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." msgstr "" #. Initialization dialog caption @@ -820,7 +765,7 @@ #. Initialization dialog contents #: src/include/support/wizards.rb:149 msgid "Initializing..." -msgstr "" +msgstr "در حال مقدار دهی اولیه..." #. global string created_directory=""; #: src/modules/Support.rb:143 @@ -868,7 +813,7 @@ #. Progress finished #: src/modules/Support.rb:339 msgid "Finished" -msgstr "" +msgstr "پایان" #. TODO FIXME: your code here... #. Configuration summary text for autoyast Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/sysconfig.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/sysconfig.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/sysconfig.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -296,17 +296,13 @@ #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:819 msgid "" "<p>After you save your changes, this editor changes the variables in the\n" -"corresponding sysconfig file. Then it starts activation commands, which " -"changes the underlying configuration files, stops and starts daemons,\n" -"and runs low-level configuration tools so your configuration in sysconfig " -"takes effect.</p>\n" +"corresponding sysconfig file. Then it starts activation commands, which changes the underlying configuration files, stops and starts daemons,\n" +"and runs low-level configuration tools so your configuration in sysconfig takes effect.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext for popup - part 2/2 #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:825 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Important:</b> You still can edit each individual configuration file " -"manually. The name of file is displayed in the variable description.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Important:</b> You still can edit each individual configuration file manually. The name of file is displayed in the variable description.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:830 @@ -320,17 +316,12 @@ #. help rich text displayed after module start (1/2) #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:866 -msgid "" -"<P><B>System Configuration Editor</B></P><P>With the system configuration " -"editor, you can change some system settings. You can also use YaST to " -"configure your hardware and system settings.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>System Configuration Editor</B></P><P>With the system configuration editor, you can change some system settings. You can also use YaST to configure your hardware and system settings.</P>" msgstr "" #. help rich text displayed after module start (2/2) #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:870 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Note:</B> Descriptions are not translated because they are read " -"directly from configuration files.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Note:</B> Descriptions are not translated because they are read directly from configuration files.</P>" msgstr "" #. push button label - displayed only in autoinstallation config mode @@ -360,9 +351,7 @@ #. help text in popup dialog #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:951 -msgid "" -"The search results are displayed here. If you see the item you want, select " -"it then click \"Go to\". Otherwise, click \"Cancel\" to close this dialog." +msgid "The search results are displayed here. If you see the item you want, select it then click \"Go to\". Otherwise, click \"Cancel\" to close this dialog." msgstr "" #. push button label Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/tftp-server.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/tftp-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/tftp-server.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/timezone_db.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/timezone_db.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/timezone_db.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:32+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-03-02 15:29+0330\n" "Last-Translator: مصطفی برمشوری <mostafa.barmshor@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Farsi (Persian) <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/tune.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/tune.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/tune.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:57+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-08-04 16:02+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-10-18 00:49+0330\n" "Last-Translator: مصطفی برمشوری <mostafa.barmshory@p-simorgh.com>\n" "Language-Team: Farsi (Persian) <kde-i18n-doc@kde.org>\n" @@ -19,53 +19,60 @@ "X-Generator: Lokalize 1.0\n" #. Command line help text for the hardware detection module, %1 is "hwinfo" -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:47 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:49 msgid "Hardware Detection - this module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." msgstr "" #. translators: popup heading -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:71 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:73 msgid "Probing Hardware..." msgstr "" #. progress bar label -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:74 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:76 msgid "Progress" msgstr "پیش رفت" #. title label -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:292 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:311 msgid "&All Entries" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:304 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:323 msgid "&Save to File..." msgstr "" #. dialog header -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:313 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:332 msgid "Hardware Information" msgstr "" #. help text -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:316 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:335 msgid "" "<P>The <B>Hardware Information</B> module displays the hardware\n" "details of your computer. Click any node for more information.</p>\n" msgstr "" -#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:319 +#: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:338 msgid "<P>You can save hardware information to a file. Click <B>Save to File</B> and enter the filename.</P>" msgstr "" +#. installation proposal header +#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:31 +#, fuzzy +#| msgid "Static Address Settings" +msgid "System and Hardware Settings" +msgstr "تنظیمات نصب آدرس ایستا" + #. this is a heading #. tree node string -#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:48 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:471 +#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:50 src/include/hwinfo/routines.rb:471 msgid "System" msgstr "سیستم" #. this is a menu entry -#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:50 +#: src/clients/hwinfo_proposal.rb:52 msgid "S&ystem" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/update.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/update.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/update.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -95,8 +95,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:120 msgid "" "<p><b>Create a Complete Backup of\n" -"/etc/sysconfig:</b> This covers all configuration files that are part of " -"the\n" +"/etc/sysconfig:</b> This covers all configuration files that are part of the\n" "sysconfig mechanism, even those that will not be replaced.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -127,7 +126,7 @@ #. screen title for update options #. this is a heading -#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:48 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:300 +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:48 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:278 msgid "Update Options" msgstr "" @@ -161,8 +160,7 @@ msgstr "ناشناس" #. label showing to which version we are updating -#. TRANSLATORS: proposal summary item, %1 is a product name -#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:80 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:200 +#: src/clients/inst_update.rb:80 msgid "Update to %1" msgstr "" @@ -200,8 +198,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>With New Software:</b> This default setting\n" "updates the existing software and installs all new features and benefits of\n" -"the new <tt>%1</tt> version. The selection is based on the former " -"predefined\n" +"the new <tt>%1</tt> version. The selection is based on the former predefined\n" "software selection.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -210,8 +207,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Only Installed Packages:</b> This selection\n" "only updates the packages already installed on your system. <i>Note:</i>\n" -"New software in the predefined software selection, such as new YaST modules, " -"is\n" +"New software in the predefined software selection, such as new YaST modules, is\n" "not available after the update. You might miss new features.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -219,8 +215,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_update.rb:175 msgid "" "<p>After the update, some software might not\n" -"function anymore. Activate <b>Delete Unmaintained Packages</b> to delete " -"those\n" +"function anymore. Activate <b>Delete Unmaintained Packages</b> to delete those\n" "packages during the update.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -245,7 +240,7 @@ #. inform user in the proposal about the failed mount #. error report #: src/clients/inst_update_partition_auto.rb:79 -#: src/clients/rootpart_proposal.rb:110 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:384 +#: src/clients/rootpart_proposal.rb:110 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:385 msgid "Failed to mount target system" msgstr "" @@ -321,15 +316,13 @@ #. error message in proposal #. part of error popup message -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:85 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:406 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:85 src/clients/update_proposal.rb:384 msgid "Cannot read the current RPM Database." msgstr "" #. error message in proposal #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:101 -msgid "" -"The installed product is not compatible with the product on the installation " -"media." +msgid "The installed product is not compatible with the product on the installation media." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: unknown product (label) @@ -345,8 +338,7 @@ #. %2 is the version being installed #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:143 msgid "" -"Updating system to another version (%1 -> %2) is not supported on the " -"running system.<br>\n" +"Updating system to another version (%1 -> %2) is not supported on the running system.<br>\n" "Boot from the installation media and use a normal upgrade\n" "or disable software repositories of products with different versions.\n" msgstr "" @@ -357,17 +349,17 @@ msgstr "" #. Proposal for backup during update -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:216 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:191 msgid "Only update installed packages" msgstr "" #. proposal string -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:231 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:206 msgid "Update based on patterns" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: proposal dialog help -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:257 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:232 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Update Options</big></b> Select how your system will be updated.\n" "Choose if only installed packages should be updated or new ones should be\n" @@ -376,17 +368,17 @@ msgstr "" #. this is a menu entry -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:302 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:280 msgid "&Update Options" msgstr "" #. part of error popup message, %1 stands for newline-separated list of files -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:409 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:387 msgid "None of these files exist:%1" msgstr "" #. continue-cancel popup -#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:539 +#: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:517 msgid "" "The installed product is not compatible with the product\n" "on the installation media. If you try to update using the\n" @@ -484,36 +476,35 @@ msgid "&Boot" msgstr "" -#. continue-cancel popup -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:353 +#. error popup +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:354 msgid "" "No installed system that can be upgraded with this product was found\n" "on the selected partition." msgstr "" #. continue-cancel popup -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:363 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:364 msgid "" "The architecture of the system installed in the selected partition\n" "is different from the one of this product.\n" msgstr "" #. pop-up question -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:393 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:394 msgid "" -"A possibly incomplete installation has been detected on the selected " -"partition.\n" +"A possibly incomplete installation has been detected on the selected partition.\n" "Are sure you want to use it anyway?" msgstr "" #. button label -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:397 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:398 msgid "&Yes, Use It" msgstr "&بله، از ان استفاده کن" #. Target load failed, #466803 #. Target load failed, #466803 -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:435 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:460 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:436 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:461 msgid "" "Initializing the system for upgrade has failed for unknown reason.\n" "It is highly recommended not to continue the upgrade process.\n" @@ -521,7 +512,7 @@ "Are you sure you want to continue?" msgstr "" -#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:441 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:466 +#: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:442 src/include/update/rootpart.rb:467 msgid "&Yes, Continue" msgstr "" @@ -606,8 +597,7 @@ #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1166 msgid "" "Your /boot partition is too small (%1 MB).\n" -"We recommend a size of no less than %2 MB or else the new Kernel may not " -"fit.\n" +"We recommend a size of no less than %2 MB or else the new Kernel may not fit.\n" "It is safer to either enlarge the partition\n" "or not use a /boot partition at all.\n" "\n" @@ -681,10 +671,8 @@ #. a popup message #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1463 msgid "" -"Your system uses a separate /var partition which is required for the " -"upgrade\n" -"process to detect the disk-naming changes. Select the /var partition " -"manually\n" +"Your system uses a separate /var partition which is required for the upgrade\n" +"process to detect the disk-naming changes. Select the /var partition manually\n" "to continue the upgrade process." msgstr "" @@ -717,11 +705,9 @@ #. Calling a script because otherwise this module would depend on yast2-country #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1698 msgid "" -"Some partitions in the system on %1 are mounted by kernel-device name. This " -"is\n" +"Some partitions in the system on %1 are mounted by kernel-device name. This is\n" "not reliable for the update since kernel-device names are unfortunately not\n" -"persistent. It is strongly recommended to start the old system and change " -"the\n" +"persistent. It is strongly recommended to start the old system and change the\n" "mount-by method to any other method for all partitions." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/users.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/users.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/users.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-05-19 09:35+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ msgstr "" #. advise user to remember his new password -#. advise user to remember his new password +#. advise users to remember their new password #: src/clients/inst_root.rb:95 src/clients/inst_root_first.rb:67 msgid "Do not forget what you enter here." msgstr "" @@ -4004,22 +4004,22 @@ msgstr "" #. summary label -#: src/modules/Users.pm:6596 +#: src/modules/Users.pm:6601 msgid "<h3>Users</h3>" msgstr "" #. summary label -#: src/modules/Users.pm:6606 +#: src/modules/Users.pm:6611 msgid "<h3>Groups</h3>" msgstr "" #. summary label -#: src/modules/Users.pm:6617 +#: src/modules/Users.pm:6622 msgid "<h3>Login Settings</h3>" msgstr "" #. summary item, %1 is user name -#: src/modules/Users.pm:6619 +#: src/modules/Users.pm:6624 msgid "User %1 configured for automatic login" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/vm.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/vm.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/vm.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:43+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -29,9 +29,7 @@ #. check for kernel-bigsmp #: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:157 -msgid "" -"x86_64 is the only supported architecture for hosting virtual machines. Your " -"architecture is " +msgid "x86_64 is the only supported architecture for hosting virtual machines. Your architecture is " msgstr "" #. we are already in UML, nested virtual machine is not supported @@ -42,7 +40,8 @@ msgstr "" #. progress stage 1/2 -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:193 +#. Generate a pop dialog to allow user selection of Xen or KVM +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:193 src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:281 #, fuzzy msgid "Verify Installed Packages" msgstr "زبان‌های استرالیایی" @@ -59,31 +58,22 @@ #. xen domain0 installation help text - 1/4 #: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:213 -msgid "" -"<p><big><b>VM Server Configuration</b></big></p><p>Configuration of the VM " -"Server (domain 0) has two parts.</p>" +msgid "<p><big><b>VM Server Configuration</b></big></p><p>Configuration of the VM Server (domain 0) has two parts.</p>" msgstr "" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 2/4 #: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:217 -msgid "" -"<p>The required packages are installed into the system first. Then the boot " -"loader is switched to GRUB (if not already used) and the Xen section is " -"added to the boot loader menu if it is missing.</p>" +msgid "<p>The required packages are installed into the system first. Then the boot loader is switched to GRUB (if not already used) and the Xen section is added to the boot loader menu if it is missing.</p>" msgstr "" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 3/4 #: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:221 -msgid "" -"<p>GRUB is needed because it supports the multiboot standard required to " -"boot Xen and the Linux kernel.</p>" +msgid "<p>GRUB is needed because it supports the multiboot standard required to boot Xen and the Linux kernel.</p>" msgstr "" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 4/4 #: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:225 -msgid "" -"<p>When the configuration has finished successfully, you can boot the VM " -"Server from the boot loader menu.</p>" +msgid "<p>When the configuration has finished successfully, you can boot the VM Server from the boot loader menu.</p>" msgstr "" #. error popup @@ -123,86 +113,83 @@ msgid "libvirt LXC daemon" msgstr "" -#. Generate a pop dialog to allow user selection of Xen or KVM -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:285 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:288 msgid "Software to connect to Virtualization server" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:287 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:290 msgid "Virtualization client tools" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:303 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:306 msgid "Xen Hypervisor" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:305 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:308 msgid "Xen server" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:306 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:309 msgid "Xen tools" msgstr "" #. SLED doesn't have any installation capabilities (L3 support) -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:381 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:384 msgid "Package installation failed\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:389 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:392 msgid "Package installation failed for lxc\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:396 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:399 msgid "Package installation failed for sled client pattern\n" msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:407 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:410 msgid "Package installation failed for sles patterns\n" msgstr "" #. Assume python gtk is installed. If in text mode we don't care -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:420 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:423 msgid "Running in text mode. Install graphical components anyway?" msgstr "" #. progressbar title - check whether Xen packages are installed -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:433 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:436 msgid "Checking packages..." msgstr "" #. progressbar title - install the required packages -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:436 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:439 msgid "Installing packages..." msgstr "" #. error popup #. Now see if they really were installed (bnc#508347) -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:441 src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:448 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:444 src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:451 msgid "Cannot install required packages." msgstr "" #. If grub2 is the bootloader and we succesfully installed Xen, update the grub2 files -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:458 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:461 #, fuzzy #| msgid "Preparing configuration..." msgid "Updating grub2 configuration files..." msgstr "در حال آماده سازی قالب بندی.." #. Default Bridge stage -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:469 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:474 msgid "Configuring Default Network Bridge..." msgstr "" #. Popup yes/no dialog -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:490 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:495 msgid "Network Bridge." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:491 -msgid "" -"<p>For normal network configurations hosting virtual machines, a network " -"bridge is recommended.</p><p>Configure a default network bridge?</p>" +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:496 +msgid "<p>For normal network configurations hosting virtual machines, a network bridge is recommended.</p><p>Configure a default network bridge?</p>" msgstr "" #. Firewall stage - modify the firewall setting, add the xen bridge to FW_FORWARD_ALWAYS_INOUT_DEV @@ -214,31 +201,27 @@ #. Report::Error(_("Failed to configure the firewall to allow the Xen bridge") + "\n" + abortmsg); #. return false; #. } -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:551 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:557 msgid "KVM components are installed. Your host is ready to install KVM guests." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:554 -msgid "" -"KVM components are installed. Reboot the machine and select the native " -"kernel in the boot loader menu to install KVM guests." +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:560 +msgid "KVM components are installed. Reboot the machine and select the native kernel in the boot loader menu to install KVM guests." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:557 -msgid "" -"For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in " -"the boot loader menu." +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:563 +msgid "For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in the boot loader menu." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:560 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:566 msgid "Xen Hypervisor and tools are installed." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:561 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:567 msgid "Virtualization client tools are installed." msgstr "" -#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:562 +#: src/modules/VM_XEN.rb:568 msgid "Libvirt LXC components are installed." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/wagon.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/wagon.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/wagon.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-24 10:57+0100\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-27 16:00+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:26+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/wol.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/wol.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/wol.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:37+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:52+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/xpram.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/xpram.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/xpram.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2013-09-10 10:32+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:53+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/fa/po/yast2-apparmor.fa.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/fa/po/yast2-apparmor.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:43 UTC (rev 89811) +++ trunk/yast/fa/po/yast2-apparmor.fa.po 2014-10-07 16:05:59 UTC (rev 89812) @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: yast2 memory\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-23 15:41+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-04 15:51+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2007-01-23 13:25+0100\n" "Last-Translator: Ehsan F. Hayati <efhayati@gmail.com>\n" "Language-Team: Persian <i18n@suse.de>\n" @@ -57,9 +57,7 @@ #. Read the profiles from the SCR agent #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:90 -msgid "" -"Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the " -"profile." +msgid "Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the profile." msgstr "" #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:93 @@ -139,9 +137,7 @@ #. #. *************************************************************************** #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:52 -msgid "" -"This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and " -"AppArmor profile settings." +msgid "This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and AppArmor profile settings." msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:91 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:103 @@ -254,8 +250,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:441 msgid "" -"<p><b>AppArmor Status</b><br>This reports whether the AppArmor policy " -"enforcement \n" +"<p><b>AppArmor Status</b><br>This reports whether the AppArmor policy enforcement \n" "module is loaded and functioning.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -339,9 +334,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:57 -msgid "" -"<p>These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the " -"profile management tools can be used.</p> " +msgid "<p>These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the profile management tools can be used.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:64 @@ -349,9 +342,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:70 -msgid "" -"<p>Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the " -"Administration guide located in the directory: " +msgid "<p>Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the Administration guide located in the directory: " msgstr "" #. encoding: utf-8 @@ -781,41 +772,31 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:43 msgid "" "<ul><li>Override all DAC access, including ACL execute access if \n" -"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE." -"</li></ul>" +"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE.</li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:49 msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides all DAC restrictions regarding read and search \n" -"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is " -"defined. \n" +"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is defined. \n" "Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE. </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:57 msgid "" -"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where " -"file\n" +"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where file\n" "owner ID must be equal to the user ID, except where CAP_FSETID is\n" "applicable. It does not override MAC and DAC restrictions. </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:65 -msgid "" -"<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file " -"owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the " -"effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the " -"file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and " -"S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not " -"implemented). </li></ul>" +msgid "<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not implemented). </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:71 msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides the restriction that the real or effective user ID \n" -"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of " -"the process \n" +"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of the process \n" "receiving the signal.</li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -838,9 +819,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:97 -msgid "" -"<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</" -"li></ul>" +msgid "<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:103 @@ -856,16 +835,14 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:115 msgid "" "<ul><li> Allows interface configuration</li> \n" -"<li> Allows administration of IP firewall, masquerading and accounting</" -"li> \n" +"<li> Allows administration of IP firewall, masquerading and accounting</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting debug option on sockets</li> \n" "<li> Allows modification of routing tables</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:121 msgid "" -"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets</" -"li> \n" +"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets</li> \n" "<li> Allows binding to any address for transparent proxying</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting TOS (type of service)</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting promiscuous mode</li> \n" @@ -888,8 +865,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:143 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Allows locking of shared memory segments</li> <li> Allows mlock " -"and\n" +"<ul><li> Allows locking of shared memory segments</li> <li> Allows mlock and\n" "mlockall (which does not really have anything to do with IPC) </li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -899,8 +875,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:153 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit</" -"li> \n" +"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit</li> \n" "<li> Modify cap_bset </li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -951,8 +926,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:199 msgid "" "<li> Allows removing semaphores</li> \n" -"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores " -"and shared memory</li> \n" +"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores and shared memory</li> \n" "<li> Allows locking/unlocking of shared memory segment</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning swap on/off</li> \n" "<li> Allows forged pids on socket credentials passing</li>" @@ -963,8 +937,7 @@ "<li> Allows setting read ahead and flushing buffers on block devices</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting geometry in floppy driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning DMA on/off in xd driver</li> \n" -"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra " -"ioctls)</li>" +"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra ioctls)</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:212 @@ -977,8 +950,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:218 msgid "" -"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</" -"li> \n" +"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</li> \n" "<li> Allows DDI debug ioctl on sbpcd driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting up serial ports</li> \n" "<li> Allows sending raw qic-117 commands</li>" @@ -997,10 +969,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:236 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different " -"UID) processes</li> \n" -"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own " -"processes and setting \n" +"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different UID) processes</li> \n" +"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own processes and setting \n" "the scheduling algorithm used by another process.</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting cpu affinity on other processes </li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -1010,14 +980,12 @@ "<ul><li> Override resource limits. Set resource limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override quota limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override reserved space on ext2 filesystem</li> \n" -"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling " -"resources)</li>" +"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling resources)</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:251 msgid "" -"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you " -"can override using fsuid too</li> \n" +"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you can override using fsuid too</li> \n" "<li> Override size restrictions on IPC message queues</li> \n" "<li> Allows more than 64hz interrupts from the real-time clock</li> \n" "<li> Override max number of consoles on console allocation</li> \n" @@ -1190,8 +1158,7 @@ "individual occurrences, including the date of the last occurrence. \n" "<br>For example:<br> <tt>AppArmor: PERMITTING access to capability\n" "'setgid' (httpd2-prefork(6347) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork \n" -"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 " -"2004.</tt>\n" +"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 2004.</tt>\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1256,8 +1223,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<li>Select <b>Include unknown security events</b> if \n" -"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number.</" -"li>" +"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number.</li>" msgstr "" #. ---------------------------- @@ -1267,8 +1233,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:106 msgid "" -"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control " -"module. \n" +"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control module. \n" "You can generate highly optimized and robust security profiles \n" "by using the suggestions made by AppArmor." msgstr "" @@ -1296,9 +1261,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:126 -msgid "" -"File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six " -"modes:" +msgid "File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six modes:" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:129 @@ -1433,14 +1396,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:196 -msgid "" -"<li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" +msgid "<li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:199 -msgid "" -"<li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</" -"li>" +msgid "<li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:202 @@ -1448,19 +1408,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:205 -msgid "" -"<li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "<li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:208 -msgid "" -"<li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "<li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:211 -msgid "" -"<li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match " -"cd</li>" +msgid "<li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match cd</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:214 @@ -1618,17 +1574,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:889 -msgid "" -"The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name " -"or press Abort to cancel this wizard." +msgid "The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name or press Abort to cancel this wizard." msgstr "" #. FIXME: format these texts better #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:928 -msgid "" -"<p>View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing " -"entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog.</p>" +msgid "<p>View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text @@ -1643,9 +1595,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:942 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Add Entry:</b><br>Select the type of resource to add from the drop " -"down list.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Add Entry:</b><br>Select the type of resource to add from the drop down list.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text - part x1 @@ -1667,16 +1617,14 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:959 msgid "" "<li><b>Include</b><br>Add an include entry to this profile. This option \n" -"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load " -"time.</li>" +"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load time.</li>" msgstr "" #. help text - part x5 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:963 msgid "" "<li><b>Network Entry</b><br>Add a network rule entry to this profile. \n" -"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the " -"profile. \n" +"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the profile. \n" "You may specify a network address family and socket type.</li>" msgstr "" @@ -1684,12 +1632,10 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:969 msgid "" "<li><b>Hat</b><br>Add a sub-profile for this profile, called a Hat. This\n" -"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be " -"selected\n" +"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be selected\n" "during execution only in the context of being asked for by a <b>changehat\n" "aware</b> application. \n" -"For more information on changehat, see <b>man changehat</b> on your system " -"or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" +"For more information on changehat, see <b>man changehat</b> on your system or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" msgstr "" #. help text - part x7 @@ -1699,18 +1645,15 @@ #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:982 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Delete Entry:</b><br>Removes the selected entry from this profile.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Delete Entry:</b><br>Removes the selected entry from this profile.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text - part y1 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:987 msgid "" "<p><b>*Clean Exec</b><br>The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile \n" -"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping " -"the environment \n" -"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These " -"variables are:" +"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping the environment \n" +"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These variables are:" msgstr "" #. help text - part y2 @@ -1774,9 +1717,7 @@ #. Widget activated in the table #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1145 -msgid "" -"Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include " -"entries." +msgid "Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include entries." msgstr "" #. Make sure that the entry doesn't already exist @@ -1791,9 +1732,7 @@ msgstr "انتخاب حالت" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1335 -msgid "" -"Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these " -"directories: \n" +msgid "Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these directories: \n" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1379 -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe@opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner@opensuse.org